Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 760

IP-422

Print Controller

PS-343
PostScript3 Option

Users Manual

IP Series
Print
Controller

Thank you very much for purchasing the Konica IP-422 Print Controller.
This User's Manual includes instructions for printing, handling the machine correctly, and safety precautions. Please read this manual before performing any printing operations or using the equipment in any
way.
To maintain satisfactory printing performance, please read this manual before printing or using the equipment in any way.

COPYRIGHT
2002 by Konica Business Technologies, Inc.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT:
Microsoft, MS and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines, Inc. in the United States.
WindowsTM is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
HP and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Agfa Microtype font is a registered trademark of Agfa Corporation.
PEERLESS is a registered trademark of PEERLESS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
Apple, Macintosh and Mac are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Adobe, Adobe Logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Logo, PostScript and PostScript Logo are registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc.
Other company names and product names used in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies.

MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT:
The KONICA IP-422 Print Controller will give you many years of trouble-free service. To ensure high quality performance and to prevent premature wear and failure of precision parts and components, schedule
regular cleaning and routine adjustments.
We recommend that you contact your service representative to discuss the benefits and advantages of
Konica's Customer Service Maintenance Agreement and to be shown how a maintenance plan can be tailored to your individual needs.

NOTICE:
Konica Business Technologies, Inc. has made every effort to ensure that the information in this manual is
complete and accurate. However, constant efforts are also being made to improve and update the product. Therefore, Konica Business Technologies, Inc. shall not be liable for errors in this manual or for any
consequential damages resulting from the use of this manual. The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
FEDERAL OR STATE STATUTES MAY PROHIBIT THE COPYING OF CERTAIN DOCUMENTS OR
INFORMATION, RESULTING IN FINES OR IMPRISONMENT FOR VIOLATORS.

MANUAL PART NUMBER:


OP-IP422-01

WEBSITE ADDRESS:
http://www.konicabt.com

CORRESPONDENCE:
Correspondence regarding this manual may be mailed to the address shown below.
Konica Business Technologies, Inc.
Corporate Publications
500 Day Hill Road
Windsor, CT 06095

Introduction
The Konica IP-422 is a print controller designed to be a built-in server for the Konica 7122/7130 printer/
copier. It enables direct printing from Windows-compliant computers. It can also enable use of the copier as
a network printer when an internal network interface card is used.

FCC Regulation
Warning:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential area.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit other than the circuit to which the receiver is connected.
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Canadian Department of Communications Regulations


Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Patent Notice
The product includes an implementation of LZW licensed under U.S.Patent 4,558,302.

Built-in Fonts
The print controller includes support for PCL5e Language (HP PCL clone) and includes the 80 built-in
Agfa Microtype fonts. For details on fonts, refer to [font list] (
Page 710)

Note
A part or all of this User's Manual may not be used or copied without permission.
Konica will have no liability for any incidents caused by using the printing system and this manual.
Information written in this User's Manual is subject to change without notice.
Konica Corporation maintains the copyright of this printer driver.

iii

Introduction

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT


This package contains the following materials provided by Konica Corporation (Konica): software included as part
of the printing system, the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the
encrypted form ("Font Programs"), other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the
Printing Software ("Host Software"), and related explanatory written materials ("Documentation").
The term "Software" shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software.
The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement.
Konica grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree
to the following:
1.

You may use the Printing Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes.

2.

In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 ("Printing Software") above, you may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols
("Typefaces") on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes.

3.

You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or used on
any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software.

4.

You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee's right and interest to such
Software and Documentation ("Assignee") provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such Software and
Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

5.

You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation.

6.

You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.

7.

Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with Konica.

8.

Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owner's name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software. Such
use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark.

9.

You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software that the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of
all Software and Documentation as described above.

10. In no event will Konica be liable to you for any consequential, incidental or special damages, including any lost
profits or lost saving, even if Konica has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for any claim by
any third party. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental, consequential
or special damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.
2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as
such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through
227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein.

iv

Introduction

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT


NON-EXCLUSIVE LICENSE AGREEMENT
(Exclusive for PostScript3 Option)
READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS
LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY
BY USING THE PRODUCTS DESCRIBED IN THIS USER MANUAL, BY OPENING A
SHRINK-WRAP PACKAGE CONTAINING SOFTWARE OR DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE
OR PRINTER DRIVERS TO YOUR COMPUTER, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE
TERMS OF THIS LICENSE.
The computer programs embedded in the equipment and User Documentation are licensed (not sold) to You
by Konica Corporation (KONICA or LICENSOR). The term Software shall be used to describe accompanying Printer Drivers, software included as part of the printing system including PostScript software and
other Adobe software (Printing Software), digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the
special format and in the encrypted form (Font Programs), and/or other software which runs on a computer
system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (Host Software), and related explanatory written
materials (Documentation), Upgrades, Modified Versions, Additions, and Copies of the Software (the
Software). This license agreement represents the entire agreement concerning the Software between You
and KONICA and it supersedes any prior proposal, representation, or understanding between the parties.
KONICA reserves any rights not expressly granted to You. This package may contain third-party software
provided by Adobe Systems Incorporated (Adobe) or other suppliers in which case Konica grants to you a
non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following:
1.

LICENSE GRANT. You do not receive title to the Software or User Documentation. Licensor grants to
You, and You accept, a nonexclusive license to use the Software embedded in the Equipment in
machine-readable, object code form only (referred to as the Computer Program), the accompanying
User Documentation, and Printer Drivers furnished to You, (collectively the Licensed Articles) only as
authorized in this License Agreement. The Computer Program may be used only on the Equipment in
which it is embedded and may not be shared with or transferred to any other equipment or product.
The Printer Drivers shall be used only with printer products designed to work with the equipment containing the embedded Computer Program. You may make a single archive copy of the Printer Drivers
for back-up purposes, provided that it includes all copyright notices, markings and proprietary legends
on the original, including the markings of any other company contained therein. This archive copy may
not be in use at any time, may only be used for back-up purposes and must remain in Your possession
and control. You may not copy the drivers to a bulletin board or similar system.

a)

You may use the Printing Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes.

b)

In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in (a), you may use Roman Font Programs to
reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) on
the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes.

c)

Notwithstanding the restrictions in 1 above, you may install the Adobe Driver and/or other third-party's
Driver Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running
the Printing Software.

d)

You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation.

e)

You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the
Software or use any other method to discover the printer drivers or Softwares source code.

f)

You may not rent, lease, sublicense, modify, adapt, pledge, lend, share or transfer versions or copies of
the Software You do not use, or Software contained on any unused media, or any of Your rights under
this Agreement except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as
described in (g) below or to the extent expressly permitted by the laws of the country in which you use
the Software and Licensed Articles, You may not create derivative works based upon the Software or
any part thereof. You may not copy the Licensed Articles except as specifically provided in this License
Agreement.

Introduction

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT


g)

You may assign your rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Your rights and interest to
such Software and Documentation (Assignee) provided you transfer to Your Assignee all copies of
such Software and Documentation and the Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

2.

TITLE: Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall
remain with the owner of the third-party software and Konica.

3.

TRADEMARKS: Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including
identification of the trademark owner's name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output
produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership to that
trademark.

4.

LICENSOR'S RIGHTS. You acknowledge and agree that the Licensed Articles, including but not limited to the Software and the Documentation, are owned by Licensor and its suppliers, and its structure,
organization and code are proprietary and valuable trade secrets of Licensor or its suppliers. United
States Copyright Law and International Treaty Provisions also protect the Licensed Articles and Documentation, including but not limited to the Software and the Documentation. You further acknowledge
and agree that all right, title and interest in and to the Licensed Articles, including associated intellectual property rights, are and shall remain, with Licensor or its supplier. Licensors suppliers may protect
their rights in the Licensed Articles in the event of a violation of this License Agreement. This License
Agreement does not convey to You an interest in or to the Licensed Articles, but only a limited right of
use revocable in accordance with the terms of this License Agreement.

5.

TERMINATION. This License Agreement is effective upon the purchase and acceptance of the Equipment by You or the downloading of any Software or Printer Driver from KONICA'S Website or other
authorized electronic medium and shall continue until terminated. This License Agreement will terminate upon Your sale, transfer or disposal of the Equipment having the Software embedded therein.
Licensor may terminate this License Agreement upon the breach by You of any term hereof. Upon
such termination by Licensor, You agree to delete the Software and Printer Drivers from the hard drive
of the Product, destroy all copies of the Software and Printer Drivers from the hard drive of the Equipment and destroy all copies of the Software and Printer Drivers and User Documentation.

6.

LICENSE FEES. The license fees of $250.00 (included in the purchase price of the Equipment) paid
by You are paid in consideration of the license granted under this License Agreement.

7.

LIMITED WARRANTY. Licensor warrants, for Your benefit alone, for a period of 90 days from the date
of commencement of this License Agreement (referred to as the Warranty Period), that the Software
and Printer Drivers shall operate substantially in accordance with the functional specifications in the
User Documentation. KONICA specifically does not warrant that the Software or Printer Drivers will
operate uninterrupted or error-free. If during the Warranty Period, a defect in the Software or Printer
Drivers appears, You may contact the Licensor for either a replacement or, if so elected by Licensor,
refund of amounts paid by You under this License Agreement. You agree that the foregoing constitutes
Your sole and exclusive remedy for breach by Licensor of any warranties made under this Agreement.
EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE, THE LICENSED ARTICLES, AND THE
SOFTWARE CONTAINED THEREIN, ARE LICENSED AS IS, AND, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW, THE LICENSOR DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

8.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. To the maximum extent permitted by law, and except for claims which result
in personal injury or death caused by Licensors negligence or intentional acts, Licensors, or any of its
affiliates or subsidiaries, cumulative liability to You or any other party for any loss or damages resulting
from any claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall not
exceed $250.00. In no event shall Licensor, or Adobe, the owner of other third party software or any

vi

Introduction

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT


of their affiliates or subsidiaries be liable to you or any third party for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits, even if Licensor has been advised of the possibility of such damages or for any claim by any third party. Some states do not allow the limitation or
exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may
not apply to You.
9.

GOVERNING LAW. This License Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the
laws of the State of Connecticut, United States of America. Should any court of competent jurisdiction
declare any term of this License Agreement void or unenforceable, such declaration shall have no
effect on the remaining terms hereof.

10. COSTS OF LITIGATION. If any action is brought by either party to this License Agreement against the
other party regarding the subject matter hereof, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover, in addition to any other relief granted, reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses of litigation.
11. NO WAIVER. The failure of any party to enforce any rights granted hereunder or to take action against
the other party in the event of any breach hereunder shall not be deemed a waiver by that party as to
subsequent enforcement of rights or subsequent actions in the event of future breaches.
12. Notice to Government End Users: U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS: The Licensed Articles
are provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to
restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software
clause at DFARS 252.277-7013, and paragraph (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.277-19. The Software is a commercial item, as that term is
defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101, consisting of commercial computer software and commercial computer
software documentation, as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R.
12.212 and C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. The manufacturer is: Konica Business Technologies, Inc.,
500 Day Hill Road, Windsor, Connecticut 06095
13. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY: You are hereby notified that Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware
corporation, located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, CA 95110-2704 is a third-party beneficiary to this
Agreement to the extent that this Agreement contains provisions which relate to Licensees use of the
Software, Font Programs, Typefaces and the trademarks licensed hereby. Such provisions are made
expressly for the benefit of Adobe and are enforceable by Adobe in addition to Konica.

vii

Introduction

CONTENTS

CONTENTS
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Folder structure on the CD-ROM (IP-422). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Folder structure on the CD-ROM (PS-343) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

About this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiii


Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiv
Usage of this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv

I Set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-1.

What is the print controller? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3


Role of the print controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What you can do with the IP-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Three Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1-2.

Flow of processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow for printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC-Fax transmission/reception flow . . . . .
Flow for network scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3.

.......
.......
.......
.......

........................
........................
........................
........................

6
6
7
9

Operation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PCs and OSs that can be connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Interfaces used for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

II Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2-1.
2-2.

Checking the PC to be used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14


Using the print controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Printer driver types and supported OSs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Page notation language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2-3.

Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17


Konica driver installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Installing the Adobe driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Checking printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

2-4.

Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33


Access rights and range of operation . . . .
Konica driver installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Adobe driver. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-5.

.......
.......
.......
.......

......
......
......
......

.......
.......
.......
.......

......
......
......
......

....
....
....
....

33
34
41
48

Using this printing system with Windows 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50


Access rights and range of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Konica driver installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

viii

Introduction

CONTENTS
Installing the Adobe driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Checking printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

2-6.

Using this printing system with Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72


Access rights and range of operation . . . .
Konica driver installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Adobe driver. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-7.

.......
.......
.......
.......

......
......
......
......

.......
.......
.......
.......

......
......
......
......

....
....
....
....

72
73
82
91

Using this printing system with a Macintosh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94


Installing the Adobe driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Selecting the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Checking printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

2-8.

Uninstalling the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100


Deleting a printer driver with Windows 95/98/Me . .
Deleting with Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting with Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting with Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninstalling from Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-9.

......
......
......
......
......

.......
.......
.......
.......
.......

......
......
......
......
......

...
...
...
...
...

101
102
106
110
116

Installation problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117


An old version of the driver is already installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
You are asked which file to use, the one you are installing or a new file
already on the computer.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Test page cannot be printed.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Chapter 3 Printing with Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118


3-1.

Setting printer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119


Windows 95/98/Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows NT4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2.
3-3.

Function list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136


Basic print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Setting the printer languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the number of copies to print (Copies). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the print direction (Orientation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the print paper size (Paper size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the type of paper (Media type/Paper type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing enlarged/reduced (Scaling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the input tray (Paper source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the output tray (Output tray) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the margin (Margins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4.

138
139
140
141
143
145
147
149
151

Printing multiple pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152


Printing on both the front and rear of the paper (Duplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper (Pages per sheet/Layout). . . . . .
Folding paper in two to make booklets (Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing one copy at a time of all pages (Collate/Sort) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputting sorted into separate sets of copies (Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stapling (Staple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching a front cover/back cover (Front cover/Back cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5.

120
123
127
131
135

155
157
159
162
164
166
169

Making image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172


Halftoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

ix

Introduction

CONTENTS
Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toner save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings the resolution (Resolution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing with black and white reversed (Print as a negative image) . . . . . . . . . .
Printing with left/right reversed (Print as a mirror image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6.

173
175
176
177
179

Setting the font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180


TrueType font settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
PostScript font settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

3-7.

Special printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185


Printing overlaying another document (Overlay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Printing watermarks (Watermark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Printing with a password (Password print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

3-8.

Setting the connection between the computer and printer . . . . . . . . 200


Windows 95/98/Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Windows NT 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Windows 2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213


4-1.
4-2.
4-3.

Setting printer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214


Function list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Basic print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Setting the number of copies to print (Copies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the print direction (Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the print paper size (Paper). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the type of paper (Media type). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing enlarged/reduced (Magnification ratio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the input tray (Paper source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the print order (Reverse print order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the output tray (Output tray) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the margin (Margins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-4.

Printing multiple pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226


Printing on both the front and rear of the paper (Duplex printing) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
(Document pages/Print pages/Layout direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding paper in two to make booklets (Special mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing one copy at a time of all pages (Collate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outputting sorted into separate sets of copies (Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stapling (Staple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching a front cover/back cover (Front Cover/Back Cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-5.

229
230
233
235
236
238
241

Special printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243


Printing with top/bottom or left/right reversed (Mirror image printing) . . . . . . . . .
Printing with black and white reversed (Negative image printing). . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing watermarks (Watermark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smoothing characters and curved lines (Smoothing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving toner (Toner save) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-6.

216
217
218
220
221
222
223
224
225

243
244
245
248
249

Making PostScript settings (File save) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM) . . . . . . 252


5-1.
5-2.

Managing the print count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253


Printer EKC/ECM settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Printer EKC/ECM printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Introduction

CONTENTS
Reading counter values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
EKC/ECM limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Chapter 6 Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257


6-1.

Problems with printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258


No response to printer commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The paper type cannot be selected. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test page cannot be printed.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The print settings and print results do not match. . .
Duplex printing is not possible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forms cannot be printed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2.

......
......
......
......
......
......

.......
.......
.......
.......
.......
.......

......
......
......
......
......
......

...
...
...
...
...
...

Problems printing with the Adobe driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262


PostScript error is displayed.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[Vmerror], [limitcheck], or other PostScript error is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PostScript error is displayed no matter which computer is attempting
to print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PostScript error is displayed for printing from a specific application. . . . . . . . . .
PostScript error is displayed for printing a specific file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PostScript error is displayed for printing a specific page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fonts cannot be downloaded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non fixed size paper (custom) cannot be printed correctly with
a Macintosh. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3.

258
258
259
260
260
261
262
262
262
262
262
262
263
263

Checking incomplete jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

III FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266


Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.
7-4.

Sending faxes from the computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Receiving faxes with the computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering recipient names and their fax numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using PC-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

268
269
270
271

OSs supported by PC-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271


Setting the fax unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Chapter 8 Sending Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272


8-1.

Transmission procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273


Fax transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

8-2.

PC-Fax transmission error reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279


9-1.

Registering phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280


Registering recipient information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Registering broadcast group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

9-2.

Managing phonebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289


Saving phonebooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Preparing a new phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Switching between phonebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

9-3.

Phonebook usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292


Sending faxes using the phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

xi

Introduction

CONTENTS

Chapter 10 Receiving Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293


10-1. Fax reception settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
PC-Fax reception settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

IV Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Chapter 11 Summary of Scanner Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
11-1. Scanner functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
11-2. Scan data output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Storing to a box (Scan to box). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Sending with email (Scan to E-mail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Sending to FTP server (Scan to FTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307


12-1. Selecting the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Storing to a box (Scan to box). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Sending with email (Scan to E-mail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Sending to FTP server (Scan to FTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330


12-3. Inputting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Inputting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

12-4. Setting scanner functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343


Scanning mode usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

12-5. Scanning documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344


Application function settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

12-6. Importing scanned data into a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362


12-7. Using the network scanner driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Check the computer to use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the network scanner driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the computer and the hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing scan data into the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner driver screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

363
363
366
368
370

Chapter 13 When There Is Trouble with the Scanner . . . . . . . . 373


13-1. Cannot connect from computer to copier's hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
13-2. Output error lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

V Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377


Chapter 14 Control Panel Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
14-1. Control panel names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
14-2. LCD screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
LCD screen operation methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Job list screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Chapter 15 Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384


15-1. Menu configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Displaying the Main Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

xii

Introduction

CONTENTS

15-2. Test print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390


PCL Demo Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCL Font List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PS Demo Page (only when PostScript option installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PS Font List (only when PostScript option installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Config.Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NIC Config. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

390
391
392
393
394
396

15-3. Controller settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398


Banner Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Banner Page Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Time Out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan Data Auto Del. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDL Select (only when PostScript option installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

398
400
402
404
406
408

15-4. Print default setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410


Default Paper . . .
Duplex . . . . . . . . .
Orientation. . . . . .
Copies . . . . . . . . .
Override Paper . .

.......
.......
.......
.......
.......

......
......
......
......
......

......
......
......
......
......

.......
.......
.......
.......
.......

......
......
......
......
......

.......
.......
.......
.......
.......

......
......
......
......
......

...
...
...
...
...

410
412
414
416
418

15-5. PCL setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420


Point Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Font Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CR/LF Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbol Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

421
422
423
424
425
426
427

15-6. Scan error list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428


15-7. Format HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431


16-1. Key operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Usage objectives for key operator mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Switching the key operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

16-2. Contents of settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435


Auto reset timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINT W/O key count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCAN W/O key count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving to power save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan image rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset data after job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443

VI Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Chapter 17 Summary of Network Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
17-1. Network functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Features of network functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Use with peer-to-peer connections (Windows 95/98/Me) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Use through LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

xiii

Introduction

CONTENTS
Using with UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Using with NetWare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Using with Macintosh (Only when PostScript option installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

17-2. Network function usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449


Connection with the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Network setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

17-3. Network setting item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451


18-1. Method for setting network from control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
IP address settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Character input on LCD screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

18-2. NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457


Unit Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Update NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Admin Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

18-3. Print on startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462


18-4. TCP/IP setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Enable TCP/IP. . . . . . . . . .
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Gateway . . . . . . . .
Base Port Number. . . . . . .
Enable DHCP . . . . . . . . . .
IP Addr.in NVRAM. . . . . . .
LPD Banner. . . . . . . . . . . .

.........................................
.........................................
.........................................
.........................................
.........................................
.........................................
.........................................
.........................................

466
468
470
472
474
476
478
480

18-5. NetWare setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482


Enable NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NDS Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NDS Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Queue Scan Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disable Bindery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

483
485
487
489
491
493
495
497
499

18-6. AppleTalk setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501


Enable AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Printer Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Zone Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

18-7. WINS setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508


NetBIOS Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Primary Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Secondary Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

18-8. FTP setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515


FTP Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
FTP Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

18-9. Email setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520


SMTP Server Name . . . . .
SMTP Port Number . . . . . .
SMTP Timeout . . . . . . . . .
Max.Message Size . . . . . .

.........................................
.........................................
.........................................
.........................................

xiv

521
523
525
527

Introduction

CONTENTS
From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Message Body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

18-10. DNS setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535


DNS Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
NIC Domain Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

18-11. Factory default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

Chapter 19 Using Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542


19-1. MAP (Management Access Program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
MAP operation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

19-2. Installing MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544


19-3. MAP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
19-4. Starting MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer


(Windows 95/98/Me only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
20-1.
20-2.
20-3.
20-4.

IP Peer-to-Peer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation for Peer-to-Peer printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print controller TCP/IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer TCP/IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

550
551
552
553

Communications protocol check method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554


IP Peer-to-Peer installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
IP Peer-to-Peer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

20-6. Installing a printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Chapter 21 Using IPX Peer-to-Peer


(Windows 95/98/Me only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
21-1. IPX Peer-to-Peer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
21-2. Preparation for IPX Peer-to-Peer printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
21-3. IPX Peer-to-Peer installation and setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
IPX Peer-to-Peer installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
IPX Peer-to-Peer setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR


(Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
22-1.
22-2.
22-3.
22-4.

LPD/LPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparations for printing with LPD/LPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print controller TCP/IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows NT 4.0 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

577
578
579
580

Checking the network service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580


Adding a printer port and installing a printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

22-5. Windows 2000 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587


Checking the Unix print service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Adding a printer port and installing a printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

22-6. Windows XP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

xv

Introduction

CONTENTS
Checking the Unix print service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Adding a printer port and installing a printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Chapter 23 Using with NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601


23-1. Print controller NetWare settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
23-2. NetWare 3.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Before setting NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
NetWare settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

23-3. NetWare 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604


Features of NetWare 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
NDS settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Bindery emulation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

Chapter 24 Using via the Internet


(Windows 2000/XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
24-1. Internet printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
24-2. Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Printer TCP/IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
IPP attribute settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

24-3. Windows 2000 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611


24-4. Windows XP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624


25-1.
25-2.
25-3.
25-4.

UNIX printing through TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Printing overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring IP address to the network interface card. . . . . . . . . . . .
lpd UNIX printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up a BSD Remote Printer to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up an AIX version 2.5 Remote Printer to Use lpd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up an AIX 4.0 System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up an HP-UX Remote Printer to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up an AS/400 System to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up a DEC ULTRIX 4.3 RISC or OSF1 Remote Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up a SCO UNIX Remote Printer to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up System V Release 4 and Solaris 2.X to Use lpd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing on Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

625
626
627
628
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636

Chapter 26 Use with AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637


26-1.
26-2.
26-3.
26-4.
26-5.

Preliminary procedure for using with AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Network controller TCP/IP settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network controller AppleTalk settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Macintosh settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

638
639
640
641
642

Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network . . . . . . . . . 643


27-1. Troubleshooting network hardware connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
LEDs showing network controller status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

27-2. MAP troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645


27-3. NetWare protocol troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
xvi

Introduction

CONTENTS
NetWare check items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Server check items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Workstation check items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network controller setting check items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print server/file server/printer check items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work station and network controller connection check items.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When the connection between the network controller and the Novell file
server is cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When output from a different context is not possible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27-4.
27-5.
27-6.
27-7.

Using DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using arp command (Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP). . . . . . . . . .
Using BOOTP to assign IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using rarp to assign IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

646
646
647
647
648
648
648
648

649
650
651
653

To store the IP address, use the following procedure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655


Loading the UNIX-TCP/IP Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Printing on Ver. 1 Solaris and OSF1 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Printing on DEC ULTRIX 4.3 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Printing on HP/UX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the SAM Program to Configure the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Printing on System V (Solaris Ver. 2)/
System V Rel. 4 386-based Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Printing on SCO UNIX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Printing on AIX RISC System/6000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Printer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

656
657
658
660
661
662
663
665
667
669

27-9. Resetting to the factory default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

VII Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672


Chapter 28 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
28-1. When trouble occurs in this printing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 29 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676


29-1. IP-422 product specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Printer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

677
678
678
679

29-2. PostScript PS-343 option product specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681


29-3. Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682
Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
Problems with optional products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

29-4. Function list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688


PCL function list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Adobe PostScript Function list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695

29-5. Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702


Using the accessory screen fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
Installing screen fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703

xvii

Introduction

CONTENTS
Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloading fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCL font list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PostScript font list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

29-6.
29-7.
29-8.
29-9.

Font number list (Control panel-PCL setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Symbol sets list (Control panel-PCL setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing setting values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

706
709
710
712

716
719
721
722

Initializing from the control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722


Initializing with Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725

29-10. Printing the network settings list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726


29-11. Index according to item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
29-12. Purpose-oriented index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732

xviii

Introduction

Package Contents

Package Contents
The following items are supplied with the IP-422:
Notice Sheet
Interface Board
User Software CD
(Windows)
Printer Driver
Scanner Driver

(compatible with TWAIN)

Network Connection Utilities


BOOTP
IP-P2P
IPX-P2P
MAP
NW Setup
UNIX
Adobe Acrobat Reader
User's Manual

(this manual)

Release Note

(describes the latest information as well as limits of the system and the user software.)

Screenfonts
(Macintosh)
Adobe Acrobat Reader
User's Manual

(this manual)

The following items are supplied with the PS-343:


PS protection chip
User Software CD (Including printer driver, Adobe Acrobat Reader, this Users Manual and Release
Note*)
*Release Note describes the latest information and limits of the system and the user software.

xix

Introduction

System Requirements

System Requirements
Windows
The following are required to print from Windows-compliant computers to the printing system:
Computers on which Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP can run
CD-ROM drive (necessary to install the printer driver or the scanner driver)

Using Windows 95/98/Me


Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
32 MB RAM or more

Using Windows NT4.0/2000/XP


Microsoft Windows NT4.0/2000/XP
32 MB RAM or more

Parallel Port
The following are required to print to the print controller by way of the parallel port:
Windows-compliant computers
IEEE 1284 parallel cable
One end of the cable is required to have a DB 36 pin male connector (connected to the print controller).

xx

Introduction

Folder structure on the CD-ROM (IP-422)

Folder structure on the CD-ROM (IP-422)


The folders included on the accompanying CD-ROM for IP-422 are structured as shown below.
This illustration will be helpful for locating specific folders or files.
In this manual, folder names and file names are not preceded by the root directory.
You may use the files in the English folder.

User Software CD

Windows
English
Acroread
NetUtil
BOOTP
IP-P2P
IPX-P2P
MAP
NWSetup
Unix

(Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0)


(IP address assign program)
(IP base - Peer to Peer program)
(IPX base - Peer to Peer program)
(Management Access Program)
(NetWare Setup program)
(Utilities for Unix)

Printer
Win9x_Me
WinNT_2000_XP

(Printer Driver for Windows 95/98/Me)


(Printer Driver for Windows NT/2000/XP)

Scanner
Screenfonts
UserGuide
Others

(Scanner Driver (compatible with TWAIN))


(TrueType Screen Fonts)

ip422_int_vxxx.pdf

(IP-422/PS-343 User's Manual for non-USA)

webutil_e_vxxx.pdf

(Web Utilities User's Reference Guide)

ip422_us_vxxx.pdf

(IP-422/PS-343 User's Manual for USA)

webutil_e_vxxx.pdf

(Web Utilities User's Reference Guide)

USA

Japanese
Acroread
NetUtil
Printer
Scanner
Screenfonts
UserGuide

(Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0)


(Network Utilities)
(Printer Driver)
(Scanner Driver)
(Screen Fonts)
(User's Manual)

Macintosh
English
Acroread

(Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0)

UserGuide
Others
ip422_int_vxxx.pdf

(IP-422/PS-343 User's Manual for non-USA)

webutil_e_vxxx.pdf

(Web Utilities User's Reference Guide)

ip422_us_vxxx.pdf

(IP-422/PS-343 User's Manual for USA)

webutil_e_vxxx.pdf

(Web Utilities User's Reference Guide)

USA

Japanese
Acroread
UserGuide

(Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0)


(User's Manual)

xxi

Introduction

Folder structure on the CD-ROM (PS-343)

Folder structure on the CD-ROM (PS-343)


Folder structure on the CD-ROM (PS3 Option)
The folders included on the accompanying CD-ROM for PS-343 are structured as shown below.
This illustration will be helpful for locating specific folders or files.
In this manual, folder names and file names are not preceded by the root directory.
You may use the files in the English folder.

User Software CD

Windows
English
Acroread
Driver

(Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0)

AdobePS
Win9x_Me
WinNT
Win2000_XP
Screenfonts
ATM Light
PS Screen Fonts

(Printer Driver for Windows 95/98/Me)


(Printer Driver for Windows NT)
(Printer Driver for Windows 2000/XP)
(Adobe Type Manager 4.1)
(PS3 TrueType/Type1 Screen Fonts)

UserGuide
Others
ip422_int_vxxx.pdf

(IP-422/PS-343 User's Maual for non-USA)

webutil_e_vxxx.pdf

(Web Utilities User's Reference Guide)

ip422_us_vxxx.pdf

(IP-422/PS-343 User's Maual for USA)

webutil_e_vxxx.pdf

(Web Utilities User's Reference Guide)

USA

Japanese
Acroread
Driver

(Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0)


(Printer Driver)

Screenfonts
UserGuide

(Adobe Type Manager / Screen Fonts)


(User's Manual)

Macintosh
English
Acroread

(Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0)

Driver
OS7_1 or more

(Printer Driver/PPD file for MacOS7.x)

OS8_x to 9_x
Screenfonts
ATM Light
PS3 TrueType
PS3 Type1

(Printer Driver/PPD file for MacOS8.x -MacOS9.x)


(Adobe Type Manager 4.1)
(Screen Fonts for PS3 TrueType)
(Screen Fonts for PS3 Type1)

UserGuide
Others
ip422_int_vxxx.pdf

(IP-422/PS-343 User's Manual for non-USA)

webutil_e_vxxx.pdf

(Web Utilities User's Reference Guide)

ip422_us_vxxx.pdf

(IP-422/PS-343 User's Manual for USA)

webutil_e_vxxx.pdf

(Web Utilities User's Reference Guide)

USA

Japanese
Acroread
Driver

(Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0)


(Printer Driver)

Screenfonts
UserGuide

(Adobe Type Manager / Screen Fonts)


(User's Manual)

xxii

Introduction

About this Manual


This manual is used only for the IP-422 Print Controller.
This manual describes how to operate the IP-422 Print Controller when the Konica 7122 / 7130 Copier is
connected to computers and used as a printer.
This manual assumes you are familiar with the basic operation of your Operating System and the Copier.
The copier is separately supplied with users manuals. Refer to these manuals as needed.
For detailed operations of Windows 95/98/Me and Windows NT/2000/XP, refer to the operating manuals
for each operating system. For application operations, refer to the operating manuals provided with each
application.
This manual is composed of the following six volumes and appendices.

I Set up
This volume summarizes what you can do with the Konica IP-422 and PS-343 and explains the operation environment.

II Printer
This volume explains what is necessary when using this printing system as a printer. It covers the
printer driver installation method, print settings method, print count management, and what to do in the
event of problems.

III FAX
This volume explains what is necessary when using this printing system as a facsimile machine. It covers fax functions in summary and settings methods, transmission/reception methods, and fax number
registration method.

IV Scanner
This volume explains what is necessary when using this printing system as a scanner. It covers scanner functions.

V Control panel
This volume explains the contents of control panel display for the copier main unit that will be used as a
printer and the printer setting methods that can be executed from this control panel.

VI Network
This volume explains what is necessary when using this printing system as a network printer. It
explains the network function setting methods and Internet printing.

VII Appendix
The appendices explain how to handle problems and give the product specifications, a list of built-in
fonts, the factory default, etc.

xxiii

About this Manual

Conventions Used in this Manual


Notation of each product
The following abbreviations are used in this manual:
(1)IP-422 Print Controller:
(2)Konica 7122/7130 Printer/Copier:
(3)Internal Network Controller:
(4)A printing system that combines the above
(1), (2) and (3) products:
(5)Microsoft Windows 95:
Microsoft Windows 98:
Microsoft Windows Me:
Microsoft Windows NT4.0:
Microsoft Windows 2000:
Microsoft Windows XP:
Above OSs:

print controller
Copier (or main body printer)
network controller
printing system
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT4.0 or Windows NT
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT4.0/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP

Notation of names shown on the screen are written within square brackets.
(e.g., "click the [OK] button.")
Notation of folders
Folders are referred to in upper-to-lower sequence.

For example:
Select the [Printer.inf] file in the "PCL\English\Win9X" folder of the User Software CD.

Notation of a reference to this manual is written within square marks.


(e.g., [Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422]).
The following indicates page reference for specific information contained in this manual.
(e.g., (

Page 1)).

When you click in the page number, you are linked to the reference page.

xxiv

Conventions Used in this Manual

Usage of this Manual


3-1. Setting printer functions

PCL

Adobe PS

This is the item title.


The printer functions are set by displaying the printer settings screen.

This covers restrictions when functions are


combined.

When the Adobe PostScript driver is selected, the document size cannot be set.

1
2

Press the

button on the control panel.

Touch the [PRINTER] key on the LCD screen.

This illustrates either [PCL] or [Adobe PS] can be used


for the printer driver
setting.
This displays buttons on the control
panel.

This displays the


keys on the LCD
screen.

The related items


are explained on the
following page.
If you click the page
number on the PDF,
it moves to the regarded page.

These are the contents of the screen


displayed when an
operation is executed.
This covers important information
that you should
know.

Sending to an FTP server [Sending to FTP server ] (

Page 325)

Always set irregular size paper in the copier's bypass tray.

From the taskbar, select [Start]- [Settings] - [Printers].


The names of windows, dialog boxes,
and icons displayed
on the computer
screen are written in
brackets [ ].

This covers items


requiring attention
or which are prohibited during operation.

For [Drives:], select the CD-ROM drive. For folder, double-click the
[\English\Printer\Win9x_Me] folder.

If there are any files that cannot be deleted, logon again.

xxv

Folder structure is
written from the upper level to lower
level.

Conventions Used in this Manual

I Set up
This volume summarizes what you can do
with the Konica IP-422 and PS-343 and
explains the operating environment.

Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422............... 2

I Set up

I Set up

Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422

This chapter explains what you need to know about the print controller, the flow of its processing, and its operation environment.

1-1. What is the print controller? ................................................................3


1-2. Flow of processing ...............................................................................6
1-3. Operation environment....................................................................... 10

1-1. What is the print controller?


Role of the print controller
The print controller is used built into a copier.
You can print from applications on the PC connected to the print controller. When using the copier as a network printer, the print controller network controller is used.
Using as local printer
Computer

Printing system
Copier

Print Controller

Parallel interface

Using as network printer


Printing system
Network
Copier

Print Controller
Ethernet
HUB

I Set up Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422

1-1. What is the print controller?

What you can do with the IP-422


The IP-422 has the following functions.
It can receive print commands during printing.
Even while the IP-422 is printing or receiving data from another PC, it can receive print commands from
your application.
This printing system stores data temporarily in the copier's memory and uses the Electronic Recirculating Document Handler (E-RDH) to handle the printing.
The standard memory is 32 MB, which can hold about 180 pages of A4-size documents. The memory
can be expanded to up to 160 MB.
z For details on memory, refer to [29-3. Options] (

Page 682)

Functions used with the copier can also be utilized.


Even when using the copier as a printer, duplex printing and paper tray selection can be executed the
same as when the unit is used as a copier. Also, stapling and other such functions can be selected if
the optional finisher is installed.
Managing the number of sheets printed (printer EKC/ECM)
If the [Printer EKC/ECM] function is set, the number of sheets printed for each user can be managed by
password. It is possible to reject users without passwords and users who have printed all of their preset
combination.
z For details, refer to [ Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)].
(
Page 252)

The IP-422 can also be used as a fax and scanner, in addition to use as a printer.
The print controller network controller can be used to send and receive faxes directly from/to the PC.
When the IP-422 is used as a scanner, scanned pictures can be imported into other applications.
z For details on the fax functions, refer to [Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)].
(
Page 267)
For details on the scanner, refer to [Chapter 11 Summary of Scanner Functions].
(
Page 302)

I Set up Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422

1-1. What is the print controller?

Three Modes
The printer driver settings are primarily made from the PC, but the font list printing, controller settings, and
default settings for printing can be set with the copier control panel. Also, with the IP-422, the copier can be
used as a copier or scanner by changing the mode.
The mode is switched with the [Mode switch] button on the copier control panel.
[Mode switch] button

Copy mode
This uses the printer main unit as a copier.
Fax mode
This uses the printer main unit as a fax machine.
z For details on the fax functions, refer to [Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)].
(
Page 267)

Scanner/printer mode
This mode is used for setting the printing system and for outputting lists, confidential documents, etc.
You can scan a document into the computer and send it as e-mail.
z For details on the scanner, refer to [Chapter 11 Summary of Scanner Functions].
(
Page 302)

I Set up Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422

1-2. Flow of processing


The general flow of processing for using this printing system as a printer, fax, and scanner is as follows.

Copy mode
This printing system can be used as a printer, fax, and scanner and of course, it can also be used as a copier.
When you want to use this system as a copier, press the [Mode switch] button the control panel and light up
[Copy].
When you want to use the copier, if it is receiving a fax or functioning as a printer, pressing the [Mode switch]
button lets you make copies.
When a print job or fax is received during copying, the data is stored in the copiers E-RDH memory. When
the copying ends, the output resumes automatically.
z Whether the output is immediate or is scheduled as the next job depends on the copier status.

Flow for printing


Print commands sent from the application are received by the printer driver.
When this printing system is used as a local printer, data is sent to the print controller through the parallel interface (IEEE1284) and when it is used as a network printer, the data is sent through the ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/
SPX). Image rasterizing processing is executed (the characters and images to the output are developed into
bitmap data). This data is printed from the copier.
Computer
Using as local printer

Using as network printer

Application

Application

Print command
Printer driver

Printer driver

Spooler
Parallel interface
(IEEE1284)

Ethernet
(TCP/IP, IPX/SPX)

Print Controller
PDL processing (rasterizing)

Printing with the Copier

I Set up Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422

1-2. Flow of processing

PC-Fax transmission/reception flow


Fax transmission
The transmission command sent from the application is received by the printer driver.
When this printing system is used as a local printer, data is sent to the print controller through the parallel interface (IEEE1284) and when it is used as a network printer, the data is sent through the ethernet
(TCP/IP, IPX/SPX). Image rasterizing processing is executed (the characters and images to the output
are developed into bitmap data). This data is stored in the copiers E-RDH memory is transmitted by fax
as a normal fax job.

Computer
Using as local printer

Using as network printer

Application

Application
Transmission
command

Transmission
command
Printer driver

Printer driver

Parallel interface
(IEEE1284)

Ethernet
(TCP/IP, IPX/SPX)

Print Controller
PDL processing (rasterizing)

copier
E-RDH memory

Printing with the


Copier
Fax transmission

I Set up Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422

1-2. Flow of processing


Fax reception
The received fax data is stored in the copiers E-RDH memory and output.
When receiving with the computer, the data can be stored from the E-RDH memory to the print controllers hard disk and imported into the computer via the Ethernet in the same manner as for scan data.

Fax reception

copier
E-RDH memory

Printing with the


Copier
Print Controller
Hard disk

Computer

Ethernet
(TCP/IP, IPX/SPX)

Hard disk

I Set up Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422

1-2. Flow of processing

Flow for network scanner


Scanned data is stored into the print controller hard disk via the copiers E-RDH memory.
It is possible to take hard disk data into the PC via the Ethernet. Hard disk data can be deleted with PC operations.
This data can also be sent as an email attachment via the Internet and uploaded to a file server.

Scanning documents

Copier
E-RDH memory

Print Controller
Hard disk

Ethernet (TCP/IP)

Internet
Importing data
Computer

Sending
with e-mail

SMTP server

Sending to
file server

FTP server

I Set up Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422

1-3. Operation environment


This section explains the system requirements to use this printing system and the interfaces that can be used
for connection.

PCs and OSs that can be connected


Windows
Operating system: Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP
Memory: 32 MB min.
CD-ROM drive

Macintosh
Can only be used if the PostScript option is installed.
Operating system: Mac OS 8.x or higher (Mac OS X is not supported.)
CD-ROM drive
Network controller

Interfaces used for connection


The following two types of interfaces can be used to connect the print controller and the PC.

Parallel interface (IEEE1284)


This interface is used when using this printing system as a local printer.
Only Windows PCs can be connected through this interface and an IEEE1284 parallel cable is
required. Use a parallel cable that has an Amphenol 36-pin male connector at one end.

Ethernet
This interface is used when using this printing system as a network printer.
This interface supports the 100Base-TX and 10Base-T standards. The protocols supported are TCP/IP
(LPD/LPR, Peer-to-Peer), IPX/SPX (NetWare), and AppleTalk (EtherTalk), etc..

Do not connect both the parallel interface and the Ethernet interface to the PC at the same time. This
causes a system error.

10

I Set up Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422

1-3. Operation environment

Connection diagram
The print controller is installed on the rear of the copier. The general appearance is as shown below.
Copier main unit

Print Controller

Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Parallel port

Parallel printer cable

11

I Set up Chapter 1 Summary of IP-422

II Printer
This volume explains printer usage.

Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use......13


Chapter 3 Printing with Windows ..............118
Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh ............213
Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer
EKC/ECM) ..................................252
Chapter 6 Printing Problems ......................257

12

II Printer

II Printer

Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

To use the print controller, first it is necessary to install the printer driver on the PC.
This chapter explains the printer driver installation method for each operating system supported. It also explains how to delete printer drivers and how to handle problems that might
arise during installation.

2-1. Checking the PC to be used............................................................... 14


2-2. Using the print controller ...................................................................15
2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me ........................17
2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0 ............................ 33
2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000 ............................... 50
2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP .................................. 72
2-7. Using this printing system with a Macintosh ................................... 94
2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver ..........................................................100
2-9. Installation problems ........................................................................117

13

2-1. Checking the PC to be used


To use this printing system, it is necessary to install the printer driver. A printer driver is a program that controls
processing at data output and is installed on the PC from the [User software CD] before use.
The OSs on which this printer driver can be installed are as follows.
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or later)
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Mac OS 8.x or higher (When PostScript Option installed. Mac OS X not supported)

14

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-2. Using the print controller


This section explains the printer driver installed to use the print controller and the page notation language
types.

Printer driver types and supported OSs


The [User software CD] that comes with this printing system contains printer drivers. Install the required
printer driver.

Konica driver (PCL)


This driver is installed on PCs running Microsoft Windows. This is the printer driver for using a 7122/
7130 series unit as a printer. The OSs on which this printer driver can be installed are as follows.
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or later)
Windows 2000
Windows XP

Adobe driver (Adobe PS)


This driver is installed when the PostScript option is installed. This is the printer driver for using a 7122/
7130 series unit as a PostScript 3 printer. The OSs on which this printer driver can be installed are as
follows.
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or later)
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Mac OS 8.x or higher (Mac OS X is not supported.)

The Adobe driver is on the [User software CD] that comes with the PostScript option.

15

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-2. Using the print controller

Page notation language


Page notation language is a language that describes the characters, pictures, and other print images to the
printer when printing data is prepared on a PC. The page notation language used in this printing system are
as follows.

When used only with IP-422


PCL is used.

When the PostScript option installed


When the PostScript option is installed, either PCL or AdobePS is used.
The printer driver installation methods are explained on the following pages.
Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Page 17

Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

Page 33

Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Page 50

Using this printing system with Windows XP

Page 72

Using this printing system with Macintosh

Page 94

16

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows


95/98/Me
Install the printer driver on the PC running either Windows 95, 98, or Me. Have the [User software CD] CD-ROM
on hand.

Konica driver installation


This section explains the procedure with the screens of Windows 98.

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.
z When installing the Adobe driver, refer to [Installing an Adobe driver].

2
3

Page 24)

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.


From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

17

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Click the [Next ] button.

The screen for selecting the connection method is displayed.

When the printer and the computer are directly connected, select [Local printer]. When
printing with the printing system connected to another computer via the network,
select [Network printer].

Click the [Next ] button.


If you selected [Local printer], proceed to Step 8.
If you selected [Network printer], input the [Network path or queue name:], or click the [Browse] button to select it, then click the [Next ] button.

z For information about network printers, ask your network administrator.

18

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Open] screen is displayed.

10

For [Drives:], select the CD-ROM drive. For folder, double-click the [\English
\Printer\Win9x_Me] folder.

[Setup.inf] is displayed as the [File name:].

11

Click the [OK] button.


The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

12

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

19

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

13

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PCL] is displayed in [Printers], then click the [Next ] button.

The screen for selecting the port to be used with the printer is displayed.

14

From the [Available ports:] list, select the port to which this printing system is connected.

z For a local printer, select [LPT1].

15

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

16

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

20

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

17
18

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].
Click the [Next ] button.
A screen is displayed asking whether or not you want to print a test print.

19

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z A test print means printing a standard windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Konica IP-422 PCL
Properties].
(
Page 31)

20

Click the [Finish] button.


Install the printer driver from the user software CD to the PC and printing of the test page starts.

21

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [Yes] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen.
This completes printer driver installation.

21

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Konica IP-422 PCL Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Setup] tab.

22

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

In [Available options:], select the options that are installed on the copier.

z For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [Add] button.


The selected options are included in [Installed options] and can be used with the printer driver.

23

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Installing the Adobe driver

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

2
3

Put the Post Script option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.
From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

24

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Click the [Next ] button.

The screen for selecting the connection method is displayed.

When the printer and the computer are directly connected, select [Local printer]. When
printing with the printing system connected to another computer via the network,
select [Network printer].

Click the [Next ] button.


If you selected [Local printer], proceed to Step 8.
If you selected [Network printer], input the [Network path or queue name], or click the [Browse] button to select it, then click the [Next ] button.

z For information about network printers, ask your network administrator.

25

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Open] screen is displayed.

10

For [Drives], select the CD-ROM drive. For [Folders], double-click the [\English
\Driver\AdobePS\Win9x_Me] folder.

[oemsetup.inf] is displayed as the [File name:].

11

Click the [OK] button.


The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

12

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

26

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

13

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PostScript] is displayed in [Printers], then click the [Next ]
button.

The screen for selecting the port to be used with the printer is displayed.

14

From the [Available ports:] list, select the port to which this printing system is connected.

z For a local printer, select [LPT1].

15

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

16

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

17

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].
27

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

18

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed asking whether or not you want to print a test print.

19

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Konica IP-422
PostScript Properties].
(
Page 31)

20

Click the [Finish] button.


Install the printer driver from the user software CD to the PC and printing of the test page starts.

21

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [Yes] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen.
This completes printer driver installation.

28

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 Postscript] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Konica IP-422 PostScript Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Device Options] tab.

29

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

From among the [Installable options] [Finisher], [Drawer Base], and [Memory Configuration], select those options that are installed on the copier, then change the contents.

z For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [OK] button.


When the option settings are complete, the options can be used with the printer driver.

30

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Checking printing
Once the printing system and the computer have been connected and the printer driver installed, printing is
possible. Try printing an actual document.
You can check printing by executing the test print from the printer driver properties or by printing from an
application.
Print settings
The basic print settings are made from the printer driver [Properties] or the applications [Print] screen.
When making the print settings from the applications [Print] screen, the settings you make are not
saved after that application ends. For details on making the print settings from the printer driver [Properties] screen, refer to [3-1. Setting printer functions] (
Page 120).

Executing a test print


The test print prints the standard Windows test page.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].


The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The printer driver [Properties] screen is displayed.

Select the [General] tab, then click the [Print Test Page] button.

The test page is printed and the check screen is displayed.

31

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-3. Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

After checking the printing, click the [Yes] button.

Printing from an application


This method prints data with a [Print] command from an application in use.

Open data with the application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.

Ensure that the name of this printing system is displayed as the [Name:].
If this printer is not selected, click the [] button to select it.

z The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Set the print range and the number of copies, then click the [OK] button.
Check that the specified pages are printed.

32

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0


Install the printer driver on the PC running Windows NT 4.0. Have the [User software CD] CD-ROM on hand.

Access rights and range of operation


Since Windows NT 4.0 is an operating system designed for network management, security functions are
stronger than for Windows 95, 98, or Me.
When a new printer is added, the range of allowable operations can be specified according to the security
level (access rights) of the user.
The Windows NT 4.0 printer access rights and range global operations are as follows. After installing the
printer driver, set the access rights for users.
Access rights
Off

Printing

Document management

Full control

Range of allowable operations


Printer operations disabled
Document printing
Print parameter setting
Print related (paper size, input tray, and other selections)
Graphic related (resolution, half tone, and other settings)
Printer functions (selection of functions unique to a copier)
Document setting control
Print pause, restart, reprint, cancel
All [print] and [document management] items
Printer pause, restart, all document cancel
Printer cancel
Printer access rights setting and change

For details on setting printer access rights, refer to the Windows NT 4.0 System Guide.

Refer to the page below for the driver installed.


Konica driver installation

page 34

Adobe driver installation

page 41

33

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

Konica driver installation

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


z If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights
incorporating those of a Power User.

3
4

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.


From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

34

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

When connecting the printer directly to the PC or when installing the printer driver on
the PC that manages the printer, select [My Computer]. When printing via the network
with the printing system connected to another PC, select [Network printer server].
(
Page 36)

z Before you can select [Network printer server], the network controller and PC network settings must be complete. For
details, consult your network administrator.

When [My Computer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.


The printer port select screen is displayed.

Click On the checkbox for the port to which the printer is connected.

z When the printer and the PC are directly connected, select the [LPT port].
z When printing directly with the printing system via the network, select the [LPR port].
(
Page 581)

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.
Proceed to Step 7.

35

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

When [Network printer server] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Connect to Printer] screen is displayed.

Either input the printer path at [Printer:] or select [Shared Printers:], then click the [OK] button.

A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.


Proceed to Step 7.
z For information about network printers, ask your network administrator.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

36

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

From [Look in:], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Printer
\WinNT_2000_Xp] folder.

[Printer.inf] is displayed as the [File name:].

10

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

11

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

37

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

12

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PCL] is selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

13

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

14

Click the [Next ] button.


The screen for checking whether or not the printer is shared is displayed.

15

To share the printer, select [Shared]; to not share it, select [Not shared].

z To assign a share name to the printer, input the share name.

38

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

16

If necessary, select the substitute driver for the network client.

17

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed asking whether or not you want to print a test print.

18

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Konica IP-422 PCL
Properties].

(Page 48)

19

Click the [Finish] button.


Install the printer driver on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

20

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [Yes] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen.
This completes printer driver installation.

39

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Konica IP-422 PCL Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Setup] tab.

In [Available options:], select the options that are installed on the copier.

z For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [Add] button.


The selected options are included in [Installed options] and can be used with the printer driver.

40

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

Installing the Adobe driver

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


z If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights
incorporating those of a Power User.

3
4

Put the Post Script option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.
From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

41

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

When connecting the printer directly to the PC or when installing the printer driver on
the PC that manages the printer, select [My Computer]. When printing via the network
with the printing system connected to another PC, select [Network printer server].
(
Page 43)

z Before you can select [Network printer server], the network controller and PC network settings must be complete. For
details, consult your network administrator.

When [My Computer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.


The printer port select screen is displayed.

Click on the checkbox for the port to which the printer is connected.

z When the printer and the PC are directly connected, select the [LPT port].
z When printing directly with the printing system via the network, select the [LPR port].
(
Page 581)

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.
Proceed to Step 7.

42

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

When [Network printer server] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Printer connection] screen is displayed.

Either input the printer path at [Printer] or select [Shared Printers:], then click the [OK] button.

A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.


Proceed to Step 7
z For information about network printers, ask your network administrator.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

43

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

From [Look in:], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Driver
\AdobePS\WinNT] folder.

[Oemsetup.inf] is displayed as the [File name:].

10

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

11

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

44

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

12

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PostScript] is selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ]
button.

A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

13

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

14

Click the [Next ] button.


The screen for checking whether or not the printer is shared is displayed.

15

To share the printer, select [Shared]; to not share it, select [Not shared].

z To assign a share name to the printer, input the share name.

45

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

16

If necessary, select the substitute driver for the network client.

17

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed asking whether or not you want to print a test print.

18

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Konica IP-422
PostScript Properties].
(
Page 48)

19

Click the [Finish] button.


Install the printer driver on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

20

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [Yes] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen.
This completes printer driver installation.

46

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 Postscript] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Konica IP-422 PostScript properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Device Settings] tab.

In [Installable Options], select the options installed on the copier, then change the contents.

z For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [OK] button.


When the option settings are complete, the options can be used with the printer driver.

47

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

Checking printing
Once the printing system and the computer have been connected and the printer driver installed, printing is
possible. Try printing an actual document.
You can check printing by executing the test print from the printer driver properties or by printing from an
application.
Print settings
The basic print settings are made from the printer driver [Properties] or the applications [Print] screen.
When making the print settings from the applications [Print] screen, the settings you make are not
saved after that application ends.For details on making the print settings from the printer driver [Properties] screen, refer to [3-1. Setting printer functions] (
Page 123).

Executing a test print


The test print prints the standard Windows test page.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The printer driver [Properties] screen is displayed.

48

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-4. Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

Select the [General] tab, then click the [Print Test Page] button.

The test page is printed and the check screen is displayed.

After checking the printing, click the [Yes] button.

Printing from an application


This method prints data with a [Print] command from an application in use.

Open data with the application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.

Ensure that the name of this printing system is displayed as the [Name:].
If this printer is not selected, click the [] button to select it.

z The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Set the print range and the number of copies, then click the [OK] button.
Check that the specified pages are printed.

49

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000


Install the printer driver on the PC running Windows 2000. Have the [User software CD] CD-ROM on hand.

Access rights and range of operation


Since Windows 2000 is an operating system designed for network management, security functions are stronger than for Windows 95/98/Me.
When a new printer is added, the range of allowable operations can be specified according to the security
level (access rights) of the user.
The Windows 2000 printer access rights and range global operations are as follows. After installing the
printer driver, set the access rights for users.
Access rights
Off

Printing

Printer management

Document
management

Range of allowable operations


Printer operations disabled
Document printing
Print parameter setting
Print related (paper size, input tray, and other selections)
Graphic related (resolution, half tone, and other settings)
Printer functions (selection of functions unique to a copier)
All [Print] items
Print pause, restart, and spooler settings
Printer property change
Printer access rights setting and change
Document setting control
Print pause, restart, reprint, cancel

For details on setting printer access rights, refer to the Windows 2000 System Guide.

Refer to the page below for the driver installed.


Konica driver installation

page 51

Adobe driver installation

page 60

50

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Konica driver installation

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


z If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights
incorporating those of a Power User.

3
4

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.


From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

Click the [Next ] button.

51

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

When connecting the printer directly to the PC, select [Local printer]. When printing via
the network with the printing system connected to another PC, select [Network
printer]. (
Page 54)

z Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer] checkbox is not checked.
z Before you can select [Network printer], the network controller and PC network settings must be complete. For
details, consult your network administrator.

52

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

When [Local printer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The printer port select screen is displayed.

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

z When the printer and the PC are directly connected, select the [LPT port].
z When printing directly with the printing system via the network, select the [LPR port].
(
Page 588)

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.
Proceed to Step 8.

53

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

When [Network printer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Locate Your Printer] screen is displayed.

Input the printer name in [Name:], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.


Proceed to Step 8.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

54

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate file] screen is displayed.

10

From [Look in], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Printer\
WinNT_2000_Xp] folder.

[Printer.inf] is displayed as the [File name:].

11

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

12

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

55

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

13

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PCL] is selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

14

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

15
16

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].
Click the [Next ] button.
The screen for checking whether or not the printer is shared is displayed.

56

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

17

To share the printer, select [Share as:]; to not share it, select [Do not share this
printer].

z To assign a share name to the printer, input the share name.

18

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test print.

19

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Konica IP-422 PCL
Properties].
(
Page 69)

20

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

57

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

21

Click the [Finish] button.

Install the printer driver on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

22

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen.
This completes printer driver installation.

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

58

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Konica IP-422 PCL Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Setup] tab.

In [Available options:], select the options that are installed on the copier.

z For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [Add] button.


The selected options are included in [Installed options] and can be used with the printer driver.

59

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Installing the Adobe driver

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


z If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights
incorporating those of a Power User.

3
4

Put the Post Scripit option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.
From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

Click the [Next ] button.

60

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

When connecting the printer directly to the PC, select [Local printer]. When printing via
the network with the printing system connected to another PC, select [Network
printer]. (
Page 63)

z Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play Printer] checkbox is not checked.
z Before you can select [Network printer server], the network controller and PC network settings must be complete. For
details, consult your network administrator.

61

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

When [Local printer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The printer port select screen is displayed.

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

z When the printer and the PC are directly connected, select the [LPT port].
z When printing directly with the printing system via the network, select the [LPR port].
(
Page 588)

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.
Proceed to Step 8.

62

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

When [Network printer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Locate Your Printer] screen is displayed.

Input the printer name in [Name:], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.


Proceed to Step 8.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

63

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate file] screen is displayed.

10

From [Look in], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Driver
\AdobePS\Win2000XP] folder.

[OEMSETUP.INF] is displayed as the [File name:].

11

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

12

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

64

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

13

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PostScript] is selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ]
button.

A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

14

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

15
16

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].
Click the [Next ] button.
The screen for checking whether or not the printer is shared is displayed.

65

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

17

To share the printer, select [Share as:]; to not share it, select [Do not share this
printer].

z To assign a share name to the printer, input the share name.

18

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test print.

19

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Konica IP-422 PostScript
Properties].
(
Page 69)

20

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

66

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

21

Click the [Finish] button.

Install the printer driver on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

22

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen.
This completes printer driver installation.

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

67

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Right click the [Konica IP-422 Postscript] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Konica IP-422 PostScript Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Device Settings] tab.

In [Installable Options], select the options installed on the copier, then change the contents.

z For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [OK] button.


When the option settings are complete, the options can be used with the printer driver.

68

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Checking printing
Once the printing system and the computer have been connected and the printer driver installed, printing is
possible. Try printing an actual document.
You can check printing by executing the test print from the printer driver properties or by printing from an
application.
Print settings
The basic print settings are made from the printer driver [Properties] or the applications [Print] screen.
When making the print settings from the applications [Print] screen, the settings you make are not
saved after that application ends. For details on making the print settings from the printer driver [Properties] screen, refer to [3-1. Setting printer functions] (
Page 127).

Executing a test print


The test print prints the standard Windows test page.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The printer driver [Properties] screen is displayed.

69

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Select the [General] tab, then click the [Print Test Page] button.

The test page is printed and the check screen is displayed.

After checking the printing, click the [OK] button.

70

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-5. Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Printing from an application


This method prints data with a [Print] command from an application in use.

Open data with the application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.

Ensure that the name of the printer you want to print on is selected in [Select Printer].
If this printer is not selected, click its icon to select it.

z The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Set the print range and the number of copies, then click the [Print] button.
Check that the specified pages are printed.

71

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP


Install the printer driver on the computer running Windows XP. Have the [User software CD] CD-ROM on hand.

Access rights and range of operation


When a new printer is added, the range of allowable operations can be specified according to the security
level (access rights) of the user.
The Windows XP printer access rights and range of operations are as follows. After installing the printer
driver, set the access rights for users.
Access rights
Off

Range of allowable operations


Printer operations disabled

Printing

Printer management

Document
management

Document printing
Print parameter setting
Print related (paper size, input tray, and other selections)
Graphic related (resolution, half tone, and other settings)
Printer functions (selection of functions unique to a copier)
All [Print] items
Print pause, restart, and spooler settings
Printer property change
Printer access rights setting and change
Document setting control
Print pause, restart, reprint, cancel

For details on setting printer access rights, refer to the Windows XP System Guide.

Refer to the page below for the driver installed.


Konica driver installation

Page 73

Adobe driver installation

Page 82

72

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Konica driver installation

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

2
3
4

Log on with an account that has [computer administrator] rights.


Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.
From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printer and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Click the [Add a printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

73

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Click the [Next ] button.

When connecting the printer directly to the PC, select [Local printer attached to this
computer]. When printing via the network with the printing system connected to
another PC, select [A Network printer, or a printer attached to another computer].
(
Page 76)

z Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer] checkbox is not checked.
z Before you can select [Network printer server], the network controller and PC network settings must be complete. For
details, consult your network administrator.

74

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

When [Local printer attached to this computer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The printer port select screen is displayed.

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

z When the printer and the PC are directly connected, select the [LPT] port.
z When printing directly with the printing system via the network, select the [LPR] port.
(
Page 594)

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.
Proceed to Step 8.

75

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

When [A Network printer, or a printer attached to another computer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Specify a Printer] screen is displayed.

Input the printer name in [Name:], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.


Proceed to Step 8.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

76

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

10

From [Look in:], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Printer
\WinNT_2000_Xp] folder.

[Printer.inf] is displayed as the [File name:].

11

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

12

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

77

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

13

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PCL] is selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

14

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

15
16

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].
Click the [Next ] button.
A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test print.

78

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

17

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Konica IP-422 PCL
Properties].
(
Page 91)

18

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

19

Click the [Finish] button.

20

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers and Faxes] window.
This completes printer driver installation.

79

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Konica IP-422 PCL properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Setup] tab.

80

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

In [Available options], select the options that are installed on the copier.

z For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [Add] button.


The selected options are included in [Installed options] and can be used with the printer driver.

81

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Installing the Adobe driver

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

2
3
4

Log on with an account that has [computer administrator] rights.


Put the Post Script option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.
From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Click the [Add a printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

82

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Click the [Next ] button.

When connecting the printer directly to the PC, select [Local printer attached to this
computer]. When printing via the network with the printing system connected to
another PC, select [A Network printer, or a printer attached to another computer].
(
Page 85)

z Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer] checkbox is not checked.
z Before you can select [Network printer server], the network controller and PC network settings must be complete. For
details, consult your network administrator.

83

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

When [Local printer attached to this computer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The printer port select screen is displayed.

Select the port to which the printer is connected.

z When the printer and the PC are directly connected, select the [LPT] port.
z When printing directly with the printing system via the network, select the [LPR] port.
(
Page 594)

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.
Proceed to Step 8.

84

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

When [A Network printer, or a printer attached to another computer] is selected

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Specify a Printer] screen is displayed.

Input the printer name in [Name:], then click the [Next ] button.

A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.


Proceed to Step 8.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

85

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

10

From [Look in:], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Driver
\AdobePS\Win2000_Xp] folder.

[OEMSETUP.INF] is displayed as the [File name:].

11

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

12

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add printer wizard] screen.

86

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

13

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PostScript] is displayed in [Printers], then click the [Next ]
button.

A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

14

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

15
16

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].
Click the [Next ] button.
A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test print.

87

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

17

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in [Konica IP-422
PostScript Properties].
(
Page 91)

18

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

19

Click the [Finish] button.

20

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers and Faxes] window.
This completes printer driver installation.

88

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Setting options
Options installed on the copier are set so that they can be used with the printer driver.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 Postscript] icon, then select [Properties].

The [Konica IP-422 PostScript Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Device Settings] tab.

89

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

In [Installable Options], select the options installed on the copier, then change the contents.

z For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [OK] button.


When the option settings are complete, the options can be used with the printer driver.

90

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Checking printing
Once the printing system and the computer have been connected and the printer driver installed, printing is
possible. Try printing an actual document.
You can check printing by executing the test print from the printer driver properties or by printing from an
application.
Print settings
The basic print settings are made from the printer driver [Properties] or the applications [Print] screen.
When making the print settings from the applications [Print] screen, the settings you make are not
saved after that application ends. For details on making the print settings from the printer driver [Properties] screen, refer to [3-1. Setting printer functions] (
Page 131).

Executing a test print


The test print prints the standard Windows test page.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

91

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The printer driver [Properties] screen is displayed.

Select the [General] tab, then click the [Print Test Page] button.

The test page is printed and the check screen is displayed.

After checking the printing, click the [OK] button.

92

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-6. Using this printing system with Windows XP

Printing from an application


This method prints data with a [Print] command from an application in use.

Open data with the application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.

Ensure that the name of the printer you want to print on is selected in [Select printer].
If this printer is not selected, click its icon to select it.

z The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Set the print range and the number of copies, then click the [Print] button.
Check that the specified pages are printed.

93

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using this printing system with a Macintosh


Install the printer driver on the Macintosh. The only printer driver that can be installed on a Macintosh is the
Adobe [Konica IP-422 + PS-343] printer driver.
Have the PostScript option accessory [User software CD] on hand.

Installing the Adobe driver


The installation location depends on the Macintosh model and the Mac OS version. When installing on a
Power Macintosh, check the Mac OS version.
For a Power Macintosh with Mac OS 8.x or higher but lower than X
Refer to the user software CD [English] - [Driver] - [OS8_x to 9_x] folder.
For Mac OS X
This product is not supported. (As of February, 2002)
Another Macintosh OS
Refer to the user software CD [English] - [Driver] - [OS7_1 or more] folder.
After installing the printer driver, it is recommended to re-start the computer.
If Adobe PostScript has been installed before the driver for this printing system is installed, that version
is overwritten by the Adobe PostScript that comes with this printing system.

Switch on the power for the Macintosh and start the Mac OS.
z Close down any applications that are running.

2
3

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.
Double click the [English] - [Driver] folder on the user software CD.

94

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using this printing system with a Macintosh

Double click [OS8_5 to 9_x] or [OS7_1 or more], whichever matches your OS, then
select [Konica IP-422***] and copy to the computers [HDD] - [System Folder] - [Expansions] - [Printer Descriptions].

In the folder where the user software CD printer driver is stored, double-click [Adobe
PS Installer]

The [Adobe PostScript Driver] screen is displayed.

Click the [Continue] button.

The [License] screen is displayed.

95

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using this printing system with a Macintosh

Click the [Accept] button.

[Adobe PostScript English-language installer] screen is displayed.

Click the [Install] button.

Install the printer driver on the computer.


When the installation is complete, a message is displayed.

Click the [Restart] button.

96

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using this printing system with a Macintosh

Selecting the printer


When you select the printer to use with [Chooser], you can use the printer.

Select [Apple] Menu - [Chooser].

The [Chooser] screen is displayed.

Check that [AppleTalk] is set to [Active], then click the [AdobePS] icon.

In the [Select a PostScript Printer] list, click printer name corresponding to the printing
system.

97

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using this printing system with a Macintosh

Click the [Set up] button.

The additional options setting screen is displayed.

Click the [
] button for each item to set the options installed on the copier.

z For details on options installed on the copier, consult the system administrator.

Click the [OK] button.

Close the [Chooser] screen.

The display returns to the [Selector] screen.

98

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-7. Using this printing system with a Macintosh

Checking printing
Once the printing system and the computer have been connected and the printer driver installed, printing is
possible. Try printing from the [Print] command of an application.

Open a file with an application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.

Check that this printing system is selected in [Printer].

z If this printer is not displayed, select this printer in [Chooser].


(Page 97)
z The [Print] screen varies according to the application.
z When you click the [Save settings] button, the contents of the settings are saved.

Set the number of copies and the print range, then click the [Print] button.
Check that the specified pages are printed.

99

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver


If a printer driver is no longer needed, delete it.
Refer to the appropriate information below.
Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Page 101

Using this printing system with Windows NT

Page 102

Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Page 106

Using this printing system with Windows XP

Page 110

Using this printing system with Macintosh

Page 116

100

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

Deleting a printer driver with Windows 95/98/Me

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then
select [Delete].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Click the [Yes] button.

Restart the computer.


This completes the deletion of the printer driver.

101

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

Deleting with Windows NT

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then
select [Delete].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Click the [Yes] button.

When deleting the Adobe driver, proceed to Step 13.

102

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Control panel].

The [Control panel] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Service] icon.

The [Service] screen is displayed.

From [Service], select [Spooler] then click the [Stop] button.

The confirmation message is displayed.

Click the [Yes] button.

The spooler stops.

103

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

10

11

From the taskbar select [Start] - [Find] - [Files or Folders...].

Click the [Name & Location] tab, input [Ip422] in [Named:], specify [winnt\System32]
folder [Look in:] then click the [Find Now] button.

All file starting with [IP422] are deleted.

z If there are any files that cannot be deleted because Windows is using them, with the service stopped, log off, then
log on again with the same user name and password. Execute from Step 9 on to delete those files.

104

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

12

From [Service], select [Spooler] then click the [Start] button.

The [Spooler] starts.

13

Restart the computer.


This completes the deletion of the printer driver.

105

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

Deleting with Windows 2000

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then
select [Delete].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Click the [Yes] button.

When deleting the Adobe driver, proceed to Step 13.

106

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Control panel].

The [Control panel] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Adminstrative tools] icon.

The [Adminstrative tool] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Services] icon.

The [Service] screen is displayed.

107

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

Right click [Print spooler], then select [Stop].

The print spooler stops.

10

From the taskbar select [Start] - [Search] - [For Files or Folders...].

Input [IP422] in [Search for files or folders named:], specify [Winnt\SYSTEM32] or


[WINDOWS\SYSTEM32] folder in [Look in:] ,then click [Search Now] button.

108

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

11

Delete all the files whose names start with [IP422].

If there are any files that cannot be deleted because Windows is using them, with the service stopped,
log off, then log on again with the same user name and password. Execute from Step 9 on to delete
those files.

12

From [Service] select [Print spooler], right click, then select [Start].

The [Print spooler] starts.

13

Restart the computer.


This completes the deletion of the printer driver.

109

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

Deleting with Windows XP

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then
select [Delete].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

110

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

Click the [Yes] button.

When deleting the Adobe driver, proceed to Step 15.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Control panel].

The [Control panel] screen is displayed.

Click the [Performance and Maintenance] icon.

The [Performance and Maintenance] screen is displayed.

111

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

Click the [Administratiave Tools] icon.

The [Administrative Tools] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Service] icon.

The [Service] screen is displayed.

112

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

Right click [Print Spooler], then select [Stop].

The print spooler stops.

10

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Search].

113

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

11

12

Click [All files and folders].

Input [IP422] in [Search for files or folders named:], specify [Winnt\SYSTEM32] or


[WINDOWS\SYSTEM32] folder in [Look in:], then click [Search Now] button.

114

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

13

All the files whose names start with [IP422] are deleted.

z If there are any files that cannot be deleted because Windows is using them, with the service stopped, log off, then
log on again with the same user name and password. Execute from Step 10 on to delete those files.

14

Right click [Print Spooler], then select [Start].

The [Print spooler] starts.

15

Restart the computer.


This completes the deletion of the printer driver.

115

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver

Uninstalling from Macintosh

Switch on the power for the Macintosh and start the Mac OS.
z Close down any applications that are running.

Select the printer icon to delete from the desktop and drag it to the recycle bin.
The printer driver is uninstalled.
z If old driver files are left, they can cause problems with driver updating.

In [HDD] - [System folder] - [Expansion functions] - [Printer notation file], select [Konica IP-422v***] and drag it to the recycle bin.
Printer driver related files are deleted.

Restart the computer.


This completes the deletion of the printer driver.

116

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

2-9. Installation problems


If you run into any problems during installation, check the following information.

An old version of the driver is already installed.


If an old version of the [PCL] driver is already installed, delete it, then install the newer driver.
For details on how to delete the driver, refer to [2-8. Uninstalling the printer driver] (
Page 100).

You are asked which file to use, the one you are installing or a
new file already on the computer.
When you install a printer driver, the computer may already have a more recent file with the same name as
the one on the [User software CD].
In this case, select the file with the more recent date. If you use the file with the older date, the operating system may not operate normally.

Test page cannot be printed.

Check the copier control panel LCD screen.


If nothing at all is displayed on the LCD screen, proceed to next.
If [Ready to Copy] is displayed on the LCD screen, proceed to Step 3.
If a diagnostics message or error message is displayed, refer to the copier users manual.

Press the sub power switch on the control panel.

Check that copying is possible.

4
5

If the copier is in auto shut-off mode, pressing this button puts the LCD screen into display mode.

If copying is possible, proceed to next.

Switch off the power for the copier, wait about 10 seconds, then switch the power back
on again.
Once the print controller can be used, print a test page again.
If the test page cannot be printed, contact your authorized service representative.

117

II Printer Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use

II Printer

Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

When the printer has been made ready for use, various printing methods and function settings
can be made from the [Properties] screen. This chapter explains the printer functions and setting methods for printing with Windows.

3-1. Setting printer functions ..................................................................119


3-2. Function list .......................................................................................136
3-3. Basic print settings...........................................................................138
3-4. Printing multiple pages ....................................................................152
3-5. Making image settings......................................................................172
3-6. Setting the font ..................................................................................180
3-7. Special printing .................................................................................185
3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer...........200

118

3-1. Setting printer functions


The printer functions are set by displaying the printer settings screen. The settings screen comprises multiple
screens called [tabs] for different choices. Click the tab for the function to set the choices.
Tab

There are two methods for displaying the settings screen.:


This section explains the method for displaying the screen for setting the printer functions.
Setting from the [Properties] screen
Right click the printer icon, then set from the [Properties] screen.
The choices of these settings apply to all applications used on this computer.
Setting on an application
Settings are made from the screen displayed when the [Print] command is executed from an application.
These settings only remain in effect while the application is being used. When the application ends, the
settings are deleted.
Refer to the appropriate page below for the OS you use:
Using this printing system with Windows 95/98/Me

Page 120

Using this printing system with Windows NT 4.0

Page 123

Using this printing system with Windows 2000

Page 127

Using this printing system with Windows XP

Page 131

119

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions

Windows 95/98/Me
Setting from the [Properties] screen

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The printer screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then select
[Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed.


PCL driver

120

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions


PostScript driver

Setting on the application

Open a file with an application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.
z The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Click the [Properties] button.

The [Properties] screen is displayed.


PCL driver

121

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions


PostScript driver

122

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions

Windows NT4.0
Setting from the [Properties] screen
This sets the printer port and options.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then select
[Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed.


PCL driver

123

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions


PostScript driver

Setting from the [Document Defaults] screen


This makes the basic print settings

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then select
[Document Defaults].

The [Document Defaults] screen is displayed.

124

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions


PCL driver

PostScript driver

Setting on the application

Open a file with an application, then execute [Print].


z The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Click the [Property] button.

The [Properties] screen is displayed.

125

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions


PCL driver

PostScript driver

126

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions

Windows 2000
Setting from the [Properties] screen
This sets the printer port and options.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then select
[Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed.


PCL driver

127

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions


PostScript driver

Setting from the [Printing Preferences] screen


This makes the basic print settings

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then select
[Printing Preferences].

The settings screen is displayed.

128

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions


PCL driver

PostScript driver

129

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions

Setting on the application

Open a file with an application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.
z The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed.


PCL driver

PostScript driver

130

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions

Windows XP
Setting from the [Properties] screen
This sets the printer port and options.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then select
[Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed.

131

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions


PCL driver

PostScript driver

Setting from the [Printing Preferences] screen


This makes the basic print settings

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

132

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions

Right click the [Konica IP-422 PCL] icon or the [Konica IP-422 PostScript] icon, then select
[Printing Preferences].

The [Printing Preferences] screen is displayed.


PCL driver

PostScript driver

133

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions

Setting on the application

Open a file with an application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.
z The [Print] screen varies according to the application.

Right click the printer icon, then select [Properties].

The [Properties] screen is displayed.


PCL driver

PostScript driver

134

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-1. Setting printer functions

Image View
If you set the properties using the [PCL] driver, you can check the current setting status. This switches
between paper display and copier display.

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


Paper
A sample of the printed paper is displayed.

Main unit
The settings of the Input tray and Output tray are displayed.

135

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-2. Function list


This list contains a summary of the main settings related to printing.

The names of the functions are basically those displayed in Windows95/98/Me. The display of listed
items and setting values may vary according to whether options are present (and their settings).
For details on functions not covered here, refer to your Windows guide.

Function

OSs supported

Summary

95/98/Me NT 4.0 2000/XP

Reference

Basic print settings


Setting the printer
languages

Sets the printer language for printing.

Page 138

Copies

Specifies the number of copies to print.

Page 139

Orientation

Selects landscape or portrait direction to


print on the paper.

Page 140

Paper size

Sets the size of the paper to print on.

Page 141

Media Type/Paper Type

Sets the type of the media for printing.

Page 143

Prints enlarged/reduced.

Page 145

Paper Source

Selects the input tray containing the paper to


print on.

Page 147

Output Tray

Selects the tray which to output printed material.

Page 149

Margins

Sets the width for the margin (the section not


printed at all) for printing

Scaling

Page 151

Printing multiple pages


Prints consecutive pages on the front and
rear.

Page 155

Combines multiple pages of consecutive


data on one side of one sheet of paper and
automatically reduces the multiple pages to
match the paper size.

Page 157

Combination

Prints swapping the order of the pages so


that the output paper can be piled up and
folded in two to make a booklet.

Page 159

Collate/Sort

Prints one copy at a time of all the pages.

Page 162

Collate/Offset

Printing multiple copies, this shifts the output


position for each set.

Page 164

Staples.

Page 166

Prints attaching a front or back cover.

Page 169

Duplex

Pages per sheet/Layout

Staple
Front Cover/Back Cover

136

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-2. Function list

Function

OSs supported

Summary

95/98/Me NT 4.0 2000/XP

Reference

Making image settings


Makes settings concerning the print quality
for photographs and other images.

Page 172

Sets the resolution for printing.

Page 176

Print as a negative image

Prints with black and white reversed.

Page 177

Print as a mirror image

Prints with left and right reversed.

Page 179

Graphics
Resolution

Setting the font


TrueType font settings

Sets the replacement of TrueType fonts


used in the data with the printers fonts.

Page 180

PostScript font settings

Makes settings concerning PostScript fonts


and output.

Page 181

Prints overlaying separate from data.

Page 186

Watermark

Prints [CONFIDENTIAL] or another preset


text as a watermark.

Page 189

Password Print

Prints after a registered User ID and password are input.

Page 193

Special printing
Overlay

Seting the connection between the computer and printer


Checks the printer driver version and adds
new printer drivers.

Page 201

Time out time

Sets the wait time until the printer is in a


usable state.

Page 201

Port settings

Makes settings for the LPT port to which the


printer is connected.

Printer port assignment

Assigns a network printer to a virtual printer


port.

Page 202

Deleting the printer port

Ends the setting for the set port.

Page 202

Adds or deletes a network or local printer.

Page 203

Sets the method for temporarily accumulating the print data when it is sent to the
printer.

Page 203

Printer driver selection

Port addition/deletion
Spool settings

137

Page 202

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings


This makes the basic print settings.
PCL

Setting the printer languages


This sets the printer language for printing.
PCL-5E (Monochrome)
PCL-6 (Monochrome)

With the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Options] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Printer language], select printer language.

138

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings


PCL

Adobe PS

Setting the number of copies to print (Copies).


This specifies the number of copies to print.

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

For the [Copies], click the [] or [] button or input the number.

z The number of copies can be from 1 to 999.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

In [Copies] on the application's [Print] screen, click the [] or [] button or input the number.

139

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings


PCL

Adobe PS

Setting the print direction (Orientation)


This selects Iandscape or portrait direction to print on the paper.

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

For the [Orientation], select [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

1
2

From the Adobe PS Properties, select the [Paper] tab.


For the [Orientation], select [Portrait] or [Landscape].

When the Adobe PS driver is selected, if [Landscape] is selected, you can select [Rotated]. To reverse
printing from top/bottom, check the [Rotated] checkbox.

140

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings


PCL

Adobe PS

Setting the print paper size (Paper size)


This sets the size of the paper to print on.
z For details on the sizes of paper that can be set in the printer's input trays, refer to the copier's operations manual.

The paper sizes that can be selected are as follows.


Statement (5.5 x 8.5 inch)
Letter (8.5x11inch)
Legal (8.5 x 14 inch)
Tabloid (11 x 17 inch)
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
A4 (210 x 297 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B4 (250 x 354mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
B6 (128 x 182mm)
F4 (8 x 1.3 inch)
8K (267 x 390 mm)
16K (195 x 267 mm)

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Select [Paper Size].

141

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS properties, select the [Paper] tab.

Select [Paper size].

142

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings


PCL

Adobe PS

Selecting the type of paper (Media type/Paper type)


This selects the type of media to print.
The types of paper you can select are as follows.
Plain paper:
Regular copy paper
OHP (Transparency):
Overhead projector film
OHP Interleave (Blank): White paper inserted between overhead projector film
OHP Interleave (Print):
Prints the same choices on the OHP interleaf paper as on the film.

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Media Type], select the media type.

143

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS properties, select the [Paper] tab.

In [Paper Type], select the paper size.

The collate function cannot be used at the same time as a [Paper Type] selection of [OHP (Transparency)], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Printed)].

144

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings


PCL

Adobe PS

Printing enlarged/reduced (Scaling)


If the document size and the paper size are different, the enlargement/reduction ratio for automatically matching the paper size is displayed and can be selected.

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Option] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Scaling], click the [] or [] button or input the number.

z The magnification ratio can be set from 25 to 400 %.

145

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS properties, select the [Graphics] tab.

In [Scaling], click the [] or [] button or input the number.

z The magnification ratio can be set from 25 to 400 %.

When the paper size is set to A3 in Windows 95/98, the magnification ratio can be set from 25 to 300 %.

146

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings


PCL

Adobe PS

Selecting the input tray (Paper source)


This selects the input tray containing the paper to print on.
The types of input trays that can be selected are as follows.
Auto Select:
The tray is selected automatically to match the paper size.
Tray 1-4:
Input trays (The number of trays depends on the options installed on the copier.)
Bypass Tray

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.
z When an input tray other than [Printing Preferences] is selected, the selected tray is displayed blue on the copier
diagram.

The tray is selected in [Paper Source].

147

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS Properties, select the [Paper] tab.

The tray is selected in [Paper Source].

148

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings


PCL

Adobe PS

Selecting the output tray (Output tray)


This selects the tray which to output printed material. This can be selected when the optional output unit is
installed on the copier.
The types of output trays that can be selected are as follows.
Default:
The printers (copiers) normal output tray.
Tray 1-4:
Trays on the optional output unit

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.
z When an output tray is selected, the selected tray is displayed blue on the copier diagram.

The tray is selected in [Output Tray].

149

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS properties, select the [Paper] tab.

The tray is selected in [Output bin].

150

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-3. Basic print settings


Adobe PS

Setting the margin (Margins)


This sets the width for the margin for printing.
When the PostScript option is installed, the settings can be made on Windows 95/98/Me.

Right click the Adobe PS driver on the [Printers] screen, then select [Properties].
The Adobe PS driver properties are displayed.

z The margins can be set from the applications [Print] screen.

Select the [Paper] tab, then click the [Margin] button.

The [Margins] screen is displayed.

Select the margins [Units].

The margin widths are set. Click the [] or [] button or input the number.
z The minimum margin that can be set is (0.18 inch). The maximum margin that can be set depends on the size of the
paper.

Click the [OK] button.


151

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages


Duplex (

PCL

Adobe PS

PCL

Adobe PS

Page 155)

This prints consecutive pages on the front and rear.


[Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge] can be selected.

Flip on long edge

Flip on short edge

Pages per sheet /Layout (

Page 157)

This prints multiple pages of consecutive data combined on one side of one sheet of paper. The print
image is automatically reduced to match the selected paper size.
2-16 pages of data can be combined on one print page.

152

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages


PCL

Combination (

Adobe PS

Page 159)

z For the PCL driver, if the [Orientation] is set to [Landscape], [Top binding] is set.

This prints swapping the order of the pages so that the output paper can be piled up and folded in two
to make a booklet.

Collate/Sort (

PCL

Adobe PS

PCL

Adobe PS

Page 162)

This prints one entire set of multi-page data at one time.

Offset (

Page 164)

When printing multiple copies, this shifts the position for each set.

153

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages

Stapling (

PCL

Adobe PS

PCL

Adobe PS

Page 166)

This staples.

Front Cover/Back Cover (

Page 169)

This prints attaching a front cover or back cover.

154

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages


PCL

Adobe PS

Printing on both the front and rear of the paper (Duplex)


This prints consecutive pages on the front and rear.
[Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge] can be selected.

Flip on long edge

Flip on short edge

Flip on long edge


The pages are flipped on their long edges. The front and rear have the same top.
Flip on short edge
The pages are flipped on their short edges. The front and rear have tops at opposite ends.

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Duplex], select [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge]

155

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [Paper] tab.

In [Duplex], select [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge].

156

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages


PCL

Adobe PS

Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper (Pages per sheet/


Layout)
This prints multiple pages of consecutive data combined on one side of one sheet of paper. The print image
is automatically reduced to match the selected paper size.
Page combination
2-16 pages of data can be combined on one print page.

2 up

4 up

9 up

6 up

16 up

When printing, the print image is automatically reduced to match the selected paper size.

157

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Options] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Pages per sheet], select the combination type.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS properties, select the [Graphics] tab.

In [Layout], select the combination type.

When printing frames on combined pages, check the [Print page border] checkbox.

158

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages


PCL

Adobe PS

Folding paper in two to make booklets (Combination)


This prints swapping the order of the pages so that the output paper can be piled up and folded in two to
make a booklet.

Booklet
The paper is bound on the left side. This is selected when the pages proceed from left to right.

Booklet-Right (can be selected only when the Adobe PS driver is used.)


The paper is bound on the right side. This is selected when the pages proceed from right to left.

159

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages

For the PCL driver, if the [Orientation] is set to [Landscape], [Top binding] is set.
Booklet/special mode cannot be selected when any of the settings below are in effect.:
When the [Paper Size] is other than [Legal (8.5 x 14 inch)], [Tabloid (11 x 17 inch)], [A3], [A6], [B4],
[B6], [F4], [8K], and [16K].
When the [Media type] is [OHP (Transparency)], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Print)]
When [Stapling], or [Duplex] is set
When [Front cover/Back cover] is set
When [Sort] is not set

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Combination], select the [Booklet].

160

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [Device Options] tab.

In [Printer features], select [Combination]

In [Change setting for], select [Booklet] or [Booklet-Right].

161

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages


PCL

Adobe PS

Printing one copy at a time of all pages (Collate/Sort)


This prints one entire set of multi-page data at one time.

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Check the [Sort] checkbox.

162

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [Device Options] tab.

In [Printer features], select [Sort]

In [Change setting for] select [Sort].

163

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages


PCL

Adobe PS

Outputting sorted into separate sets of copies (Offset)


When printing multiple copies, this shifts the output position for each set.
This is handy when outputting multiple copies to a single output tray.

When the copier optional paper output unit is installed, the paper is output with its position shifted for
each set.
When the paper output unit is not installed, the paper is output with the direction changed for each set.

When there is a paper output unit

When there is no paper output unit

164

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Offset], select [On].

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [Device Options] tab.

In [Printer features], select [Job Offset]

In [Change setting for], select [On].

165

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages


PCL

Adobe PS

Stapling (Staple)
This staples.
Portrait and Landscape
Stapling with the papers joined lengthwise is called [Portrait] and stapling with the papers joined widthwise is called [Landscape].
Number of staples and their locations
The pages are bound on either the left or right side of the paper. For stapling, you can select one- or
two-point stapling.
z For details on the stapling positions, refer to the copier's operations manual.

166

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages


The types of stapling that can be selected are as follows.:
Portrait

Landscape

Single Left

Single Left

Single Right

Single Right

Double Left

Double Left

Double Top

Double Top

Double Right

Double Right

Stapling cannot be selected when any of the following settings are in effect.
When the [Paper Size] is A6 or B6
When the [Media type] is [OHP (Transparency], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (print)]
When [Combination] is set
When [Sort] is not set

167

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

In [Stapling], select the number and location of the staples.

z To set either portrait or landscape, change the [Orientation] setting.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [Device Options] tab.

In [Printer features], select [Stapling].

In [Change setting for], select the number and location of the staples.

168

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages


PCL

Adobe PS

Attaching a front cover/back cover (Front cover/Back cover)


This prints attaching a front cover or back cover.
Front cover
This prints a front cover. For the front cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed].
For [Blank], one sheet of white paper is added. For [Printed], the first page of the data is printed on the
front cover.

When the front cover is set to [Blank]

When the front cover is set to [Printed]

Back cover
This prints attaching a back cover. For the back cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed].
For [Blank], one sheet of white paper is added. For [Printed], the last page of the data is printed on the
back cover.

When the back cover is set to [Blank]

When the back cover is set to [Printed]

Input tray
Select the tray in which the paper for the front cover/back cover is. Select a tray with paper the same
size as the main text.

Front cover/back cover cannot be set when any of the following settings are in effect.:
When the [Paper Size] is [B6], [Postcard], [Legal], or [Statement]
When a [Media Type] of [OHP (Transparency)], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Print)]
is selected
When [Combination] is set
When [Collate/Sort] is not set

169

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages

Setting with the PCL driver

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Cover] tab.


z For Windows NT 4.0, set with the [Document Defaults] screen.
z For Windows 2000/XP, set with the [Printing Preferences] screen.

Check the [Front Cover] or [Back Cover] checkbox.

For the back cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed].

Select the [Tray] containing the paper to use as the front cover/back cover.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [Device Options] tab.

In [Printer features], select [Front Cover] and/or [Back Cover].

170

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-4. Printing multiple pages

In [Change setting for], select [Printed] or [Blank].

In [Printer features], select [Front/Back Cover Tray]

In [Change setting for], select the input tray in which the paper for the front cover/back
cover is set.

171

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-5. Making image settings


This makes settings concerning the print quality for photographs and other images. Image settings are made
with the PCL driver [Graphics] tab.

PCL

Halftoning
This is expressed by changing the density of the black and white dots making up the image. Select dither for
printing at high speed. The choices that can be selected are as follows.
Solid Black and White: The image is expressed with 2 tones, black and white.
Patterned Grays:

The image is expressed by half tone.

Diffused Grays:

Select error dispersal to print with high quality emphasizing images.

Brightness
By clicking the [<], [>] or entering numbers, set brightness of the image.

Contrast
By clicking the [<], [>] or entering numbers, set contrast of the image.

172

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-5. Making image settings

Smoothing
This smoothes curved sections in printed characters and images to make jaggedness (the rough sections
seen at the edges of figures and text) stand out less.
The choices that can be selected are as follows.
Off
Does not smooth.
Type 1
Smoothes diagonal lines in general characters and figures.
Type 2
Smoothes curved sections of general characters
Type 3
Smoothes the more detailed sections, for example curved line sections of decorative and fine characters.

173

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-5. Making image settings

Setting with the PCL driver

With the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.

In [Smoothing], select the type.

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [Device Options] tab.

In [Printer features], select [Smoothing.]

In [Change setting for], select Type.

174

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-5. Making image settings


PCL

Adobe PS

Toner save
This controls the print density and conserves the toner. To conserve toner, check the checkbox.

z Toner save and Smoothing function connot be used at same time.

Setting with the PCL driver

With the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.

In [Toner Save], select [On].

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [Device Options] tab.

In [Printer features], select [Toner Save]

In [Change setting for], select [On].

175

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-5. Making image settings


Adobe PS

Settings the resolution (Resolution)


This sets the resolution for printing. This setting is made with the Adobe PS driver [Graphics] tab.

From the Adobe PS properties, select the [Graphics] tab.

In [Resolution] select the resolution for printing.

z The resolution can only be [600 dpi] and cannot be changed.

176

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-5. Making image settings


PCL

Adobe PS

Printing with black and white reversed (Print as a negative


image)
This prints photographic with the black and white sections of the document reversed like negative film.

Setting with the PCL driver

With the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Graphics] tab.

Select [Negative].

Black and white in the printing are reversed.

177

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-5. Making image settings

Setting with the Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS properties, select the [Graphics] tab.

Check the [Print as a negative image] checkbox.

Black and white in the printing are reversed.

178

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-5. Making image settings


Adobe PS

Printing with left/right reversed (Print as a mirror image)


This prints with the left/right reversed as if in a mirror.

From the Adobe PS properties, select the [Graphics] tab.

Check the [Print as a mirror image] checkbox.

The left and right in the printing are reversed.

179

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-6. Setting the font


This makes settings concerning TrueType fonts and PostScript fonts for printing.
PCL

TrueType font settings


This sets the printing process method of TrueType fonts used in the data. The choices that can be selected
are as follows.
Outline soft fonts
The font is represented as a series of curves and lines of a character. Since the amount of data is large,
printing takes longer. However, high-quality printing will start.
Bitmap soft fonts
The font is expressed the character by gathering of dots. Since the amount of data is small, printing
does not long. However, when it is enlarged, jagged lines are noticeable.
Rasters
This converts the print data into the bitmapped image according to the resolution of the printer.

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Options] tab.

From [True Type option], select the method of processing.

180

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-6. Setting the font


Adobe PS

PostScript font settings


This makes settings concerning PostScript fonts and output.

Addition of Euro currency symbol


This adds the Euro currency symbol to PostScript fonts.

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [Fonts] tab.

Check the [Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts] checkbox.

PostScript output format


This selects the format for outputting PostScript files.
The choices that can be selected are as follows.
PostScript (Optimized for speed)
Select this item for normal printing.

PostScript (Optimize for portability-ADSC)


Selected when processing each page of a document as an independent object.

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)


Selected to make a file into just one page so that it can be pasted into a document for another application and
printed.

Archive format
Selected to save PostScript files for later use.

181

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-6. Setting the font

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [PostScript] tab.

In [PostScript output format], select the output format.

Postscript header
This selects whether or not to send header information to the printer for each printing
The choices that can be selected are as follows.
Download header with each print job.
Select this item for normal printing.

Assume header is downloaded and retained.


This is selected when there is no need to send the header information repeatedly, for example on a local
printer. This reduces the print time somewhat.

[Send Header Now]


Click this button to download the header immediately.

When an [EPS format] or [Archive format] is selected, the PostScript header setting is ignored.

182

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-6. Setting the font

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [PostScript] tab.

In [PostScript header], select the item.

PostScript error information printing


This prints an error message on a separate sheet of paper when a PostScript error occurs during printing.

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [PostScript] tab.

Check the [Print PostScript error information] checkbox.

183

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-6. Setting the font

PostScript timeout values


This sets the usable time and wait time when using the printer.
The choices that can be set are as follows.
Job timeout
This is the maximum time that can be used to print one set of data. When the set time is exceeded, the printer
stops printing and starts preparations for the next set of data.

Wait timeout
This is the time for waiting to receive data from Windows. When the set time is exceeded, the printer starts
preparations for the next set of data. The timeout is set for such cases as when the data is not sent due to a
computer error.

From the Adobe PS driver properties, select the [PostScript] tab.

In [PostScript timeout values], set the timeout time.

z The number of copies can be set to 0-999.


z To disable timeouts, input [0].

184

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing


PCL

Overlay (

Page 186)

This prints overlaying the document with separate form data.

Form data

Prepared data

PCL

Watermark (

Adobe PS

Page 189)

This prints [CONFIDENTIAL] or another preset text as a watermark.

PCL

Password Print (

Page 193)

This prints after a registered User ID and password are input. This is used for printing confidential data.

User ID
Password

185

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing


PCL

Printing overlaying another document (Overlay)


This prints overlaying the document with separate form data.

Form data

Prepared data

Prepare the form data with an application.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Check that the [Name] is [Konica IP-422 PCL].

Click the [Properties] button.


The [Properties] screen is displayed.

Click the [Overlay] tab.

186

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing

Click the [Select Bitmap] button.

The [Open overlay file] screen is displayed.

Select the document to print with the form data.

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Properties] screen.
z The file name extension of [.bmp] is given.

Check that the selected file name is displayed.

187

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing


To shade the image, select the color of the shade from [Color] in [Shade].
], [

] button in [Darkness], then adjust the darkness of the shade.

Click the [

10
11
12

To change the size of the image, either click the [], [] button with [User defined] in [Size] selected,
or key in the numbers.
z For the automatic setting, select [Automatically].

13

To change the position of the image, either click the [], [ ] button with [User defined] in
[Position] selected, or key in the numbers.

14

Click the [OK] button.

15

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Print] screen.


The form data is printed overlaid on the document.

188

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing


PCL

Adobe PS

Printing watermarks (Watermark)


This prints preset text as a watermark. This setting is made in [Watermark] tab.

z You can change the character choices, size, and position with the edit functions.

Setting with PCL driver

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Watermarks] tab.

In [Text] of [Watermarks], select the characters from the list for printing. Check the [Use
watermark] checkbox.

The choices that can be selected are as follows.


CONFIDENTIAL
COPY
DRAFT
FILE COPY
FINAL
PROOF
TOP SECRET

You can also input characters into [Text].

189

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing

In [Page] of [Watermarks], select the page for printing the watermark.


The choices that can be selected are as follows.
All but first page
First page only
No watermark

To print a watermark over an image, select [Top] in [Watermarks]. To print a watermark


behind an image, select [Bottom].

To print several watermarks on a single page, either click the [], [] button with [Count] in [Watermark]
or key in the numbers.
You can adjust the interval between watermarks by clicking the [], [] button on [Separation].

In [Font], set the font.


This sets the font name, style, font size, color, and character darkness.

Select [User defined] in [Position], and set the character position and angle.

If you select [Move] from [Adjustment], you can drag a character and move it. If you select [Rotate], you
can drag a character and rotate it.
To create a watermark, click the [NEW] button.
To delete a watermark, click the [Delete] button.

190

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing

Setting with Adobe PS driver

From the Adobe PS driver [Properties], select the [Watermarks] tab.

In [Select a watermark] select the characters for printing.

The choices that can be selected are as follows.


CONFIDENTIAL
COPY
DRAFT

Edit, New, Delete (AdobePS)


The choices and size of the characters in the watermark and the position they are printed at can be
changed.
It is also possible to prepare new watermarks and delete watermarks that are no longer needed.
When you click the [Edit] button, the [Edit watermark] screen is displayed.

The settings that can be changed are as follows.


Watermark text
This sets the Watermark Text, Font, Size, Style.

Angle
This sets the watermark angle.

191

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing


Position
This sets what position on the paper the watermark is printed at.
To print in the center, select [Automatically].
To print at any other position, select [Position relative to the center], then input the coordinates.

Color
For a color printer, you can set the color. Input the red, green, and blue values or click the [Choose Color]button to set the color.

Preparing a new watermark


On the [Watermarks] tab, click the [New] button.
For the setting method, refer to the choices explained previously.

Deleting a watermark
Select the watermark to delete in [Watermarks], then click the [Delete] button.
Check the choices, then click the [OK] button.

192

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing


PCL

Printing with a password (Password print)


This prints after a registered User ID and password are input. This is used for printing confidential data.

User ID
Password

Some application software saves the choices of the printer driver settings. For files shared on a network
and files that may be printed by someone else, when printing with the [Use settings], delete the User ID
and password before saving.

Setting a User ID and password


Register the output User ID and password.

From the PCL [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.

Check the [Password Print] checkbox.

The [Password Print Settings] screen is displayed.

Input the User ID to be registered.

z Input a User ID of up to 5 single-byte characters.

193

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing

Input the password.


z Input a password up to 8 characters.

Click the [OK] button.


The User ID and password are set.
z When [Printer EKC/ECM function] is set on the copier, the User ID registered on the [Password Print Settings] screen
automatically becomes the printer EKC/ECM password.
For details on Printer EKC/ECM, refer to [Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)] (
Page 252).

Check the [Password Print] checkbox.

The [Password Print Settings] screen is displayed.

Check the User ID and password, then click the [OK] button.

This makes password print possible.


z The password can be changed with this screen.

Printing from an application

194

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing

Operating from the control panel


When confidential output is set, after executing printing from an application, printing is not possible until the
User ID and password are input on the printers control panel.

Confidential output print jobs are temporarily stored on the print controller hard disk. If such a job is not
printed out within 24 hours, it is deleted automatically.

Printing from an application.

Press the copier

button on the control panel.

The [Printer basic mode] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the [Password Print] key on the LCD screen.

The [Password Print] screen is displayed.

195

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing

Input the User ID with the [0] key to the [9] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The password select screen is displayed.

Input the password with the [0] key to the [9] key, the uppercase key and lowercase key on
the LCD screen.
z If you touch the [BS] key on the LCD screen, the last character is deleted; if you touch the [CLR] key, all the input
characters are deleted.

If you touch the [<<] [>>] key on the LCD screen, the list of characters that can be input is changed.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


A list of the corresponding print jobs is displayed.

196

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing

Select the print job, then touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

The selected print job is printed.

Canceling confidential output


To cancel confidential output from an application, do so from the printer control panel.

Press the copier

button on the control panel.

The [Printer basic mode] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the [Password Print] key on the LCD screen.

The [Password Print] screen is displayed.

197

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing

Input the User ID with the [0] key to the [9] key on the LCD screen.

z If you touch the [BS] key on the LCD screen, the last character is deleted; if you touch the [CLR] key, all the input
characters are deleted.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The password select screen is displayed.

Input the password with the [0] key to the [9] key, the uppercase key and lowercase key on
the LCD screen.
z If you touch the [BS] key on the LCD screen, the last character is deleted; if you touch the [CLR] key, all the input
characters are deleted.

If you touch the [<<] [>>] key on the LCD screen, the list of characters that can be input is changed.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


A list of the corresponding print jobs is displayed.

198

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-7. Special printing

Select the print job, then touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

The deletion confirmation screen is displayed.

Touch the [1] key, then touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

The selected print job is deleted.

199

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer


and printer
This makes the settings for the port connecting the computer and the printer and adds drivers. These settings
are made with the PCL driver or Adobe PS driver properties.

Windows 95/98/Me

Checking the printer driver version


This checks the version of the printer driver currently being used.
Select the [About] tab.
The driver name and version can be checked.

200

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

Adding a printer driver


If you want to use a new printer driver that is not on the [Print using the following driver] list, this adds
that printer driver.

Click the [Details] tab.

Click the [New Driver] button.

The confirmation screen is displayed.

Click the [Yes] button.

The [Select device] screen is displayed.


For the rest of the procedure, refer to [Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use] (

Page 17).

Timeout settings
This sets the wait time until the printer is in a usable state.
The choices that can be set are as follows.
Not selected
This sets the wait time until the printer can print when print data is transmitted from the computer,
When the set time is exceeded, an error message is displayed and the print job is automatically
canceled.
Transmission retry
This sets the wait time until the printer can retry printing when data transmission from the computer fails.
When the set time is exceeded, an error message is displayed and the print job is automatically
canceled.

201

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

Port settings
This can be set when [LPT*] is set as the printed connection destination. This makes settings for the
LPT port to which the printer is connected.
The choices that can be set are as follows.
Spool MS-DOS print jobs
Spooling print jobs from MS-DOS-based applications
Check port state before printing
This checks whether the port is connected before printing.

Capture Printer port


This assigns a network printer to a virtual printer port.
The choices that can be set are as follows.
Device
Select the port to which the network printer is connected.
Path
The printer connection path is input.
Reconnect at logon
Each time Windows is started, choose whether or not to connect to the printer. To connect, check
the checkbox.

End Capture
This ends the setting for the set port.

Click the [Details] tab.

Click the [End Capture] button.

The [End Capture] screen is displayed.

202

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

The port to release is selected.

Click the [OK] button.

Port addition/deletion
This adds or deletes a network or local printer.
To add a port, click the [Add port] button, then input the network path or port name.
To delete a port, click the [Delete port] button, then select the port to delete.

Spool settings
This sets the method for temporarily accumulating (spooling) the print data when it is sent to the printer.
The choices that can be set are as follows.
Spool print jobs so program finishes printing faster
When this item is selected, the data is spooled. In addition, the spool format can be selected.
When you select [Start printing after last page is spooled], you can edit other documents and start
other applications during printing.
When you select [Start printing immediately], the computer's processing is slightly slowed. Select
this when there is little free space for spooling on the hard disk. In addition, the spool format can
be selected.
Print directly to the printer
This sends print jobs directly to the printer without spooling.
Bi-directional support for this printer
This selects whether or not to use the bi-directional communications function when the printer
communicates with the computer.

203

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

Windows NT 4.0
Checking the printer driver version
This checks the version of the printer driver currently being used.
With the PCL driver [Document Defaults], select the [About] tab.
The driver name and version can be checked.

Adding a printer driver


If you want to use a new printer driver that is not on the [Print using the following driver] list, this adds
that printer driver.

In PCL driver properties, click the [General] tab.

Click the [New Driver] button.

The confirmation screen is displayed.

204

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

Click the [Yes] button.

The Select device screen is displayed.


For the rest of the procedure, refer to [Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use] (

Page 34).

Timeout time setting


This sets the wait time until the printer can retry printing when data transmission from the computer fails.
When the set time is exceeded, an error message is displayed and the print job is automatically canceled.

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab.

Select the port to use, then click the [Configure Port] button.

The [LPT port configuration] screen is displayed.

This inputs the wait time until the computer re-sends print data.

Click the [OK] button.

205

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

Printer port assignment


This assigns a network printer to a virtual printer port.

From the PCL driver Properties, select the [Ports] tab.

Check the checkbox for the port to which the network printer is connected.

Click the [OK] button.

Deleting the printer port


This ends the setting for the set port.

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab.

Uncheck the checkbox for the port to be released.

Click the [OK] button.

206

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

Port addition/deletion
This adds or deletes a network or local printer.
To add a port, on the [Ports] tab, click the [Add port] button, then click the [New port] button and input
the port name.
To delete a port, select the port to delete in [Ports] tab, and click the [Delete port] button.

Spool settings
This sets the method for temporarily accumulating (spooling) the print data when it is sent to the printer.
This setting is made in [Scheduling] tab.

Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster.


When this item is selected, the data is spooled. In addition, the spool format can be selected.
When you select [Start printing after last page is spooled], you can edit other documents and start
other applications even during printing.
When [Start printing immediately] is selected, the spooled data is sent immediately to the computer.
Print directly to the printer
This sends print jobs directly to the printer without spooling.

207

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

Windows 2000/XP
Checking the printer driver version
This checks the version of the printer driver currently being used.

On the PCL driver properties, click the [General] tab.

Click the [Printing Preferences] button.

The [Printing Preferences] screen is displayed.

Select the [About] tab.

The driver name and vesion is displayed.

208

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

The driver name and version can be checked.

Adding a printer driver


If you want to use a new printer driver that is not on the [Print using the following driver] list, this adds
that printer driver.

On the PCL driver properties, click the [Advanced] tab.

Click the [New Driver...] button.

The [Add Printer Driver Wizard] screen is displayed.


For the rest of the procedure, refer to [Chapter 2 Preparing the Printer for Use] (

209

Page 51).

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

Timeout time setting


This sets the wait time until the printer can retry printing when data transmission from the computer fails.
When the set time is exceeded, an error message is displayed and the print job is automatically canceled.

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab.

Select the port to use, then click the [Configure Port] button.

The [Configure LPT Port] screen is displayed.

This inputs the wait time until the computer re-sends print data.

Click the [OK] button.

210

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

Printer port assignment


This assigns a network printer to a virtual printer port.

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab.

Check the checkbox for the port to which the network printer is connected.

Click the [OK] button.

Deleting the printer port


This ends the setting for the set port.

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Ports] tab.

Uncheck the checkbox for the port to be released.

Click the [OK] button.

211

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

3-8. Setting the connection between the computer and printer

Port addition/deletion
This adds or deletes a network or local printer.
To add a port, on the [Ports] tab, click the [Add port] button, then click the [New port] button and input
the port name.
To delete a port, select the port to delete in [Ports] tab, and click the [Delete port] button.

Spool settings
This sets the method for temporarily accumulating (spooling) the print data when it is sent to the printer.
This setting is made in [Advanced] tab.

Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster.


When this item is selected, the data is spooled. In addition, the spool format can be selected.
When you select [Start printing after last page is spooled], you can edit other documents and start
other applications even during printing.
When [Start printing immediately] is selected, the spooled data is sent immediately to the computer.
Print directly to the printer
This sends print jobs directly to the printer without spooling.

212

II Printer Chapter 3 Printing with Windows

II Printer

Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

You can select the printing method and set functions for printing from applications.
This chapter explains the printer functions and setting methods for printing with a Macintosh.

4-1. Setting printer functions ..................................................................214


4-2. Function list .......................................................................................215
4-3. Basic print settings...........................................................................216
4-4. Printing multiple pages ....................................................................226
4-5. Special printing .................................................................................243
4-6. Making PostScript settings (File save) ...........................................250

213

4-1. Setting printer functions


These are set from the screen displayed when a [Print] command is executed from an application.
These settings only remain in effect while the application is being used. When the application ends, the settings are deleted.
There are the following two methods for displaying the settings screen.

Setting from the [Print] screen


Open data with the application, then from the [File] menu item, select [Print].

z The contents of the screen depend on the application.

Setting from the [Page (paper) Setup] screen


Open data with the application, then from the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].

z The contents of the screen depend on the application.


z For some applications, from the [File] menu item, you select [Paper settings] - [Options].

214

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-2. Function list


This list contains a summary of the main settings related to printing.

The display of listed items and setting values may vary according to whether options are present (and
their settings).
For details on functions not covered here, refer to your Macintosh guide.

Function

Summary

Reference

Basic print settings


Number of copies

Specifies the number of copies to print.

Page 216

Selects landscape or portrait direction to print on the paper.

Page 217

Media size

Sets the size of the paper to print on.

Page 218

Manual feed media


type

Sets the type of the media for printing.

Page 220

Magnification ratio

Prints enlarged/reduced.

Page 221

Selects the input tray containing the paper to print on.

Page 222

Prints from the last page to the first.

Page 223

Selects the tray which to output printed paper.

Page 224

Sets the width for the margin (the section not printed at all) for printing

Page 225

Direction

Input method
Reverse order printing
Output tray
Margins

Printing multiple pages


Duplex printing

Prints consecutive pages on the front and rear.

Page 229

Prints multiple pages of consecutive data combined on one side of one sheet of
paper. The print image is automatically enlarged/reduced to match the size of
the print paper.

Page 230

Page layout
Special mode

Prints swapping the order of the pages so that the output paper can be piled up
and folded in two to make a booklet.

Page 233

Collate

Prints one copy at a time of all the pages.

Page 235

Offset

When printing multiple copies, this shifts the output position for each set.

Page 236

Staple

Staples.

Page 238

Prints attaching a front cover or back cover.

Page 241

Front cover/Back
cover

Special printing
Printing with top/bottom or left/right
reversed
Black/white
reversed printing
Watermarks

Prints with the top/bottom or left/right reversed. (Mirror image printing)

Page 243

Prints with black and white reversed. (Negative image printing)

Page 244

Prints preset text as a watermark.

Page 245

Smoothing

Smoothes curved sections so that jaggedness stands out less.

Page 248

Toner save

Controls the print density and conserves the toner.

Page 249

Making PostScript settings (file save)


Format

Sets the data format for writing to files.

Page 250

PostScript level

Sets the PostScript level compatibility.

Page 251

Selects either ASCII or binary.

Page 251

Sets the type of font data embedded in files.

Page 251

Format
Font data

215

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-3. Basic print settings


Setting the number of copies to print (Copies)
This specifies the number of copies to print.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [General].

In [Copies], input the number of copies to print.

z The number of copies can be set to 1 to 999.

216

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-3. Basic print settings

Setting the print direction (Direction)


This selects landscape or portrait direction to print on the paper.

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].


z For some applications, from the [File] menu item, you select [Paper settings] - [Options].

Select [Page Attributes].

In [Orientation], select the paper direction.

217

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-3. Basic print settings

Setting the print paper size (Paper)


This sets the size of the paper to print on.
The paper sizes that can be selected are as follows.
Statement (5.5 x 8.5 inch)
Letter (8.5 x 11 inch)
Legal (8.5 x 14 inch)
Tabloid (11 x 14 inch)
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
A4 (210 x 297 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B4 (257 x 364 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
B6 (128 x 182 mm)
F4 (8 x 13 inch)
8K (266 x 387 mm)
16K (193 x 266 mm)
Custom

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].

Select [Page Attributes].

In [Paper], select the paper size.

z For details on the sizes of paper that can be set in the printer's input trays, refer to the copier operations manual.

218

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-3. Basic print settings

Setting any paper size


To set a non-standard paper size, select [Custom], then input the paper width and height with the following procedure.

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].

Select [Custom Page Default].

In [Units], select the length unit, then input the height and width of the paper.

Click the [OK] button.

219

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-3. Basic print settings

Selecting the type of paper (Media type)


This selects the type of media to print.
The types of paper you can select are as follows.
Plain paper:
Regular copy paper
OHP (Transparency): Overhead projector film
OHP Interleave (Blank): White paper inserted between overhead projector film
OHP Interleave (Print): Prints the same contents on the OHP interleaf paper as on the film.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Media Type], select the paper type.

The collate function cannot be set at the same time as a [Media type] selection of [OHP], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Print)].

220

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-3. Basic print settings

Printing enlarged/reduced (Magnification ratio)


This specifies the magnification ratio for printing.

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].

Select [Page Attributes].

Input the [Scale].

z The magnification ratio can be from 25 to 400 %.

221

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-3. Basic print settings

Selecting the input tray (Paper source)


This selects the input tray containing the paper to print on.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [General].

In [Paper Source], select the input tray containing the paper to print on.

The types of input trays that can be selected are as follows.


Auto select:
The tray is selected automatically to match the paper size.
Tray 1 to 4:
Input trays (The number of trays depends on the options installed on the copier.)
Manual Feed:
Bypass tray

222

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-3. Basic print settings

Selecting the print order (Reverse print order)


This specifies the order in which pages are printed.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [General].

Check the [Reverse Order] checkbox.

Not checked: The pages are printed in order from first page number to last. When the printing ends, the
sheets are stacked in reverse order of their page numbers.
Checked:
The pages are printed in order from last page number to first. When the printing ends, the
sheets are stacked in order of their page numbers.

223

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-3. Basic print settings

Selecting the output tray (Output tray)


This selects the tray which to output printed paper. This can be selected when the optional output unit is
installed on the copier.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Printer Specific Options].

The tray is selected in [Output Bin].


The types of output trays that can be selected are as follows.
Default:
The printers (copier) normal output tray.
Trays 1 to 4: Trays on the optional output unit.

224

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-3. Basic print settings

Setting the margin (Margins)


This sets the width for the margin for printing.

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].


z For some applications, from the [File] menu item, you select [Paper settings] - [Options].

Select [Custom Page Default].

In [Margins], input the widths of the top, bottom, left, and right margins.

z The minimum margin that can be set is 0.42 cm (0.17 inch). The maximum margin that can be set depends on the
size of the paper.

225

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages


Duplex printing (

Page 229)

This prints consecutive pages on the front and rear.


[Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge] can be selected.

Flip on long edge

Flip on short edge

Document pages/print pages/layout direction (

Page 230)

This prints multiple pages of consecutive data combined on one side of one sheet of paper.
When the size of the document set by the application is larger than the print paper size, one page of the
document is printed laid out over multiple sheets of paper.
The print image is automatically enlarged/reduced to match the size of the print paper.
2 to 16 pages of data can be combined on 1 page and 1 page can be divided into 4 (2x2) to 36 (6x6)
units.
Printing multiple document pages on one sheet paper

Printing one document page on multiple sheets of paper

226

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

Special mode (

Page 233)

This prints swapping the order of the pages so that the output paper can be piled up and folded in two
to make a booklet.
[Left binding] or [Right binding] can be selected.

Collating (

Page 235)

This prints one entire set of multi-page data at one time.

Offset (

Page 236)

When printing multiple copies, this shifts the position for each set.

227

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

Stapling (

Page 238)

This staples.

Front cover/Back cover (

Page 241)

This prints attaching a front cover or back cover.

228

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

Printing on both the front and rear of the paper (Duplex printing)
This prints consecutive pages on the front and rear.
[Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short edge] can be selected.

Flip on long edge

Flip on short edge

Flip on long edge


The pages are flipped on their long edges. The front and rear have the same top.

Flip on short edge


The pages are flipped on their short edges. The front and rear have tops at opposite ends.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Layout].

Check the [Print on Both Sides] checkbox.

Select the [Binding].

229

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper (Document


pages/Print pages/Layout direction)
This prints multiple pages of consecutive data combined on one side of one sheet of paper.
When the size of the document set by the application is larger than the print paper size, one page of the document is printed laid out over multiple sheets of paper. The print image is automatically enlarged/reduced to
match the size of the print paper.

Document pages/print pages


2 to 16 pages of data can be combined on 1 page and 1 page can be divided into 4 (2x2) to 36 (6x6)
units.
Printing multiple document pages on one sheet paper

Printing one document page on multiple sheets of paper

230

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

Layout direction
The order in which pages can be assigned onto one print page can be selected. [From top left to bottom
right] or [From top right to bottom left] can be selected.

2 pgs/sheet

4 pgs/sheet

9 pgs/sheet

6 pgs/sheet

16 pgs/sheet

Frames/lines
This prints frames or lines on combined pages.

None

Frame

Lines

231

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Layout].

In [Page per sheet], select the type of combination.

In [Layout direction], select the document page order.

In [Border], select the type of frame or line.

232

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

Folding paper in two to make booklets (Special mode)


This prints swapping the order of the pages so that the output paper can be piled up and folded in two to
make a booklet.
You can select either [Booklet (left binding)] or [Booklet (right binding)].

Booklet (left binding)


The paper is bound on the left side. This is selected when the pages proceed from left to right.

Booklet (right binding)


The paper is bound on the right side. This is selected when the pages proceed from right to left.

Booklet/special mode cannot be used when any of the settings below are in effect.
When a paper size of [Postcard] is selected.
When [Document pages/print page], [Staple], [Duplex], or [Front cover/Back cover] is set.

233

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Combination], select either [Booklet] or [Booklet-Right].

234

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

Printing one copy at a time of all pages (Collate)


This prints one entire set of multi-page data at one time.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Collate], select [Sort].

235

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

Outputting sorted into separate sets of copies (Offset)


When printing multiple copies, this shifts the output position for each set.
This is handy when outputting multiple copies to a single output tray.

When the copier optional paper output unit is installed, the paper is output with its position shifted for
each set.
When the paper output unit is not installed, the paper is output with the direction changed for each set.

When there is a paper output unit

When there is no paper output unit

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Printer Specific Options].

236

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

In [Job Offset], select [On].

237

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

Stapling (Staple)
This staples.
Portrait and landscape
Stapling with the papers joined lengthwise is called [Portrait] and stapling with the papers joined widthwise is called [Landscape].
Number of staples and their locations
The pages are bound on either the left or right side of the paper. For stapling, you can select one- or
two-point stapling.
z For details on the stapling positions, refer to the copier operations manual.

238

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages


The types of stapling that can be selected are as follows.

Single (Portrait)

Single (Landscape)

Single Right (Portrait)

Single Right (Landscape)

Double Left (Portrait)

Double Left (Landscape)

Double Top (Portrait)

Double Top (Landscape)

Double Right (Portrait)

Double Right (Landscape)

Stapling cannot be set when a [Media type] of [OHP], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave
(Print)] is set. Stapling cannot be set when a [Media type] of [OHP], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP
Interleave (Print)] is set.

239

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Stapling], select the stapling type.

z To set either portrait or landscape, change the [Direction] setting.

240

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

Attaching a front cover/back cover (Front Cover/Back Cover)


This prints attaching a front cover or back cover.
Front cover
This prints a front cover. For the front cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed].
For [Blank], one sheet of white paper is added. For [Printed], the first page of the data is printed on the
front cover.

When the front cover is


set to [Blank]

When the front cover is


set to [Printed]

Back Cover
This prints attaching a back cover. For the back cover, select either [Blank] or [Printed].
For [Blank], one sheet of white paper is added. For [Printed], the last page of the data is printed on the
back cover.

When the back cover is


set to [Blank]

When the back cover is set


to [Printed]

Front/Back Cover Tray


Select the tray in which the paper for the front cover/back cover is set. Select a tray with paper the
same size as the main text.

Front cover/back cover cannot be set when any of the following settings are in effect.
When [Booklet] is set
When [Sort] is not set
When a [Media type] of [OHP], [OHP Interleave (Blank)], or [OHP Interleave (Print)] is selected
When a [Paper size] of [B6], [Postcard], [Legal], or [Statement] is selected

241

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-4. Printing multiple pages

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Front Cover] or [Back Cover], select [Printed] or [Blank].

In [Front/Back Cover Tray], select the tray in which the paper for the front cover/back cover
is set.

242

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-5. Special printing


Printing with top/bottom or left/right reversed (Mirror image
printing)
This prints with the top/bottom or left/right reversed as if in a mirror.

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].


z For some applications, from the [File] menu item, you select [Paper settings] - [Options].

Select [PostScript Options].

Check the [Visual Effects] [Flip Horizontal] or [Flip Vertical] checkbox.

The figure in the print example is printed with left/right or top/bottom reversed.

243

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-5. Special printing

Printing with black and white reversed (Negative image printing)


This prints photographic with the black and white sections of the document reversed like a negative film.

From the [File] menu item, select [Page Setup].


z For some applications, from the [File] menu item, you select [Paper settings] - [Options].

Select [PostScript Options].

Check the [Visual Effects] [Invert Image] checkbox.

Black and white in the printing are reversed.

244

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-5. Special printing

Printing watermarks (Watermark)


This prints [Draft] or another preset text as a watermark.

The following five watermarks are registered when the printer driver is installed.
PICT
EPS
TEXT

Adobe-PICT2
Confidential.pict
Adobe.B&W.eps
Adobe.color.eps
Draft

z For [TEXT], you can use the edit functions to change the character contents and types and color.

Selecting a watermark

From the [File] menu item, select [Page setup].


z For some applications, from the [File] menu item, you select [Paper settings] - [Options].

Select [Watermark].

245

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-5. Special printing

Select [First] or [All].

z For [First], the watermark is only printed on the first page, for [All], the watermark is printed on all the pages.

Select [PICT], [EPS], or [TEXT].

Select the type of watermark to print.

Editing text
When you select [TEXT], you can change the watermark character contents, types, and color.

Click the [Edit] button.

The [Specify watermark] screen is displayed.


The settings that can be changed are as follows.
Watermark file
This selects the file in which the watermark is stored.
Watermark font/size/style
This sets the font and size for the watermark.
Watermark text
This inputs the character string for the watermark.
Color
When you click this, a list of the colors is displayed. Select the color you want by either clicking
one or clicking [Other color] and composing any color you want.
New save
This saves the changed settings as a watermark file.

246

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-5. Special printing

This printing system does not support color. When colors are selected, they are printed converted to gray.

First/All
The print the watermark only on the first page, select [First], to print the watermark on all the pages,
select [All].

Foreground
The watermark is usually printed in such a way that the document can be seen through the watermark.
To print a watermark over the document, check the [Foreground] checkbox. With this type of printing,
the portion of the document under the watermark cannot be seen.

Save with Document


This stores the edited watermark settings together with the document data.

247

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-5. Special printing

Smoothing characters and curved lines (Smoothing)


This smoothes curved sections in printed characters and images to make jaggedness (the rough sections
seen at the edges of figures and the like) stand out less.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Smoothing], select the type.

The types that can be selected are as follows.


None : No smoothing
Type 1: Smoothes diagonal lines in general characters and figures.
Type 2: Smoothes curved sections of general characters.
Type 3: Smoothes the more detailed sections, for example curved line sections of decorative and fine
characters.

248

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-5. Special printing

Conserving toner (Toner save)


This controls the print density and conserves the toner.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [Printer Specific Options].

In [Toner Save], select [On].

249

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-6. Making PostScript settings (File save)


This makes settings such as the PostScript format.

From the [File] menu item, select [Print].

Select [PostScript Settings].

Format
This sets the data format for writing to files.

PostScript Job
This is selected for normal printing and for writing to PostScript files (PS files).
z On the applications [Print] screen, if there is no [Output to file], the data is written to a PostScript file.

EPS Mac Standard Preview


This is selected for writing to an EPS file with a bitmap format preview attached.
z Files written as EPS files can be laid out on other applications.

EPS Mac Enhanced Preview


This is selected for writing to an EPS file with a PICT format preview attached.
EPS No Preview
This is selected for writing to an EPS file with no preview attached.

250

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

4-6. Making PostScript settings (File save)

PostScript level
This sets the PostScript language level.
Select the PostScript level supported by the printer.
The PostScript levels that can be selected are as follows.
Level 1, 2 and 3 Compatible
Level 2 Only
Level 3 Only

Format
This selects the protocol (which determines the communications procedure) for data communications
with the printer.
ASCII
This format can be printed on all printers. This is the format normally selected.
Binary
This has smaller data volumes than ASCII, so printing is faster, but it is not supported by all applications and printers.

Font Inclusion
Font data can be stored together with the document data in a file.
The methods of font inclusion are as follows.
None
All
All But Standard 13
All But Fonts in PPD file

251

II Printer Chapter 4 Printing with Macintosh

II Printer

Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

The print count can be managed on the copier executing the printing. This function is called
the [Printer EKC/ECM].
This chapter explains the printing method when the Printer EKC/ECM is set and count management.

5-1. Managing the print count .................................................................253


5-2. Printer EKC/ECM settings ................................................................254

252

5-1. Managing the print count


The print count can be managed from this printing system. This function is called the Printer EKC/ECM.
Managing the print count requires the settings below to be made on the copier.
Printer EKC/ECM settings
The settings for using the Printer EKC/ECM function are made in [Key operator settings].
Password registration for each user
This sets the password input by the user when printing. Counters. function for each of these passwords. EKC/ECM passwords are numbers up to five digits long.
Limiter value settings
When the number of sheets printed for each user is restricted, the upper limit on the print count (limiter
value) must be set.

EKC/ECM operations and settings changes should be made by the administrator.


For details, refer to the copiers operations manual.

253

II Printer
Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

5-2. Printer EKC/ECM settings


When the Printer EKC/ECM is set for this printing system, the functions below can be used.

Printer EKC/ECM printing


Printing is carried out in the status set by the Printer EKC/ECM.

From the PCL driver [Properties], select the [Paper] tab.

Click the [Password Print] button.

The [Password Print] screen is displayed.

For the [User ID], input the EKC/ECM password set for the copier.

z EKC/ECM passwords are numbers up to five digits long.

254

II Printer
Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

5-2. Printer EKC/ECM settings

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the properties screen.

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Print] screen.

To print, click the [OK] button.

If the EKC/ECM password was input incorrectly or not input at all, the print job is not printed, but instead
is registered as an incomplete job. For details on checking on the Incomplete job list, refer to [6-3.
Checking incomplete jobs] (
Page 264).
If you do not know your EKC/ECM password, ask your system administrator.

255

II Printer
Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

5-2. Printer EKC/ECM settings

Reading counter values


The number of sheets printed is counted for each user for whom an EKC/ECM password is set. This count is
called the [EKC/ECM counter].

EKC/ECM limits
When the upper limit on the number of sheets printed is decided for each user on the copier, the printer operates as follows at the point in time when the upper limit (limiter value) is reached.
One of the following operations is executed if a print command is sent when the EKC/ECM limit has been
exceeded.
A message is displayed on the LCD screen saying that the EKC/ECM counter has exceeded its limit
and printing is executed normally.
The print job is not printed, but instead is registered in the [incomplete job list].
When the EKC/ECM limit is exceed during printing, one of the following operations is executed.
The fact that the EKC/ECM counter has exceeded its limiter value is displayed. Printing is executed
normally and the counter continues to rise.
After this print job has ended, job reception is stopped. Print jobs sent after this are registered in the
[Incomplete job list].
Printing stops the moment the limit is exceeded. Any paper already fed is ejected and the print job is
registered in the [Incomplete job list].

The choices of operations depend on the settings on the copier. For details, ask your system administrator.
For details on checking on the Incomplete job list, refer to [6-3. Checking incomplete jobs]
(

Page 264).

256

II Printer
Chapter 5 Print Count Management (Printer EKC/ECM)

II Printer

Chapter 6 Printing Problems

This chapter explains how to handle problems with the printer in printing. If the methods in this
chapter do not solve the problem, please contact your service representative.

6-1. Problems with printing .....................................................................258


6-2. Problems printing with the Adobe driver........................................262
6-3. Checking incomplete jobs................................................................264

257

6-1. Problems with printing


No response to printer commands.
Check the following in order.

Check that the [Konica IP-422] is selected as the printer.

Check that the copier power is switched On.

Print a [Test page].


If you can print a test page, but jobs from the computer cannot be printed, notifying the system administrator or service representative.

The paper type cannot be selected.


Check the following in order.

1
2

Click the [Paper] tab and [Cover] tab [Restore Defaults] button to restore the default
state.
Select the paper tray containing the paper to print as the [Paper Source].

258

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-1. Problems with printing

Test page cannot be printed.


Check the following, in order.

Check the copier control panel LCD screen.


If [Ready to Copy] is displayed on the LCD screen, proceed to Step 3.
If a diagnostics message or error message is displayed on the LCD screen, refer to the copier operation manual.
If nothing at all is displayed on the LCD screen, proceed to Step 2.

Press the sub power switch on the control panel.


If the copier is in auto shut-off mode, pressing this switch puts the LCD screen into display mode.

Check that copying is possible.


If copying is possible, proceed to Step 4.

Switch off the copiers main power, then restart it. Once the print controller can be
used, print a test page again.

When you switch the main power for the copier ON/OFF, wait at least 10 seconds before switching it On
again. Switching the main power On again too quickly can cause a system error.

If you still cannot print a test page, contact your service representative.

259

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-1. Problems with printing

The print settings and print results do not match.


Check the following operations.

Check that the printer settings have not been changed.


z For details on printer settings, refer to [Chapter 3 Printing with Windows] (
Printing with Macintosh] (
Page 213).

Page 118) or [Chapter 4

Duplex printing is not possible.


Check the following in order.

Click the [Paper] tab and [Cover] tab [Restore Defaults] button and restore the default
state.

Check that [B6] is not selected as the [Paper size:].

Check that [Plain Paper] is selected as the [Media type].

Check that the [Combination] checkbox is not checked.

260

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-1. Problems with printing

Forms cannot be printed.


If any of the following conditions occur, forms cannot be printed.

The form data size exceeds the maximum value.


The relationship between the maximum form data size and the amount of memory in the Print Controller is as follows.
Amount of memory

Maximum form data size

64 MB (no expansion memory)

about 2.6 MB

128 MB (64 MB expansion memory)

about 5.2 MB

z For details on memory, refer to [29-3. Options] (

261

Page 682).

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-2. Problems printing with the Adobe driver


PostScript error is displayed.
For details on the PostScript errors, refer to the Adobe homepage http://www.adobe.co.jp/supportservice/
custsupport/ SOLUTIONS/214063.html.

[Vmerror], [limitcheck], or other PostScript error is displayed.


It is possible that either the printer or the copier main unit memory is insufficient. We recommend increasing
the memory.

PostScript error is displayed no matter which computer is


attempting to print.
It is possible that the print controller or the PostScript option is not installed correctly. Check their installing
again.

PostScript error is displayed for printing from a specific application.


There may be a problem in the application. Print a test file with this application.
If the application cannot print a test file, reinstall the application.

PostScript error is displayed for printing a specific file.


It is conceivable that the file print settings are incorrect, that an included figure is corrupted, or that there is a
problem element included in the file.
Try changing the print settings and printing.
If printing is still not possible, save the file as a new file or with a different name.

PostScript error is displayed for printing a specific page.


It is conceivable that an element or font on the page is corrupted or that the memory required is more than is
available for printing.
Try printing one element or font at a time from the page.
If the individual fonts and elements can be printed, but the page as a whole cannot be printed, we recommend increasing the memory.

262

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-2. Problems printing with the Adobe driver

Fonts cannot be downloaded.


It is conceivable that the copier control panel [Printer setting menu] - [Spool setting] is [On].
Set the [Spool setting] - [Off], cut off the main power for the copier, wait at least 10 seconds, then restart the
copier and execute the font download again.
For details on font downloading, refer to the users manual that comes with the font.

Non fixed size paper (custom) cannot be printed correctly


with a Macintosh.
The direction in which non fixed size paper is loaded in the copier may be incorrect.
Rotate the paper direction 90 degrees and then try printing after changing the settings of the driver and copier
accordingly.

263

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-3. Checking incomplete jobs


If there is an incomplete job, you can check in [Incomplete jobs list] screen.
The [Incomplete job list] screen can be displayed by using the following method.

Touch the [Scedule list] key on [Printer basic mode] screen on the LCD screen.
The [Schedule list] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Incomplete job list] key on the LCD screen.


The [Incomplete job list] screen is displayed.
If the job you're looking for is not displayed, touch the [], [] key on the LCD screen to scroll the display.

Contents displayed in the incomplete job list


On the incomplete job list, you can check the mode, filename or application name, cause, etc.
The contents displayed on the incomplete job list are as follows.
Mode

Printer

Cause

Contents

Cancel

Stopping with STOP/CLEAR, deletion from schedule list,


key counter removal/setting, cancel requests from print
controller, aborted jobs, loading inhibited due to fixing
Web count, copy inhibited until L inspection, memory
error

Incorrect ID

A job that was not output because the User ID was incorrect

Over limit

A job that was not output because the Printer EKC/ECM


limit value was exceeded

Memory overflow

A job that was not output because the copier memory


was full

Hard disk full

A job for which uploading could not be completed


because the hard disk was full

Cancel

Stopping with STOP/CLEAR, deletion from schedule list,


key counter removal/setting, cancel requests from Print
Controller, aborted jobs

Cancel

Stopping with STOP/CLEAR, deletion from schedule list,


cancel requests from print controller, aborted jobs, transmission and fax controller not installed, pipe transmission
error, file memory full

Hard disk full

A job for which uploading could not be completed


because the hard disk was full

Memory overflow

A job that was not output because the copier memory


was full

Scanner

PC-FAX

264

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

6-3. Checking incomplete jobs

On the LCD screen [Incomplete job list] screen, when you touch the [Fax job] key or the [Print job] key,
the display returns to the [Schedule list] screen.
When the main power for the copier is switched off, the incomplete jobs displayed on the [Incomplete job
list] screen are deleted.

265

II Printer Chapter 6 Printing Problems

III FAX
This chapter explains the operations
for sending/receiving faxes using a
computer.

Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax) .. 267


Chapter 8 Sending Faxes ................. 272
Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration . 279
Chapter 10 Receiving Faxes .............. 293

266

III FAX

III FAX

Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)

You can send and receive faxes directly on the computer without using paper. This is called
[PC-Fax].
This chapter summarizes the PC-Fax functions and explains the general flow of their processing.

7-1. Sending faxes from the computer ...................................................268


7-2. Receiving faxes with the computer .................................................269
7-3. Registering recipient names and their fax numbers. ....................270
7-4. Using PC-Fax.....................................................................................271

267

7-1. Sending faxes from the computer


Normally, when a fax is sent, a handwritten or printed document is set in the fax machine and transmitted.
When the PC-Fax functions are used, you can use the the computer to send and receive faxes directly without using paper.
The transmission command sent from the application is received by the printer driver.
When this printing system is used as a local printer, data is sent to the controller via the parallel interface
(IEEE1284); when it is used as a network printer, the data is sent via Ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX). The Print
Controller executes rasterizing processing for the picture (converting the output characters and pictures into
bit-map data). This data is accumulated in the E-RDH memory in the copier and transmitted as a fax.

Computer
Using as local printer

Using as network printer

Application

Application
Transmission
command

Transmission
command
Printer driver

Printer driver

Parallel interface
(IEEE1284)

Ethernet
(TCP/IP, IPX/SPX)

Print Controller
PDL processing (rasterizing)

copier
E-RDH memory

Printing with
copier
Fax transmission

To use PC-Fax, it is necessary to install the optional fax kit on the copier main unit. For details, ask your
service representative.

268

III FAX Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)

7-2. Receiving faxes with the computer


You can check fax documents received with the copier on the computer's screen.
After received fax data is accumulated into the copier's E-RDH memory, it can be printed on the copier.
When this data is checked on the computer, it is stored from the E-RDH memory to the Print Controller's hard
disk, then sent via the Ethernet to the computer's hard disk.

Fax reception

copier
E-RDH memory

Printing with
copier
Print Controller
Hard disk

Computer

Ethernet
(TCP/IP, IPX/SPX)

Hard disk

To use PC-Fax, it is necessary to install the optional fax kit on the copier main unit. For details, ask your
service representative.

269

III FAX Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)

7-3. Registering recipient names and their fax


numbers.
You can register and manage recipient names and their fax numbers in the phonebook.
These transmission recipients can be put together into groups. You can send a document to all the members
of a group with just a single operation.

Phonebook

Broadcast Group 1

Broadcast Group 2

270

III FAX Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)

7-4. Using PC-Fax


OSs supported by PC-Fax
The PC-Fax functions are executed using the PCL driver. The PC-Fax functions work on the following operations systems.
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP

Setting the fax unit


First, ready the fax kit installed on the copier for use.

Display the PCL driver [Properties].


z For details on how to display [Properties], refer to [3-1. Setting printer functions] (

Select the [Setup] tab.

In [Available options], select [Fax option], then click the [Add] button.

Page 119).

[Fax option] is displayed on the [Installed options].

Click the [OK] button.

271

III FAX Chapter 7 Fax Functions (PC-Fax)

III FAX

Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

This chapter explains the procedures for sending faxes.

8-1. Transmission procedure ..................................................................273


8-2. PC-Fax transmission error reports..................................................278

272

8-1. Transmission procedure


This section explains how to use a computer to send files as faxes using PC-Fax.

Fax transmission

Open data with the application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.

Check that the [Name] is [Konica IP-422 PCL].

Click the [Properties] button.


The [Properties] screen is displayed.

Select the [FAX] tab.

In [Mode Selection], select the [FAX].

273

III FAX Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-1. Transmission procedure

In [Resolution], select either [200 dpi] (fine mode) or [400 dpi] (super fine mode).

Click the [Setup] button.


The [Fax Mode Setup] screen is displayed.

To print a file after a fax is sent, select [Print After Send].

To set a time to send the fax later, select [Delayed Transmission], then at [Time you
want to transmit], either click the [
] or [
] button or key in the time.
z When using timer send, check that the clocks on the computer and the copier are synchronized.If the send time is
earlier than the Copier current time, the fax is sent the next day.
Example: Send time 12:00
Copier current time 12:10
Fax sent at 12:00 the next day

10

For confidential transmission, select or input the [Sub Address] and [Sender ID].
z It is possible to execute confidential communications with another fax model by using F codes.
z The sub-address can be a number of up to 20 byte digits
z Up to 20 byte numbers, #, and * can be input as the ID.
z For details on sub-addresses and send IDs, refer to the fax kit users manual.

274

III FAX Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-1. Transmission procedure

11

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Properties] screen.

12

Specifying the fax destination.


When inputting the fax recipient
At [Recipient], input the [Name] and [Fax No.], then click the [Add] button.

The recipient input into the [Recipient] is displayed.


z The [Name] may be up to 40 byte characters.
z The [Fax No.] may be up to 38 byte numbers (0 to 9), hyphens, #, *, E, P, T and spaces.
z Up to 100 recipients may be registered in the [Recipient].

Selecting the recipient from the phonebook


This procedure selects a recipient preset in the phone book.
z For details on phonebook registration, refer to [Chapter 9Phonebook Registration] (

Page 279)

Click the [Phonebook] button.

The [Phonebook] screen is displayed.

275

III FAX Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-1. Transmission procedure

Select the recipient or broadcast group to send the fax to.

Click the [Add Recipient] button.


The selected recipient is displayed in the [Recipient].
z When a broadcast group is selected, all the members of the group are displayed in the [Recipient].

13

Check the recipient, then click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [FAX] tab.

Check that the party for file transmission is displayed in the [Recipient].
z To delete a recipient, select the recipient to delete from the [Recipients], then click the [Delete] button.
z There is no need to change the [Error Correction Mode], [Intl Transmission Mode], and [V.34 Mode] checkboxes. For
details, refer to the fax kit users manual.

14

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Print] screen.

276

III FAX Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-1. Transmission procedure

15

Click the [OK] button.


The fax transmission check message is displayed.

16

Click the [OK] button.

The fax is sent to the specified recipient.

277

III FAX Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

8-2. PC-Fax transmission error reports


If an error occurs during PC-Fax transmission, an error report is printed automatically.

PC-Fax Tx Error Report

REMOTE STATION

CREATE

START

Cause
Mem Full

Factor

Name
test .pdf

Cancel : Stop PC-Fax job, ID difer : EKC/ECM user ID differ, Limit over : EKC/ECM counter limit over
HD full : Hard disc full, Mem full : Memory over

Failed to PC-Fax Tx. Please check and try PC-Fax Tx again!

z If you do not want error reports printed automatically, use the operator panel keys and switch [Report output settings]
[PC-Fax transmission error reports] - [Off].

REMOTE STATION
Fax number for the first recipient
CREATE
Time at which PC-Fax transmission was executed on the computer
START
Time specified for the timer reservation
Cause
Cause of the error
Name
Job name or user name

278

III FAX Chapter 8 Sending Faxes

III FAX

Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

You can register and manage recipient information in the phonebook.


This chapter explains how to use the phonebook.

9-1. Registering phonebook ....................................................................280


9-2. Managing phonebooks .....................................................................289
9-3. Phonebook usage .............................................................................292

279

9-1. Registering phonebook


Registering parties to which you send fax documents into the phonebook.

Registering recipient information

Open data with the application, then execute [Print].


The [Print] screen is displayed.

Check that [Name] is [Konica IP-422 PCL].

Click the [Properties] button.


The [Properties] screen is displayed.

Select the [FAX] tab.

In [Mode Selection], select the [FAX].

Click the [Phonebook] button.

The [Phonebook] screen is displayed.

280

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering phonebook

Click the [Personal] button.

The [Personal Information] screen is displayed.

Input the [Name], [Fax No.], [Company], and [Department].

z When inputting into the name column of the phonebook, add honorifics.
z There is no need to change the [ECM], [Int.Tx], and [V.34] checkboxes. For details, refer to the fax kit users manual.
z For the [Name], [Company], and [Department], up to 40 byte characters may be input.
z [Fax No.] may be up to 38 byte numbers (0 to 9), hyphens, #, *, E, P, T and spaces.

Click the [OK] button.


The recipient is registered and displayed in the recipient column.

281

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering phonebook

Creating groups of recipients


Recipients can be registered into groups, such as [suppliers] or [branch companies].

Broadcast transmission is not possible using groups prepared here.

On the [Phonebook] screen, click the [Folder] button.

The [Folder Information] screen is displayed.

Input the [Folder Name].

z The folder name may be up to 40 byte characters.

Click the [OK] button.


The folder is registered and displayed in the layer column.

Select the recipient to be registered into a group from the left-side directory tree.

Right click, then select [Copy] or [Cut].


z Folders can be set up to three layers deep.

Select the group into which to register the recipient from the left-side directory tree.

Right click, then select [Paste].


The recipient information is registered in the group.

282

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering phonebook

Revising recipient information

On the [Phonebook] screen, select the recipient to be changed from the recipient information column.

The selected recipient information is displayed inverted.

Click the [Edit] button.


The [Personal Information] screen is displayed

Revise any necessary items.

283

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering phonebook

Deleting unnecessary recipients and folders


On the [Phonebook] screen, select the recipient or folder to delete.

On the [Phonebook] screen, select the recipient information or folder to be deleted.


The selected recipient information or folder is displayed inverted.

Click the [Delete] button.

The confirmation message is displayed.

Click the [Yes] button.

The specified recipient or folder is deleted.

284

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering phonebook

Registering broadcast group


You can pre-register the recipients to which you want to send the same fax. Such a group is called a [broadcast group].

On the [Phonebook] screen, select the recipient to be registered into the broadcast
group from the recipient information column.

The selected recipient information is displayed inverted.

Right click, then from the [Add Group] broadcast group list, select the broadcast group
to register into.

The recipient is copied into the selected broadcast group.

285

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering phonebook

Deleting a recipient from a broadcast group

On the [Phonebook] screen, select the broadcast group in which the recipient is registered
from the broadcast group column.

The selected broadcast group is displayed inverted and the recipients registered in that broadcast group are displayed in the recipient column.

Select the recipient to delete from the recipient column.

The selected recipient is displayed inverted.

286

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering phonebook

Right click, then select [Delete from Group].

The recipient is deleted from the broadcast group.


Ten broadcast groups are set. You cannot add or delete broadcast groups.
The total number of recipients that can be registered in all 10 broadcast groups is 100.

287

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-1. Registering phonebook

Naming a broadcast group

On the [Phonebook] screen, select the broadcast group to be named from the broadcast
group column.

The selected broadcast group is displayed inverted.

Right click, then select the [Edit] screen.

The [Group Information] screen is displayed

Input the [Group Name].

z The group name may be up to 40 byte characters.

Click the [OK] button.


The group name is registered and displayed in the broadcast group column.

288

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-2. Managing phonebooks


The phonebook in which recipient information is registered can be named and saved as a file. You can have
multiple phonebooks for different usages.

Saving phonebooks

When the registration of the information in the phonebook is complete, click the [OK]
or [Apply] button on the [Phonebook] screen.

The [Save As] screen is displayed.


z For details on registering in the phonebook, refer to [9-1. Registering phonebook] (

Page 280)

Specify the storage location, then input the file name.

z The extension of a file is [.csv].

Click the [Save] button.


The phonebook is saved as a file.

289

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-2. Managing phonebooks

Preparing a new phonebook

On the [Phonebook] screen, click [File] - [New].

The [IniBook.csv] folder is displayed in the layer column.

The recipient information is registered.


z For details on registering in the phonebook, refer to [9-1. Registering phonebook] (

Page 280)

Click the [OK] or [Apply] button.


The [Save As] screen is displayed.

Specify the storage location, then input the File name.

Click the [Save] button.


The phonebook is saved as a file.

290

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-2. Managing phonebooks

Switching between phonebooks


This is used to switch between phonebooks on the [Phonebook] screen.

On the [Phonebook] screen, click [File] - [Open].

The [Open] screen is displayed.

Select the folder for the phonebook to switch to, then click the [Open] button.

The selected phonebook is displayed.

291

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

9-3. Phonebook usage


Specifying the recipients registered in the phonebook and sending the fax.

Sending faxes using the phonebook

Click the [Phonebook] button on the [Fax] tab.


The [phonebook] screen is displayed.

Select the recipient or broadcast group to which send the fax.

Click the [Add Recipient] button.


The selected recipient is displayed in [Recipient].
If you have selected a broadcast group, all the recipients in that group are displayed.

If there are any unnecessary recipients in [Recipient], select them, then click the
[Delete] button.
The unnecessary recipients are deleted from the send list.

Check the send list, then click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Fax] tab.

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Print] screen.

Send the fax.


z For details on sending faxes, refer to [8-1. Transmission procedure] (

292

Page 273)

III FAX Chapter 9 Phonebook Registration

III Fax

Chapter 10 Receiving Faxes

You can view and save fax documents received by the copier.
This chapter explains the procedures for setting the PC-Fax functions on the copier.

10-1. Fax reception settings ....................................................................294

293

10-1. Fax reception settings


Fax documents received by the copier can be imported into the computer.
Received fax data is stored on the print controller's hard disk via the copier E-RDH memory.
The print controller's hard disk has [Boxes] with four-digit ID numbers for managing documents. The boxes
used for fax reception are numbered 0000 and 1000 to 1099.
Sent documents are normally stored in [Fixed box] 0000.
To automatically sort sent documents by objective, have the sender specify a number from 1000 to 1099 as
the [User box] number. When the sender does this, the document is stored in the specified user box.
Hard disk

Box No. 1000


Box No. 1099

Document

Outbox

E-RDH

For details on fax reception, refer to the fax kit user's manual.

294

III Fax Chapter 10 Receiving Faxes

10-1. Fax reception settings

PC-Fax reception settings


Using the PC-Fax functions requires that the copier be set to enable PC-Fax reception.

Press the

button on the control panel.


[Copy] button

Press the [HELP] button on the control panel.


The [HELP MODE] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the [Key Operator Mode] key on the LCD screen.

The [Password input] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

295

III Fax Chapter 10 Receiving Faxes

10-1. Fax reception settings

Input the password set for the copier.

z If you do not know the password, ask the system administrator.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Key operator mode] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the [2. FAX] key on the LCD screen.

The [Fax initial settings menu] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the [Function Set] key on the LCD screen.

The [Function Set] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

296

III Fax Chapter 10 Receiving Faxes

10-1. Fax reception settings

Touch the [PC-Fax Rx set] key on the LCD screen.

The [PC-Fax Rx set] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the [PC-Fax Rx set ] key, then touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen. Select
either [On] or [Dial-in only].
[On]
Whether a call comes into the fax number or the dedicated PC-Fax number, it is received by PC-Fax.

[Dial-in only]
Faxes are only received with PC-Fax when the dedicated PC-Fax number is dialed.

z [Dial-in only] can only be selected when the [Dial-in setting] is On.
For details on [Dial-in settings], refer to the fax kit user's manual.
z If [Off] is selected, PC-Fax reception is not executed.

297

III Fax Chapter 10 Receiving Faxes

10-1. Fax reception settings

10

Touch the [Rx Output Box] key, then touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen. Select
either [Fixed box] or [User box], and specify the box into which the received file is to be
stored.
[Fixed box]
The received file is stored into Box 0000.

[User box]
The fax is stored in Box No. 1000 - 1099 according to the F code (SUB) specified by the sending side.
PC-FAX Reception
settings
Reception
output destination

ON

Dial-in only

Storing into fixed box (0000)

When a fax is dialed in to the PC-Fax


dedicated number Stored in fixed
box
When a fax is received on the regular
fax number Printed on the copier

Stored in the box (1000 to 1099) specified by the sender


When the sender does not specify a
box number, the file is stored in the
fixed box. (*1)

Stored in the box (1000 to 1099) specified by the sender


When the sender does not specify a
box number and the fax is dialed in to
the PC-Fax dedicated number
The file is stored in the fixed box.
When the fax is received on the regular
fax number
The file is stored in the fixed box. (*1)

Fixed box
No.0000

User box
No.1000 to 1099

z The box No. is specified using the F code SUB.


*1The default value is set to the fixed box. You can also set to print received faxes without storing them in any box of
all. For details, ask your nearest service representative.

11

Printing after reception is set to either [YES] or [NO].


[YES]
After the received fax is sent to the appropriate box, it is printed on the copier.

12

If necessary, enter a four-digit password input with the number keys.

13

When storing faxes to a box specified with an F code (SID), password [YES] is selected.
z Password checking cannot be set if no password is input in Step 12, if the [Rx Output Box] is the fixed box, or if [PCFax Rx set] is Off.
z The password is specified using the F code SID.

When having the reception boxes allocated automatically according to sender, proceed to Step 14.

298

III Fax Chapter 10 Receiving Faxes

10-1. Fax reception settings

14

Touch the [Sender(TSI) Rx Box] key on the LCD screen.

The [Sender (TSI) Rx Box list] Screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

15

With the [] key or the [] key, select a box number to be registered, then touch the
[EDIT] key on the LCD screen.

z To delete a box, select it, then touch the [ERASE] key on the LCD screen.
z Up to 20 individual sender (TSI) reception boxes can be registered.

299

III Fax Chapter 10 Receiving Faxes

10-1. Fax reception settings

16

Touch the [Sender(TSI)] key on the LCD screen, then use the number keys, [+],
[SPACE], and [<<] or [>>] to input the sender information (Fax ID).

z When the fax is sent, [+] and [SPACE] are ignored.

[+] Inputs +.
[SPACE] Inputs a space.
[<<] Moves the cursor to the left.
[>>] Moves the cursor to the right.
Each time you touch the [DELETE] key on the LCD screen, the last character is deleted.
z To delete all the input characters, press

17

(STOP/CLEAR) on the control panel.

Touch the [Sender Rx Box] key on the LCD screen, then input the box number.

If [Sender Rx Box] is set and the sender has set the box No. using the F code (SUB), the data for the
received fax is stored in the box specified by the sender.

Input a box No. in the range 0001 to 9998.

18

Touch the [Register] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the individual sender reception box list screen.

19

Touch the [RETURN] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the PC-FAX reception settings screen.

20

Touch the [OK] key, then touch the [RETURN] key on the LCD screen.
The display returns to the [Fax initial settings menu] screen.

300

III Fax Chapter 10 Receiving Faxes

IV Scanner
This volume explains operating methods for scanning with the copier.

Chapter 11 Summary of Scanner


Functions ......................... 302
Chapter 12Using the Scanner
Functions ........................ 307
Chapter 13 When There Is Trouble with
the Scanner ...................... 373

301

IV Scanner

IV Scanner

Chapter 11 Summary of Scanner Functions

Data scanned with the copier can be imported into the computer, sent over the Internet as
email attached files, and uploaded to file servers.
This chapter summarizes the scanner functions.

11-1. Scanner functions...........................................................................303


11-2. Scan data output .............................................................................304

302

11-1. Scanner functions


Data scanned from the copier RADF or platen glass is sent to the copier E-RDH memory and stored on the
print controller's hard disk as TIFF or PDF format files.
Data stored on the hard disk can be imported into the computer via the Ethernet, sent over the Internet as
email attached files, and uploaded to file servers.

Scanning documents

Copier
E-RDH memory

Print controller
Hard disk

Ethernet (TCP/IP)

Internet
Importing data
Computer

Sending to
file server
Sending
with
email
SMTP server

FTP server

When documents are scanned, the [Quality], [Magnification ratio], [Resolution], [Continuous pages], [Erase
outside of document], etc. can be specified.
Scanned data can be selected and saved or sent to three destinations, [Scan to box], [Scan to E-mail], and
[Scan to FTP].[Names need to be checked]

To use the scanner functions, the copier must have the optional hard disk. For details, ask your service
representative.
When using the scanner functions, connect with the computer via Ethernet. The scanner functions cannot be used from the parallel port.
It is necessary that the network cards in the computer and this printing system have appropriate IP
addresses assigned and that the TCP/IP network is enabled. For more details on the network settings,
ask the network administrator.

303

IV Scanner Chapter 11 Summary of Scanner Functions

11-2. Scan data output


Scanned data can be selected and saved or sent from three destinations, [Scan to box], [Scan to E-mail], and
[Scan to FTP].
This section explains these three types of destinations.

Storing to a box (Scan to box)


The scanned data is stored on the hard disk in the print controller. This hard disk has [Boxes] that serve the
role of folders. Scanned data is managed with the numbers for these boxes.
When scanning a document, specify a four-digit [Box number].
Hard disk

Box 0124
Document No.

Document

Box 5432
Document No.

Copier main unit

TWAIN-compliant applications
Network scanner driver

E-RDH

Print controller
Ethernet

HUB

TCP/IP (FTP)
Network controller

Scanned data stored in one of these boxes can be imported by a TWAIN-compliant Windows application,
edited and saved. Data stored in these boxes can also be deleted by a computer on the network.
For more information, refer to [12-1. Selecting the destination] (
Page 308).

304

IV Scanner Chapter 11 Summary of Scanner Functions

11-2. Scan data output

Sending with email (Scan to E-mail)


Scan data can be sent the specified email address. Input the address and name on the copier's LCD screen
and send as an email attached file.
For more information, refer to [12-1. Selecting the destination] (
Page 308).

Document
Copier main unit
Email and Scan data

E-RDH

Printer
Controller

Transfer to
destination
server

SMTP server

Email
destination
POP server

Internet

305

IV Scanner Chapter 11 Summary of Scanner Functions

11-2. Scan data output

Sending to FTP server (Scan to FTP)


Scan data can be uploaded to the specified FTP server. Input the FTP server address, login password, etc.
on the copier's LCD screen.
For more information, refer to [12-1. Selecting the destination] (
Page 308).

Document
Copier main unit
Scan data

E-RDH

Printer
Controller

Download
FTP server
Internet

306

IV Scanner Chapter 11 Summary of Scanner Functions

IV Scanner

Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

This chapter explains how to use the scanner functions.

12-1. Selecting the destination................................................................308


12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations .................................330
12-3. Inputting text ...................................................................................342
12-4. Setting scanner functions ..............................................................343
12-5. Scanning documents ......................................................................344
12-6. Importing scanned data into a computer......................................362
12-7. Using the network scanner driver .................................................363

307

12-1. Selecting the destination


Select the destination for scanned data as [Box], [E-Mail], or [FTP].
Operate from [Transmission method selection] screen.

Press the

button on the control panel.

The [Printer mode basic] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the [SCANNER] key on the LCD screen.

The [Transmission method selection] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

308

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination


For subsequent operations, refer to the following.
Storing to a box

Page 310

It is not possible to select multiple boxes at the same time.

Sending with email

Page 317

Up to five destinations can be input manually.


When selecting destinations from those already registered, up to 200 can be selected.
When specifying from input manually and selecting from those already registered, up to 205 can be sent
at the same time.

Sending to FTP server

Page 325

It is not possible to select multiple destinations at the same time.

[Box], [E-Mail], and [FTP] can be set at the same time.

309

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Storing to a box (Scan to box)


The scanned data is stored into a box on the print controllers hard disk.
The scan data is managed with boxes numbered 0001-9999.
There are three methods for specifying the storage location: The method specifying only the box number, the
method inputting the storage location manually, and selecting from an already-registered box.
Specifying the box number

Page 310

Inputting the storage location manually

Page 312

Selecting the storage location from pre-registered boxes

Page 315

It is not possible to select multiple boxes at the same time.

Specifying the box number

Touch the [Mail Box] key on [Transmission method selection] screen on the LCD screen.

[Mail Box] is displayed inverted. The [Box select] screen is displayed.

310

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Input a box number from 0001 to 9998 with the number keys on the control panel.

The box number input as the [Box No.] on the [Box select] screen is displayed.
z If you input the wrong box number, press the

(Stop/Clear) button on the copier to erase the input number.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

The [Scanner setting basic] screen is displayed.


For more information, refer to [12-4. Setting scanner functions] (

311

Page 343).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Inputting the storage location manually

Touch the [Mail Box] key on [Transmission method selection] screen on the LCD screen.

[Mail Box] is displayed inverted. The [Box select] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Scan Scrn] key on the LCD screen.

The [Box input] screen is displayed.

312

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Input a box number from 0001 to 9998 with the number keys on the copier.

z If you input the wrong box number, touch the [Box No.] key or
the input number.

(Stop/Clear) button on the control panel to erase

Touch the [Name] key on the LCD screen.


The [Registration name input] screen is displayed.

Touch the character keys on the LCD screen to input the registration name.

z The [Registration name] may be up to 10 characters.


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text]. (

313

Page 342)

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Box input] screen.
z If you touch the [A-] - [No. etc] key on the LCD screen, set the registration group, then touch the [ENTRY] key on the
LCD screen, the [Box No.], [Registration number], and [Character to Search] are registered.
For details on registering a storage location, refer to [12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations]
(
Page 330).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Box select] screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Scanner setting basic] screen is displayed.

For more information, refer to [12-4. Setting scanner functions] (

314

Page 343).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Selecting the storage location from pre-registered boxes


z For details on registering a storage location, refer to [12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations]
(
Page 330).

Touch the [Mail Box] on [Transmission method selection] screen on the LCD screen.
[Mail Box] is displayed inverted. The [Box select] screen is displayed.

Select the group registered from [A-] - [No. etc] on the LCD screen.

The registration is displayed registered in the selected group.

Select the storage location number from the box number list.
Touch the [] or [] key on the LCD screen to switch the screen.

The selected box number is displayed inverted.

315

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

The [Scanner setting basic] screen is displayed.


For more information, refer to [12-4. Setting scanner functions] (

316

Page 343).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Sending with email (Scan to E-mail)


The scan data is sent to the specified email address. Input the address and name on the copier's LCD screen
and send as an email attached file.
Multiple destinations can be selected.
There are two methods for inputting the destination: Inputting manually and selecting from the destinations
already registered.
Inputting the destination manually (

Page 317)

Selecting the destination from the destinations already registered (

Page 323)

Up to five destinations can be input manually.


When selecting destinations from those already registered, up to 200 can be selected.
When specifying from input manually and selecting from those already registered, up to 205 can be sent
at the same time.

Inputting the destination manually

Touch the [E-Mail] key on [Transmission method selection] screen on the LCD screen.
[E-Mail] is displayed inverted. The [Email select] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Scan Scrn] key on the LCD screen.

The [Email registration/edit] screen is displayed.

317

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Input the registration number from 000 to 199 with the number keys on the copier.

z If you input the wrong box number, touch the [No.] key on the LCD screen on the control panel to erase the input
number.

Touch the [E-Mail] key on the LCD screen.


The [Email address input] screen is displayed.

Touch the character keys on the LCD screen to input the email address.

z Up to 60 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Email address].


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (
Page 342).

318

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Email registration/edit] screen.

Touch the [Name] key on the LCD screen.

The [Registration name input] screen is displayed.

Touch the character keys on the LCD screen to input the registration name.

z The [Registration name] may be up to 10 characters.


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (

Page 342).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [E-mail input] screen.
z If you touch the [A-] - [No. etc] key on the LCD screen, set the registration group, then touch the [ENTRY] key on the
LCD screen, the [Box No.], [Name], and [Character to Search] are registered.
For details on registering a storage location, refer to [12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations]
(

Page 330).

319

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

10

Touch the [Subject/Body] key on the LCD screen.

The [Subject/body input] screen is displayed.

11

Touch the [Subject] key on the LCD screen.

The [Subject input] screen is displayed.

12

Touch the character keys on the LCD screen to input the subject.

z Up to 45 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Subject].


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (

Page 342).

z If you register a subject, the subject can be used from the [Subject list] screen.
For details on registering a subject, refer to [12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations] (

320

Page 330).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

13

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Subject/body input] screen.

14

Touch the [Body] key on the LCD screen.

The [Body input] screen is displayed.

15

Touch the character keys on the LCD screen to input the body.

z Up to 48 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Body].


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (
Page 342).
z If you register a body, the body can be used from the [Massage body] screen.
For details on registering the body, refer to [12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations](

16

Page 330).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Subject/body input] screen.

321

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

17

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

The display returns to the [Email input] screen.

18

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Email select] screen.
The [No.], [E-Mail], [Name], [Subject], [Body], and [Character to search] are added to the destination.
To continue adding destinations, return to Step 2 and add them.
z When you touch the [CANCEL] key on the LCD screen, the destination is not set and the display returns to the [Email
select] screen.
z For manual input, up to five destinations can be set.

19

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Scanner setting basic] screen is displayed.

For more information, refer to [12-4. Setting scanner functions] (

322

Page 343).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Selecting the destination from the destinations already registered


z For details on registering a box, refer to [12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations] (

Page 330).

Touch the [E-Mail] key on [Transmission method selection] screen on the LCD screen.
[E-Mail] is displayed inverted. The [Email select] screen is displayed.

Select the group registered from [A-] - [No. etc] on the LCD screen.

The registration is displayed registered in the selected group.

Select the destination from the destination list.


Touch the [] or [] key on the LCD screen to switch the screen.

The selected destination is displayed inverted.


z Up to 200 destinations can be selected at the same time.

323

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

The [Scanner setting basic] screen is displayed.


For more information, refer to [12-4. Setting scanner functions](

324

Page 343).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Sending to FTP server (Scan to FTP)


Scan data can be uploaded to the specified FTP server. Input the FTP server address, login password, etc.
on the copier's LCD screen.
There are two methods for inputting the destination: Inputting manually and selecting from the destinations
already registered.
Inputting the destination manually (

Page 325)

Selecting the destination from the destinations already registered (

Page 329)

It is not possible to select multiple destinations at the same time.

Inputting the destination manually


This inputs the information for the destination FTP server manually.

Touch the [FTP] key on [Transmission method selection] screen on the LCD screen.

[FTP] is displayed inverted. The [FTP select] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Scan Scrn] key on the LCD screen.

The [FTP registration/edit] screen is displayed.

325

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Touch the [Name] key on the LCD screen and specify the name of the profile for the FTP
server to send to.
This inputs the destination name displayed in the destination list.

z The [Name] may be up to 10 characters.


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (

Page 342).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

Touch the [Host address] key on the LCD screen, then input the address of the FTP server
to send the data to or the URL.
z Up to 63 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Host address].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

Touch the [File path] key on the LCD screen and input the FTP server file storage location.
z Up to 96 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [File path].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

Touch the [Login] key on the LCD screen and input the account necessary for logging on to
the FTP server.
z Up to 47 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Login].
z Touch the [Anonymous] key for logging onto an FTP server that does not require an account.

10

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

326

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

11

Touch the [Password] key on the LCD screen and input the Password necessary for logging on to the FTP server.

When [Anonymous] is selected for the [Login], input the senders email address as the [Password].
Password input cannot be omitted.

z Up to 31 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Password].


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (

12

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

13

Touch the [Port No.] key on the LCD screen.


This specifies the port No. used by the FTP server.
There is normally no need to change this.

Page 342).

The [Port No. input] screen is displayed.

14

Input the User ID with [0] - [9] on the LCD screen.

327

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Changing the port number inappropriately can create obstructions on the network. Do not change the
port number without instructions from the network administrator.

z The [Port No.] may be up to five characters.

15

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

16

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP select] screen.
z If you touch the [A-] - [No. etc] key on the LCD screen, set the registration group, then touch the [ENTRY] key on the
LCD screen, the [Name], [Host address], [File path], [Login], [Password], [Character to Search], and [Port No.] are
registered.
For details on registering a storage location, refer to [12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations]
(
Page 330).
z When you touch the [CANCEL] key on the LCD screen, the destination FTP server information is not set and the display returns to the [FTP select] screen.

17

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Scanner setting basic] screen is displayed.

For more information, refer to [12-4. Setting scanner functions](

328

Page 343).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-1. Selecting the destination

Selecting the destination from the destinations already registered


z For details on registering destination, refer to [12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations] (

Page 330)

Touch the [FTP] key on [Transmission method selection] screen on the LCD screen.
[FTP] is displayed inverted. The [FTP select] screen is displayed.

Select the group registered from [A-] - [No. etc] on the LCD screen.

The registration is displayed registered in the selected group.

Select the destination from the destination list.


Touch the [] or [] key on the LCD screen to switch the screen.

The selected destination is displayed inverted.

It is not possible to select multiple destinations at the same time.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Scanner setting basic] screen is displayed.

For more information, refer to [12-4. Setting scanner functions](

329

Page 343).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations


Registering destinations for scanned data

Operate from [Transmission method selection] screen.


z For details, refer to [12-1. Selecting the destination] (

Page 308).

Touch the [ENTRY] key on the LCD screen.

The [Registration/edit menu] screen is displayed.

Select the registration item.

[E-Mail Register]
Registering a new email destination.

The [E-Mail registration/edit] screen is displayed. (

Page 331)

[E-Mail address list select item]


The registered email destinations are displayed in a list for editing and deleting.

The [E-Mail list] screen is displayed. (

Page 333)

[E-Mail Subject list]


Registering a new email subject.

The [Subject list] screen is displayed. (

Page 334)

330

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations


[E-Mail Body list]
Registering a new email body.

The [Massage Body list] screen displayed. (

Page 335)

[Box No. Register]


Registering a new storage location.

The [Box input] screen is displayed. (

Page 336)

[Box Number list select item]


The boxes registered for storage are displayed in a list for editing and deleting.

The [Box list] screen is displayed. (

Page 337)

[FTP Regi.]
Registering a new FTP destination server.

The [FTP registration/edit] screen is displayed. (

Page 338)

[FTP list]
The registered FTP destinations are displayed in a list for editing and deleting.

The [FTP list] screen is displayed. (

Page 341)

E-Mail registration/edit screen

Input the registration number from 000 to 199 with the copiers number keys.
z If you input the wrong number, touch the [No.] key on the LCD screen to erase the input number.

Touch the [E-Mail] key on the LCD screen.


The [E-Mail address input] screen is displayed.

331

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations

Touch the character keys on the LCD screen to input the address.

z Up to 60 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Email address].


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (

Page 342).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Email registration/edit] screen.

Touch the [Name] key on the LCD screen.


The [Name input] screen is displayed.

Touch the character keys on the LCD screen to input the registration name.

z The [Name] may be up to 10 characters.


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (

Page 342).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [E-Mail registration/edit] screen.

Select [A-] - [No. etc] on the LCD screen to set the registration group.
When you register a group, it is displayed in the groups registered with the [E-Mail select] screen.
The selected group is displayed in the [Character to search] column.

332

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations

Touch the [ENTRY] key on the LCD screen.

The [No.], [Name], [E-Mail], and [Character to Search] are registered.


To continue registering, repeat Steps 1-9.
z If the [No.], [E-Mail], [Name] or [Character to Search] is not input, [ENTRY] is not enabled.

10

Touch the [BACK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Registration/edit menu] screen is displayed.

E-Mail list screen

Touch the [], [] and [

], [

] keys on the LCD screen and select the address.

The selected address is displayed inverted.


z The address is selected with [] [].
z Switch the page with

][

].

Touch [EDIT] or [ERASE] key on the LCD screen.


When you touch the [EDIT] key, the [E-Mail registration/edit] screen is displayed. When [ERASE]
is touched, the selected address is deleted.

Touch the [BACK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Registration/edit menu] screen is displayed.

333

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations

E-Mail subject list screen


z Up to 10 email subjects can be registered.
z The subject registered by the administrator is displayed as 11th. For details on registering the administrator subject,
refer to [18-9. Email setup] (
Page 531).

Touch the [], [] key on the LCD screen and select the subject.

The selected subject is displayed inverted.

Touch the [EDIT] or [ERASE] key on the LCD screen.


When you touch the [EDIT] key, the [Subject input] screen is displayed. When the [ERASE] key
is touched, the selected subject is deleted.

Touch the character keys on the LCD screen to input the subject.

z Up to 45 alphanumerics and symbols may be input for the [Subject].


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Subject list] screen.

Touch the [BACK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Registration/edit menu] screen is displayed.

334

Page 342).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations

Email message body list screen


z Two email bodys can be registered.
z The body registered by the administrator is displayed as 3rd. For details on registering the administrator body, refer
to [18-9. Email setup](
Page 533).

Touch the [], [] key on the LCD screen and select the body.

The selected body is displayed inverted.

Touch the [EDIT] or [ERASE] key on the LCD screen.


When you touch the [EDIT] key, the [Body input] screen is displayed. When [ERASE] is
touched, the selected body is deleted.

Touch the character keys on the LCD screen to input the body.

z Up to 48 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Body].


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Message body list] screen.

Touch the [BACK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Registration/edit menu] screen is displayed.

335

Page 342).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations

Box input screen

Input the box number from 0001 to 9998 with the copiers number keys.
If you input the wrong number, touch the [Box No.] key on the LCD screen on the copier to erase
the input number.

Touch the [Name] key on the LCD screen.


The [Name input] screen is displayed.

Touch the character keys on the LCD screen to input the name.

z The [Name] may be up to 10 characters.


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (

Page 342).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Box input] screen.

Select [A-] - [No. etc] on the LCD screen to set the registration group.
When you register a group, it is displayed in the groups registered with the [Box select] screen.
The selected group is displayed in the [Character to Search] column.

336

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations

Touch the [ENTRY] key on the LCD screen.

The [Box No.], [Name], and [Character to search] are registered.


To continue registering, repeat Steps 1-7.
z If the [Box No.], [Name], or [Character to search] is not input, [ENTRY] is not enabled.

Touch the [BACK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Registration/edit menu] screen is displayed.

Box list screen

Touch the [], [] and [

], [

] key on the LCD screen and select the box number.

The selected box number is displayed inverted.


z The box number is selected with [] [].
z Switch the page with

][

].

Touch the [EDIT] or [ERASE] key on the LCD screen.


When you touch the [EDIT] key, the [Box input] screen is displayed. When the [ERASE] key is
touched, the selected box is deleted.

Touch the [BACK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Registration/edit menu] screen is displayed.

337

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations

FTP registration/edit screen

Touch the [Name] key on the LCD screen and specify the name of the profile for the FTP
server to send to.
This inputs the destination name displayed in the destination list.
z The [Name] may be up to 10 characters.
For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (

Page 342).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

Touch the [Host address] key on the LCD screen, then input the IP address of the FTP server to
send the data to or the URL.
z Up to 63 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Host address].
For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (
Page 342).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

Touch the [File path] key on the LCD screen and input the FTP server file storage location.
z Up to 96 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [File path].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

338

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations

Touch the [Login] key on the LCD screen and input the account necessary for logging on to
the FTP server.
z Up to 47 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Login].
z Touch the [Anonymous] key for logging onto an FTP server that does not require an account.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

Touch the [Password] key on the LCD screen and input the password necessary for logging
on to the FTP server.

When [Anonymous] is selected for the [Login], input the senders address as the [Password]. Password
input cannot be omitted.

z Up to 31 alphanumerics and symbols can be input as the [Password].

10

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

11

Touch the [Port No.] key on the LCD screen.


This specifies the port No. used by the FTP server.
There is normally no need to change this.
The [Port No. input] screen is displayed.

12

Input the port number with the [0] - [9] key on the LCD screen.

Changing the port number inappropriately can create obstructions on the network. Do not change the
port number without instructions from the network administrator.

339

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations


z The [Port No.] may be up to five characters.

13

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP registration/edit] screen.

14

Touch the [A-] - [No. etc] key on the LCD screen to set the registration group.
When you register a group, it is displayed in the groups registered with the [FTP select] screen.
The selected group is displayed in the [Character to Search] column.

15

Touch the [ENTRY] key on the LCD screen.

The [Name], [Host address], [File path], [Login], [Password], [Character to search], and [Port
No.] are registered.
To continue registering, repeat Steps 1-10.
z If the [Host address], [File path], [Login], [Password], or [Character to Search] is not input, [ENTRY] is not enabled.

16

Touch the [BACK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Registration/edit menu] screen is displayed.

340

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-2. Registering storage locations/destinations

FTP list screen

Touch the [], [] and [

], [

] key on the LCD screen and select the FTP profile name.

The selected profile name is displayed inverted.


z The profile name is selected with [] [].
z Switch the page with

][

].

Touch the [EDIT] or [ERASE] key on the LCD screen.


When you touch the [EDIT] key, the [FTP registration/edit] screen is displayed. When [ERASE]
is touched, the selected FTP profile name is deleted.

Touch the [BACK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Registration/edit menu] screen is displayed.

341

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-3. Inputting text


This explains the operation method for the text input screen displayed when inputting a registration name and
email address.

Inputting text

Touch the [
screen.

] or [

] key on the LCD screen to switch to the input character type

Uppercase letter input screen

Number and symbol input screen.

Lowercase letter input screen

Special letter input screen.

Input characters.
z When you touch the [DEL.] key on the LCD screen, the input characters are deleted one at a time.

342

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-4. Setting scanner functions


This section explains the basic functions required for scanning documents with the copier.
The settings are made with the [Scanner setting basic] screen on the LCD screen.

Scanning mode usage


When scanning a document, you can select the Real mode which sends the scan data to the print controller
immediately after one scan operation or the Memory mode which stores the scan data from multiple scans
into the copiers memory, then sends it all in one batch.
When scanning documents using the RADF, use the Real mode when scanning a book or other multi-page
document on the platen glass, use the Memory mode.
For details, refer to [12-5. Scanning documents](
Page 344).

343

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents


This explains the scanning procedure.
Operate from the [Scanner setting basic] screen on the LCD screen.

Before scanning, set the destination for the scan data.


Page 308).
z For details, refer to [12-1. Selecting the destination] (
z When changing the destination, touch the [Scan Screen] key on the LCD screen, then select the destination you want
from [Mail Box], [E-Mail] and [FTP].

Touch the [File name] key on the LCD screen.

The [Filename input] screen is displayed.

Input the filename for the scan data.

z Up to 26 alphanumerics can be input for the file name.


For details on character input, refer to [12-3. Inputting text] (
Page 342).
z The filename extension [.tif] or [.pdf] is added automatically to the filename.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Scanner setting basic] screen.

344

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

Select the [Text/Photo Enhance] setting appropriate to the contents of the document.
You can select from the following four settings.
Increase contrast
This applies contrast to documents written lightly and provides sharp images.

Photo
This improves the expression of tones and provides an image that is nearly that of halftone documents.

Text
The applies contrast to text for quality.

Text/photo
This discriminates automatically between text and photographs and reproduces the quality of the document
accurately.

Select either [TIFF] or [PDF] as the file format for the scan data.
z When only [Scan to box] is displayed [PDF] is not displayed.

7
8

Select either [Two-sided] or [One-sided] for the document to be scanned with the
[SCAN MODE] on the LCD screen.
Touch the [Quality] key on the LCD screen.
The [Quality setting] screen is displayed.

345

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

Select the scanning resolution from [600dpi], [400dpi], [300dpi] and [200dpi] on the
LCD screen.

Below are the approximate number of pages of A4-size documents that can be scanned with the copier standard memory (32 MB).
Resolution

Document

Data volume

Number of pages that


can be scanned

Text only

Approx.
70 KB

Approx. 450 pages

With images

Approx.
130 KB

Approx. 220 pages

Text only

Approx.
120 KB

Approx. 230 pages

With images

Approx.
210 KB

Approx. 150 pages

Text only

Approx.
200 KB

Approx. 160 pages

With images

Approx.
480 KB

Approx. 65 pages

Text only

Approx.
430 KB

Approx. 70 pages

With images

Approx.
1.43 MB

Approx. 20 pages

200dpi

300dpi

400dpi

600dpi

z If the volume of the scanned data exceeds the capacity of the E-RDH memory, the job will be registered as an error.

10

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Scanner setting basic] screen.

11

Touch the [Density] key on the LCD screen.


The [Scanning density setting] screen is displayed.

346

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

12

Select the scanning density from

to

on the LCD screen.

z When setting the density automatically, touch the [AE] key.

13

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Scanner setting basic] screen.

14

Touch the [LENS MODE] key on the LCD screen.


The [Magnification ratio setting] screen is displayed.

15

The scanning magnification ratio is selected with the magnification ratio keys or []
or [] on the LCD screen.

(For U.S. and Canada market area)


The magnification ratios that can be selected are as follows.
Fixed magnification ratios
A4-A3, A5-A4
A4-B4
B4-A3
A4-B5
B4-A4
A3-A4, A4-A5

PRESET1
PRESET2
PRESET3
PRESET4
PRESET5
PRESET6

347

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents


Zoom
Touch the

key on the LCD screen, then specify the zoom ratio with [] []or the copiers number keys.

Independent X and Y magnification ratios


Touch the

or

key on the LCD screen, then specify the zoom ratio with [] [] or the copiers num-

ber keys.

(For U.S. and Canada market area)


Same size (1.00)
Touch the [1.00] key on the LCD screen.

16

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Scanner setting basic] screen.

17

Touch the [SIZE] key on the LCD screen.


The [Document scan size setting] screen is displayed.

348

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

18

Select the size of the document to scan with the scan size keys or [AUTO] key on the
LCD screen.
When you select the [AUTO] key, the scan size is automatically recognized by the copier.

(For US and Canada market area)


The scan sizes that can be selected are as follows.
A3

11x17

A4R

81/2x14

A4
A5

81/2x11R
81/2x11

81/2x11R

51/2x81/2R

81/2x11
F4
B4
B5R
B5

51/2x81/2
A4R
A4
F4

When scanning using the RADF, the scan size cannot be selected.

19

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Scanner setting basic] screen.
z For detailed settings, refer to [ Application function settings] (
Page 352).
z After setting the application functions, always return the LCD screen to the [Scanner setting basic] screen.

20

Set the document on the copier RADF or the platen glass.


When scanning in real mode, proceed to Step 22.

349

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

21

When scanning in memory mode, touch the [SCAN] key on the LCD screen.

Memory mode is set and the document is scanned.


From now on, when you touch the [SCAN] key, the document is scanned.
When scanning of all the documents is complete, proceed to Step 22.

22

Press the

(Start) button on the control panel.

Real mode
All the documents on the RADF are scanned.
When scanning of all the documents is complete, the scan data is uploaded to the print controller
from the copiers E-RDH memory.
Memory mode
Memory mode is ended and the scan data is uploaded from the copiers E-RDH memory to the
print controller.
z The direction of the image in the data imported in with an application depends on the direction in which the document
is set on the copier.
z The document sizes that can be scanned and document setting method are the same as for copy mode. For details,
refer to the user's manual for the copier you are using. For details, refer to the operations manual for the copier you
are using.

350

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents


When [Scan to box] is set as the destination :
Scan data stored on the hard disk in the print controller is imported into the computer.
For more information, refer to [12-6. Importing scanned data into a computer] (

Page 362).

When the destination is set to [Scan to E-mail] or [Scan to ftp] :


Scan data stored on the print controller's hard disk is transferred to the set destinations.

When [Controller settings] [Scan Data Auto Del.] is set with the copiers LCD screen, the scan data
stored on the print controllers hard disk is automatically deleted after the specified interval. (The default
value is 24 hours.) If you wish to retain it longer, set [Scan Data Auto Del.] to [Off].
When the free space in the print controller's hard disk falls below 3 %, even if the document is scanned,
it cannot be stored to the hard disk.

351

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

Application function settings


This section explains settings for making the scanner functions more convenient.
These settings are made with the [Scanner setting basic] screen on the LCD screen.

Press the

(Application function) button on the control panel.

The [Application function setting] screen is displayed.

352

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

Scanning dividing a spread open document into two pages (Dual page)
The bound document is scanned consecutively according to the binding direction.

[Dual Page] cannot be selected when the [Special Original], [Flip Side 2], or [Reverse Image] function is
set.

From the [Select Application Function] screen on the LCD screen, touch the [Dual Page] key.
The [Dual page settings] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Output LtoR] or [Output RtoL] key on the LCD screen according to the document binding directory.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Select Application Function] screen.

353

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

Reading in documents of different sizes (Mixed original)


This is set when scanning multi-page documents of different sizes using the RADF.

[Mixed Original] cannot be selected when [Non Image Area Erase] is set.

From the [Select Application Function] screen on the LCD screen, touch the [Special Original] key.
The [Original type settings] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Mixed Original] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Select Application Function] screen.

354

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

Reading in folded documents (Folded orignal)


This is set when a document with a fold is set on the RADF and the document fold is so far up and cannot be scanned in at all.

[Folded Orignal] cannot be selected when [Non Image Area Erase] is set.

From the [Select Application Function] screen on the LCD screen, touch the [Special Original]
key.
The [Original type setting] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Folded Original] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Select Application Function] screen.

Memory mode settings (Memory)


When scanning multiple documents, the scanner is set to store the scan data for multiple pages in
copiers E-RDH memory then send all the data at once. This is called [Memory mode].

From the [Select Application Function] screen on the LCD screen, touch the [MEMORY]
key.
[Memory mode] is set.

355

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

Reading in by selecting binding position (Flip side 2)


When scanning duplex documents top/bottom binded or lett/right binded, this setting lines up the tops
and bottoms correctly.

[Flip Side 2] cannot be selected when the [Folded Orignal] or [Non Image Area Erase] function is set.

Touch the [Flip Side 2] key on [Select Application Function] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [Top/Bottom bind] or [Left/Right bind] key on the LCD screen according to the
document binding directory.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Select Application Function] screen.

356

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

Reading in with black and white reversed (Reverse image)


This scans reversing the white sections of the document into black and the black sections of the document into white.

[Reverse Image] cannot be selected when [Non Image Area Erase] is set.

Touch the [Reverse Image] key on [Select Application Function] screen on the LCD screen.
[Reverse image] is selected.
z When you touch the [CANCEL] key on the LCD screen, the setting is not finalized and the display returns to the
[Scanner setting basic] screen.

Erasing document frames and folds (Frame/Fold Erasure)


This erases the shadows from the book binding section and the document surroundings.

[Frame/Fold Erasure] cannot be selected when the [Dual Page] function is set.

Touch the [Frame/Fold Erasure] key on [Select Application Function] screen on the LCD
screen.
The [Frame/Fold Erasure] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Frame Erasure] key on the LCD screen.

[Frame Erasure] is displayed inverted.

Specify the length for frame erasure with the [] or [] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [Fold Erasure] key on the LCD screen.


[Fold Erasure] is displayed inverted.

357

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

Specify the length for fold erasure with the [] or [] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Select Application Function] screen.

Not scanning outside the document (Non Image Area Erase)


This function detects the size of the document set on the platen glass and does not scan the sections
outside this size.

[Non Image Area Erase] cannot be selected when the [Special Original], [Flip Side 2], or [Reverse
Image] function is set.

Touch the [Non Image Area Erase] key on [Select Application Function] screen on the LCD
screen.
[Non Image Area Erase] is set.

Rotating the scanned image 90 degrees (Rotation ON/Rotation OFF)


When [Rotate ON] is set with the printer key operator mode scan image rotation default, [Rotation OFF]
is displayed. If [Rotation OFF] is set, [Rotation ON] is displayed.

Touch the [Rotation ON] or [Rotation OFF] key on [Select Application Function] screen on
the LCD screen.

[Rotation ON] or [Rotation OFF] is displayed inverted.


z For details on the key operator operation, refer to [Scan image rotation] (

358

Page 441).

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

Checking settings
This checks a list of the set functions.

With the [Scanner setting basic] screen displayed, press the


control panel.

(check) button on the

The [Settings check mode] screen is displayed.

Touch the [Setting conf] key on the LCD screen.

The [Settings confirmation] screen is displayed.

359

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

When the item you want to check is not displayed, switch the display with [

] or [

] on the LCD

screen.

When the check is complete, touch the [EXIT] key on the LCD screen.
The display returns to the [Settings check mode] screen.

Select the destinations from [Confirm E-Mail], [Confirm Box No.] or [Confirm FTP].
The [Address check] screen is displayed.

Check the destination.

z To delete a destination, select the destination to delete, then touch the [DELETE] key on the LCD screen.

360

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-5. Scanning documents

When the check is complete, touch the [BACK] key on the LCD screen.
The display returns to the [Settings check mode] screen.

Touch the [BACK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Scanner setting basic] screen.

361

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-6. Importing scanned data into a computer


When importing scan data stored in the print controllers box into the computer, use the [Konica network
scanner driver] and application software supporting the TWAIN scanner driver.

If [PDF] is selected as the file format, the scan data cannnot be imported using [Konica network scanner
driver]. For the details about the way of importing PDF format data, ask your service representative.

362

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-7. Using the network scanner driver


To use the [Konica Network Scanner Driver], first install it on the computer.

Check the computer to use.


The network scanner driver can be installed on the following operating systems.
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP

Installing the network scanner driver


Have the [User software CD] CD-ROM on hand.

Turn on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Exit any applications that are running.

2
3

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.


From [My Computer] on the desktop, double-click the icon for the drive in which the
user software CD has been loaded.

363

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-7. Using the network scanner driver

Open the [\English\Scanner] folder on the user software CD, then double-click
[Setup.exe].

The [Select Language] screen is displayed.

Select your language, then click the [OK] button.

The [Welcome] screen is displayed.

Check the contents, then click the [Next ] button.

The [Start Installation] screen is displayed.

364

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-7. Using the network scanner driver

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Installing] screen is displayed and the necessary files are copied.

When the copying ends, the [Installation complete] screen is displayed.

Click the [Finish ] button.

This completes the installation of the network scanner driver.

365

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-7. Using the network scanner driver

Connecting the computer and the hard disk


The scan data stored on the print controller box is imported into the computer using the application software
supporting the TWAIN scanner driver.
There is a variety of application software that supports TWAIN scanner drivers. Here we use Adobe Acrobat
4.0. When using other application software, refer to the users manual for that software.
This section explains the procedure for connecting the computer and the copiers hard disk using Adobe
Acrobat 4.0.

Run [Adobe Acrobat 4.0].

Select [File] - [Import] - [Scan].

The [Adobe Acrobat Scan] screen is displayed.

4
5
6

In [Device], select [Konica Network Scanner Driver].

In [Format], when importing the scan data one page at a time, select [Single sided];
when importing a spread-open document, select [Double sided].
In the [Destination], when importing scan data and inserting it into the currently open
file, select [Current Document]; when importing the scan data as a new file, select
[New document].
Click the [Scan] button.

366

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-7. Using the network scanner driver

Input the [Scanner server name (IP address)] and [Scanner name] for the scanner on
which the scan data is stored.

The DNS name or NetBIOS name cannot be used as the scanner server name.

Input the [Box No.] for the box in which the scan data to be imported in is stored.

Click the [OK] button.


The [Scanner Selection] screen is displayed.

10

Click the [Connect] button.

The [Konica Network Scanner Driver] main screen is displayed.

367

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-7. Using the network scanner driver

Importing scan data into the computer


The scan data stored on the print controller box is imported to the computer using the application software
supporting the TWAIN scanner driver.

If [PDF] is selected as the file format, the scan data cannnot be imported using [Konica network scanner
driver]. For the details about the way of importing PDF format data, ask your service representative.

From the list on the [Konica Network Scanner Driver] main screen, select the scan data
to import.

The selected scan data is displayed inverted.


z When changing the box number, click [Box No. Selection], then input the box number to change to with the [Scanner
box No. Set-up] screen.
z To delete scan data, select the scanned data, then click [Delete].
z When you click [Refresh], the newest box information is displayed.

Set the processing for the scan data importing.


z In the default settings, document data is deleted after it has been imported in.

To delete scan data from the hard disk

Click the [Option] button.


The [Variable Option] screen is displayed.

Check the [Delete after importing Scanner document] checkbox.

368

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-7. Using the network scanner driver

To leave the scan data in the hard disk

3
4

Click the [Option] button.


The [Variable Option] screen is displayed.

Uncheck the [Delete after importing Scanner document] checkbox.

To import scan data with the white sections and black sections of the document
reversed, check the [Use reverse display of Scanned document] checkbox.
To change the computer temporary storage location, click the [Folder Change] button.
The [Browse for Folder] screen is displayed.

To change the storage location, click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Variable Option] screen.

Documents are not scanned in normally if the drive specified with the [Temp forder set-up for scanner]
setting does not have enough free space. Specify a drive with adequate free space.

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Konica Network Scanner Driver] main screen.

369

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-7. Using the network scanner driver

When importing all the pages of the scan data, select [All pages]; when importing
specified pages only, select [Specify page].

z When operating application software that cannot handle multi-page files, [1] is displayed for the [Specify page].

Click the [Reading] button.


The scan data in the box is imported into the computer.

Scanner driver screen


This section explains the main screen for the network scanner driver.

Box No.
Currently selected box number
Scanner Name
Currently selected scanner
Document
Number assigned automatically during scanning
Date & Time
Date and time at which the document was scanned
Page
Total number of pages in the scan data

370

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-7. Using the network scanner driver


Size
Number of pixels vertical/horizontal for the first page of the scan data
Resolution
Scan data resolution
z You can reorder the contents of the display by clicking [Document], [Date & Time], [Page], [Size], or [Resolution].

[Reading] button
The selected scan data is read.
[Delete] button
The selected scan data is deleted.
[Refresh] button
The displayed contents are updated to the latest information.
[Option] button
The [Variable Option] screen is displayed.
[Close] button
The scanner driver ends.
[Help] button
Displays the scanner driver help.
[Box No. Selection] button
The [Scanner Box number. Set-up] screen is displayed.

The currently connected box number can be changed.


[Scanner Selection] button
The [Scanner Selection] screen is displayed.

[Add] button
The [Scanner box No. set-up] screen is displayed.

371

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

12-7. Using the network scanner driver


[Edit] button
The [Scanner Box No. Set-up] screen with the selected scanner information is displayed.
[Copy] button
A copy of the selected scan settings is prepared.
[Delete (D)] button
The selected scan data is deleted.
[Connect] button
The [Konica Network Scanner Driver] main screen is displayed.
[Close] button
The scanner driver ends.
[Help] button
Help is displayed.

372

IV Scanner Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions

IV Scanner

Chapter 13 When There Is Trouble with the


Scanner

This chapter explains what to do if problems occur with scanner functions. If the methods in
this chapter do not solve the problem, please contact your service representative.

13-1. Cannot connect from computer to copier's hard disk.................374


13-2. Output error lists .............................................................................375

373

13-1. Cannot connect from computer to copier's


hard disk
If an error dialog is displayed when you connect to the copier's hard disk from the computer, check the
copier's IP address.
If you still cannot connect, contact the network administrator.

374

IV Scanner
Chapter 13 When There Is Trouble with the Scanner

13-2. Output error lists


If incomplete scan data is deleted from the print controller's hard disk, this can be checked with the [Scan
Error List] on the LCD screen.

z For details on the scanner error list, consult the network administrator.

Contents of display
For each destination, [Address], [Filename], and [Error message] are displayed.
Destination
Box

Address
Box No.

Filename

Error message

E-mail

E-mail address
for destination

Filename specified
during scanning

FTP

Error cause or
error code

Error cause or
error code

z For the address, only the first few characters are displayed.
z Up to 16 sets of data can be stored in the scanner error list. When there are more items than this, the oldest ones are
deleted.

375

IV Scanner
Chapter 13 When There Is Trouble with the Scanner

13-2. Output error lists


Error cause
The error causes and solutions are as follows.
Destination

Cause

Solution

Box

Deleted by automatic deletion


function

On the copier's LCD screen, set


[Controller settings] - [Scan Data Auto
Del.] - [Off].

E-mail with the data attached


is not sent to the destination.

Check if the email settings are correct. If the settings are correct, but the
data is not output, ask the network
administrator.

The data cannot be output to


the destination FTP server.
(Including login errors and
timeouts at the connection)

Check if the destination FTP server


settings are correct. If the settings are
correct, but the data is not output, ask
the network administrator.

E-mail

FTP

Errors when data is output with e-mail and after SMTP transmission has completed cannot be detected
on the controller side.
If an upload from the copier memory to the print controller's hard disk is interrupted, this is an error on
the copier side.

376

IV Scanner
Chapter 13 When There Is Trouble with the Scanner

V Control panel
This volume explains the settings
made by the printer administrator using
the control panel.

Chapter 14 Control Panel Names .... 378


Chapter 15 Printer Settings .............. 384
Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings... 431

377

V Control panel

V Control panel (For administrator)

Chapter 14 Control Panel Names

This chapter explains the names of the buttons on the copier's control panel and their functions, the contents of the LCD screen display, and the operations.

14-1. Control panel names.......................................................................379


14-2. LCD screen ......................................................................................381

378

14-1. Control panel names


The buttons on the copier's control panel and the key displayed on the LCD screen can be used to make settings for the printing system.
This section explains the names and functions of the buttons used for setting operations. For information on
buttons not explained here, refer to the copier's users manual.
[Check] button

LCD screen

[SCAN/PRINT] button

[Reset] button

[Stop/Clear] button

LCD screen
The LCD screen displays the print controller status, menus used for settings, selection items, and other
such information. To make settings, touch the necessary key displayed on the screen.

(SCAN/PRINT) button
This switches over to scanner/printer mode.

(Start) button
This resumes the paused print processing or starts scanning.

(Stop/Clear) button
This stops copy or print processing.

(Check) button
This displays the copier's settings check screen.

(Reset) button
This resets the copier settings to their defaults.

Data LED
This flashes green when the copier is receiving data.
This stays lit when data is accumulated in the copier.
Scanner/Printer LED
This lights up green for scanner/printer mode.

379

V Control panel Chapter 14 Control Panel Names

14-1. Control panel names


z The LED lights up red when a warning or error message is displayed.
In this case, check the error information on the LCD screen and solve the error. For information on how, refer to the
copier's users manual.
z If the LED lights up red during printing, print processing is interrupted. When the error is eliminated, printing resumes.

380

V Control panel Chapter 14 Control Panel Names

14-2. LCD screen


LCD screen operation methods
Select items by touching the appropriate key displayed on the LCD screen.
When you touch a key and open a setting screen, the selected key is displayed inverted.

Buttons common to all setting screens


When you touch [OK], the results of the operation are applied.
When you touch [CANCEL], the results of the operation are cancelled.
When you touch [PREV] or [NEXT], the screen display is switched.

Basic screen
With the copier started, if you press the
screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

button on the control panel, the [Printer mode basic]

381

V Control panel Chapter 14 Control Panel Names

14-2. LCD screen

Job list screen


When you touch the [JOB LIST] key on the [Printer mode basic] screen, the [Job List] screen is displayed on
the LCD screen and the status of the current print job or fax job can be checked.

Touch the [PRINT JOB] or [FAX JOB] key to switch to the print job or fax job status display.
If there are no scheduled jobs, the column is blank.
When you touch [Unsuccessful jobs], incomplete jobs can be checked.
This is displayed if a scan job or print job has not been output.
When the copier sub power is turned off, the contents are erased.

Status display contents


Job No.
The job number (1 to 999) is displayed.
Mode
This displays the job processing mode (copier/printer/scanner).
Status
This displays the status of each job.
Error:
An error occurred.
Outputting:
The data is being copied/printed/scanned.
No paper:
There is no paper in the tray (copy/print mode).
Stopped:
Stopped, interrupted, waiting jam processing (each mode).
Jam:
The paper jammed during copying/printing.
Scanning:
The document is being scanned.
Waiting output: The job has been scheduled and is waiting for copy/print/scan output.
Total Page(s)
This displays the number of output pages (1 to 999) set for the job.

382

V Control panel Chapter 14 Control Panel Names

14-2. LCD screen


Page(s) left
This displays the number of pages left to be output (1 to 9999).
Number of pages left to be output = Number of pages (per copy) x Number of copies set
z If the number of pages left to be output is greater than 9999, [9999] is displayed.

Minute(s) to go
This displays the time remaining until job completion in minutes (1 to 999).
z The displayed time is an approximation.The actual time may be somewhat longer or shorter than the time displayed.
z If the time remaining is greater than 999 minutes, [999] is displayed.
z If the time remaining is less than 1 minute, [<1] is displayed.

Changing job order

Touch the [

Touch the [ADVANCE] key on the LCD screen.


The selected job is displayed inverted and is moved to next after the job currently being output.

], [

] key on the LCD screen to select the job to be processed first.

Job deletion

Touch the [

Touch the [DELETE] key on the LCD screen.


The selected job is deleted from the copier's E-RDH memory.

], [

] key on the LCD screen to select the job to delete.

383

V Control panel Chapter 14 Control Panel Names

V Control panel (For administrator)

Chapter 15 Printer Settings

This chapter explains the contents of the settings that can be made with operations on the
copier's LCD screen.

15-1. Menu configuration .........................................................................385


15-2. Test print..........................................................................................390
15-3. Controller settings ..........................................................................398
15-4. Print default setting ........................................................................410
15-5. PCL setup ........................................................................................420
15-6. Scan error list ..................................................................................428
15-7. Format HD ........................................................................................430

384

15-1. Menu configuration


When making printer settings with operations from the copier, the [Main Menu] screen is displayed with the
following procedure.

Displaying the Main Menu screen

With the [Copy basic mode] screen displayed, press the


control panel.

button on the copier's

The [Printer basic mode] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the [SETTING] key on the LCD screen.

The [Main Menu] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

z For details on the network settings in [5. Network Setup], refer to [18-1. Method for setting network from control
panel] (
Page 452).

385

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-1. Menu configuration


The following settings can be made from the [Main Menu] screen.The setting items depend on whether or not
the PostScript option is installed. The items marked with * in the table are only displayed when the PostScript
option is installed.
The gray colored part in settings is a factory default.
Menu item
1 Test Print Manu

Setting item

Settings

1 PCL Demo Page

Page 390

2 PCL Font List

Page 391

3 PS Demo Page *

4 PS Font List *

2 Controller set

Reference
page

Page 392
Page 393

5 Config. Data

Page 394

6 NIC Config.

Page 396

1 Banner Page

1 On

Page 398

2 Off
1 Auto Tray

2 Banner Page Tray

Page 400

2 Tray1
3 Tray2
4 Tray3
5 Tray4
6 Bypass Tray
3 Spool

1 On

Page 402

2 Off
4 Job Time Out

1 5 sec

Page 404

2 10 sec
3 15 sec
4 20 sec
5 30 sec
6 60 sec
7 120 sec
8 180 sec
9 240 sec
10 300 sec
5 Scan Data Auto Del.

1 Off

Page 406

2 12 hour
3 24 hour
4 2 days
5 4 days
6 6 days
7 8 days
8 10 days
6 PDL Select *

1 Auto

Page 408

2 PCL
3 PostScript

386

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-1. Menu configuration


Menu item
3 Set Default

Setting item

Settings

1 Default Paper

1 A3R

1 A3R

2 A4

2 A4

3 A5R

3 A5R

4 B4R

4 B4R

5 B5

5 B5

6 B6R

6 F4R

7 F4R

7 11 x 17R

8 11 x 17R

8 8.5 x 14R

9 8.5 x 14R

9 8.5 x 11

10 8.5 x 11

Page 410

10 5.5 x 8.5R
(For U.S. and
Canada
market
area)

11 5.5 x 8.5R
12 8KR
13 16K
1 Off

2 Duplex

Reference
page

Page 412

2 Long Edge
3 Short Edge
3 Orientation

1 Portrait

Page 414

2 Landscape
4 Copies

5 Override Paper

Page 416

1 Off

Page 418

2 8.5 x 11 A4
3 A4 8.5 x 11
4 PCL Setup

1 Point Size

12.00

0.4 ~ 99.75

Page 421

2 Pitch

10.00

0.44 ~ 99.95

Page 422

3 Font Number

11

0 ~ 88

Page 423

4 Form Lines

60

5 ~ 128

Page 424

5 CR/LF Mapping

1 Off

Page 425

2 CR
3 LF
4 CR/LF
1 Auto Tray

6 Input Tray

Page 426

2 Tray1
3 Tray2
4 Tray3
5 Tray4
6 Bypass Tray
7 Symbol Set

387

Page 427

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-1. Menu configuration


Menu item
5 Network Setup

Setting item

Settings

1 Unit Info

ROM Version

Reference
page
Page 457

Serial Number
Ethernet Address
2 Update NIC

1 YES

Page 458

2 NO
3 Print on Start up

1 YES

Page 464

2 NO
4 TCP/IP Setup

5 NetWare Setup

388

1 Enable TCP/IP

Page 466

2 IP Address

Page 468

3 Subnet Mask

Page 470

4 Default Gateway

Page 472

5 Base Port Number

Page 474

6 Enable DHCP

Page 476

7 IP Addr. in NVRAM

Page 478

8 LPD Banner

Page 480

1 Enable NetWare

Page 483

2 Server Name

Page 485

3 Server Password

Page 487

4 File Server

Page 489

5 NDS Context

Page 491

6 NDS Tree

Page 493

7 Queue Scan Rate

Page 495

8 Frame Type

Page 497

9 Disable Bindery

Page 499

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-1. Menu configuration


Menu item
5 Network Setup

Setting item

Settings

6 AppleTalk Setup

7 WINS Setup

8 FTP Setup
9 Email Setup

10 DNS Setup

1 Enable AppleTalk

Page 502

2 Printer Name

Page 504

3 Zone Name

Page 506

1 NetBIOS Name

Page 509

2 Primary Server

Page 511

3 Secondary Server

Page 513

1 FTP Port Number

Page 516

2 FTP Timeout

Page 518

1 SMTP Server Name

Page 521

2 SMTP Port Number

Page 523

3 SMTP Timeout

Page 525

4 Max.Message Size

Page 527

5 From

Page 529

6 Subject

Page 531

7 Message Body

Page 533

1 DNS Server

Page 536

2 NIC Domain Name

Page 538

11 Admin Password

12 Factory Default

Reference
page

1 YES

Page 460
Page 540

2 NO
6 Scan Error List
7 Format HD

1 YES

2 NO

389

Page 428
Page 430

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-2. Test print


This can print samples of the fonts installed on the printer, a list of the printer default settings, etc.
On the [Printer menu] screen, select [Test Print Menu].

PCL Demo Page


This prints samples of fonts installed on the printer.

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).
z The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Test Print Menu] screen is displayed.

Touch the [1] key on the LCD screen.

z The [Test Print Menu] screen displays with [1] already pressed.

390

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-2. Test print

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Main Menu] screen and the PCL Demo Page is printed.
z For a printed sample, refer to [29-4. Function list] (

Page 688).

PCL Font List


This prints the list of fonts installed on the printer.

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).
z The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Test print] screen is displayed.

Touch the [2] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Main Menu] screen, and the PCL font list is printed.

391

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-2. Test print

PS Demo Page (only when PostScript option installed)


This prints a demo page for the Adobe PostScript.

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).
z The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Test Print Menu] screen is displayed.

Touch the [3] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Main Menu] screen and the PostScript demo page is printed.
z For a printed sample, refer to [PostScript font list] (

392

Page 712).

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-2. Test print

PS Font List (only when PostScript option installed)


This prints samples of the PostScript fonts installed on the printer.

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).
z The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Test Print Menu] screen is displayed.

Touch the [4] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Main Menu] screen and the PostScript font list is printed.
z For a printed sample, refer to [PostScript font list] (

393

Page 712).

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-2. Test print

Config.Data
This prints a list of print controller setting information.
The following information is printed on the setting information list.
Version Info
Current Settings (Resolution/Print Quality/Copy mode timeout/Default Paper size/Language)
Installed Paper (Manual/Tray 1/Tray 2/Tray 3/Tray 4)
Device Status (Total RAM installed/Hard disk free space)
Miscellaneous (Total print page count)

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).
z The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Test Print Menu] screen is displayed.

394

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-2. Test print

Touch the [3] key on the LCD screen. (When PostScript option is installed, touch the [5]
key on the LCD screen).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Main Menu] screen and the setting information list is printed.

395

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-2. Test print

NIC Config.
This prints information concerning network settings.
The following contents are printed.

When network settings are made or changed, this information can be printed out to check the contents of the
settings.

396

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-2. Test print

Touch the [1] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).
z The [Main Menu] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Test Print Menu] screen is displayed.

Touch the [4] key on the LCD screen. (When PostScript option is installed, touch the [6]
key on the LCD screen.)

To select [6], touch the [Next] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The network setting list is printed.

397

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings


This prints samples of the installed fonts, a list of the printer default settings, etc.
On [Main Menu] screen, select [Controller Set].

Banner Page
This sets whether or not to print a banner page for each printing.
The following information is listed on the banner page.
The contents listed depend on the page description language.
Job:

The 3-digit job number; when [#999] is reached, the job number returns to [#001].

User ID:

The User ID set with the printer driver; if not User ID is set, [N/A] is listed.

User Name: The computer log-on name; if there is no log-on name, [N/A] is listed.
Title:

The name of the application printing and the file name.

Source:

[Network] or [parallel].

Language: The page description language.


Printed:

The date and the time.

z The factory default is [Off] (Do not print).

Touch the [2] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.
The [Controller Set] screen is displayed.

398

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

Touch the [1] key on the LCD screen.

z The [Controller Set] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Banner Page] screen is displayed.

To print a banner page for each printing, touch the [1] key on the LCD screen; to not print,
touch the [2] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.
z The setting made is applied to all subsequent printings.

399

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

Banner Page Tray


This sets the input tray for banner pages.
z The factory default is [Auto Tray].

Touch the [2] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Controller Set] screen is displayed.

Touch the [2] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Banner Page Tray] screen is displayed.

400

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

Touch one of the [1] - [6] keys on the LCD screen.

[1] Auto Tray


[2] Tray 1
[3] Tray 2
[4] Tray 3 (When input tray option is installed)
[5] Tray 4 (When input tray option is installed)
[6] Bypass Tray
z The number of tray depends on the option attached.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.
z The setting made is applied to all subsequent printings.

401

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

Spool
This sets whether or not to spool print data when it is sent to the printer from an application.
z The factory default is [On].

Touch the [2] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Controller Set] screen is displayed.

Touch the [3] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Spool] screen is displayed.

402

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

To spool the print data for printing, touch the [1] key on the LCD screen; not to spool,
touch the [2] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.
z The setting made is applied to all subsequent printings.

403

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

Job Time Out


This sets the value for timeouts related to data input/output.
When print data has not yet been received or data transmission/destination is not being executed between
the computer and the printer, when the timeout value set is reached, the printer registers the job as incomplete.
z The factory default is [60 sec] (I/O timeout value of 60 seconds).

Touch the [2] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Controller Set] screen is displayed.

Touch the [3] key on the LCD screen. (When PostScript option is installed, touch the [4]
key on the LCD screen)

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Job Time Out] screen is displayed.

404

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

Touch one of the [1] - [10] keys on the LCD screen.


The value of the input/output timeout can be set in 10 levels from 5 to 300 seconds.
The number on the screen expresses the value of the input/output timeout in seconds. For example,
when [1. 5sec] is selected, the input/output timeout is set to 5 seconds.

[1]

5 sec

[6]

60 sec

[2]

10 sec

[7]

120 sec

[3]

15 sec

[8]

180 sec

[4]

20 sec

[9]

240 sec

[5]

30 sec

[10] 300 sec

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.
z The setting made is applied to all subsequent printings.

405

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

Scan Data Auto Del.


This sets the retention period of the scanned data stored on the hard disk or PC-Fax data received with a
user box. These data will automatically be deleted after this period.
z The factory default is [24 hour].
z For details on the PC-Fax functions, refer to [Chapter 7Fax Functions (PC-Fax)] (

Page 267).

Touch the [2] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Controller Set] screen is displayed.

Touch the [5] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [ScanDataAutoDel.] screen is displayed.

406

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

Touch one of the [1] - [8] keys on the LCD screen.

To select one of the [6] - [8] keys, touch the [NEXT] key to switch the screen.
[1] off
[2] 12 hour
[3] 24 hour
[4] 2 days
[5] 4 days
[6] 6 days
[7] 8 days
[8] 10 days

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.

407

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

PDL Select (only when PostScript option installed)


This specifies the language used for printing.
Normally, there is no need to change the factory default.
z The factory default is [Auto].

When the PDL is selected, the print job from another PDL driver becomes an error.

Touch the [2] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Controller Set] screen is displayed.

Touch the [6] key on the LCD screen.

To select [6], touch the [Next] key on the LCD screen.

408

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-3. Controller settings

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [PDL Select] screen is displayed.

Touch one of the [1] - [3] keys on the LCD screen.

[1] Automatic selection


[2] PCL
[3] PostScript

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.
z The setting made is applied to all subsequent printings.

409

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-4. Print default setting


This sets default settings such as the paper size or duplex printing etc.
On the [Main Menu] screen, select [Print default settings].

When printing is executed from an application, if the settings made with the printer driver and the settings made here are different, the printer driver settings take priority.

Default Paper
This sets the default value for the paper size used for printing.
z The factory default is [A4].
(For U.S. and Canada market area: The factory default is [8.5 x 11])

Touch the [3] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Set Default] screen is displayed.

410

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-4. Print default setting

Touch the [1] key on the LCD screen.

z The [Set Default] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Default Paper] screen is displayed.

Touch one of the [1] - [10] keys on the LCD screen.

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

A3R
A4
A5R
A5R
B5
B6R

[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]

F4R
11 x 17R
8.5 x 14R
8.5 x 11
5.5 x 8.5R
8KR
16KR

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]

A3R
A4
A5R
B4R
B5

[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]

F4R
11 x 17R
8.5 x 14R
8.5 x 11
5.5 x 8.5R

(For U.S. and Canada market area)

To select one of the [6] - [10] keys, touch the [NEXT] key to switch the screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.
z The setting made is applied to all subsequent printings.

411

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-4. Print default setting

Duplex
This sets whether or not to normally print on both sides the paper.
z The factory default is [Off]

Touch the [3] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Set Default] screen is displayed.

Touch the [2] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Duplex] screen is displayed.

412

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-4. Print default setting

Touch one of the [1] - [3] keys on the LCD screen.

[1] Print on one side only


[2] Print on both sides (flip on long edge)
[3] Print on both sides (flip on short edge)

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.
z The setting made is applied to all subsequent printings.

413

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-4. Print default setting

Orientation
This sets the default direction for printing on the paper.
z The factory default is [Portrait].

Touch the [3] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Set Default] screen is displayed.

Touch the [3] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Orientation] screen is displayed.

414

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-4. Print default setting

To set the print direction to portrait, touch the [1] key on the LCD screen; to set it to
landscape, touch the [2] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.
z The setting made is applied to all subsequent printings.

415

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-4. Print default setting

Copies
This sets the default setting for the number of copies.
z The factory default is [1].

Touch the [3] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Set Default] screen is displayed.

Touch the [4] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Copies] screen is displayed.

416

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-4. Print default setting

Touch the number keys on the LCD screen to input the number of copies from 1 to 9999.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.
z The setting made is applied to all subsequent printings.

417

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-4. Print default setting

Override Paper
This sets whether or not to convert the paper size automatically when the set paper is used.
z The factory default is [Off]

Touch the [3] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Set Default] screen is displayed.

Touch the [5] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Override Paper] screen is displayed.

418

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-4. Print default setting

Touch one of the [1] - [3] keys on the LCD screen.

[1] Do not convert the paper size.


[2] Convert 8.5x11 paper to A4 size automatically.
[3] Convert A4 size paper to 8.5x11 automatically.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.
z The setting made is applied to all subsequent printings.

419

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-5. PCL setup


This makes the detailed settings for printing with PCL.

Touch the [4] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main Menu] screen, refer to [Displaying the Main Menu screen]
(
Page 385).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [PCL Setup] screen is displayed.
The following settings are displayed.
Point Size
(
Page 421)
Pitch

Page 422)

Font Number

Page 423)

Form Lines

Page 424)

CR/LF Mapping (

Page 425)

Input Tray

Page 426)

Symbol Set

Page 427)

z To switch the items displayed on the [PCL Setup] screen, touch the [PREV] or [NEXT] key on the LCD screen.

420

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-5. PCL setup

Point Size
This sets the font point size.
z The factory default is [12.00].

Touch the [1] key on [PCL Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z The [PCL Setup] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Point Size] screen is displayed.

Touch the number keys on the LCD screen to input a point size from 0.4 to 99.75.

z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen] (

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.

421

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-5. PCL setup

Pitch
This sets the character spacing.
z The factory default is [10.00].

Touch the [1] key on [PCL Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Pitch] screen is displayed.

Touch the number keys on the LCD screen to input a pitch from 0.44 to 99.95.

z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen] (

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.

422

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-5. PCL setup

Font Number
This sets font numbers for printing.
z The factory default is [11].

Touch the [3] key on [PCL Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Font Number] screen is displayed.

Touch the number keys on the LCD screen to input a font number from 0 to 88.

z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen] (


z For details on font number, refer to [Font number list (Control panel-PCL setup)] (

Page 456).
Page 716).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.

423

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-5. PCL setup

Form Lines
This sets the number of lines for printing.
z The factory default is [60].

Touch the [4] key on [PCL Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Form Lines] screen is displayed.

Touch the number keys on the LCD screen to input the number of lines from 5 to 128.

z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen] (

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.

424

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-5. PCL setup

CR/LF Mapping
This sets the type of line feed codes.
z The factory default is [Off].

Touch the [5] key on [PCL Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [CR/LF Mapping] screen is displayed.

Touch one of the [1] - [4] keys on the LCD screen.

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

Off
CR
LF
CR/LF

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.

425

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-5. PCL setup

Input Tray
This sets the input tray containing the paper to print on.
z The factory default is [Auto Tray].

Touch the [6] key on [PCL Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Input Tray] screen is displayed.

Touch one of the [1] - [6] keys on the LCD screen.

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]

Auto Tray
Tray1
Tray2
Tray3 (When input tray option is installed)
Tray4 (When input tray option is installed)
Bypass Tray
z The number of tray depends on the option attached.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.

426

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-5. PCL setup

Symbol Set
This sets the symbol sets for printing.
z The factory default is [ROMAN-8].

Touch the [7] key on [PCL Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Symbol Set] screen is displayed.

Touch one of the [1] - [32] keys on the LCD screen.

z For details on Symbol set, refer to [29-7. Symbol sets list (Control panel-PCL setup)] (

Page 719).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The setting is stored.

427

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-6. Scan error list


When scan data that has not been output is erased from the print controller's hard disk, that information is
accumulated in the scanner error list.

If an upload from the copier memory to the print controller's hard disk is interrupted, this is an error on
the copier.
The data stored in the scanner error list contain up to 16 items. When there are more items than this, the
oldest ones are deleted.
For details on the information you can check on the scanner error list, refer to [13-2. Output error lists]
(Page 375).

Touch the [6] key on [Main Menu] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Scan Error List] screen is displayed.

Touch the number keys on the LCD screen to check the details on the scanner error.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The selected scanner error details are displayed.

428

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-6. Scan error list


Data covered by the scanner error list
Image files scanned with Scan to box, Scan to FTP, or Scan to E-mail and stored on the print controllers hard
disk and management data for those files.

Error cause
Erased by Scan to box automatic erase function.
For Scan to FTP, file could not be transferred to FTP server (including FTP server connection timeout, login
error).
For Scan to E-mail, an email transmission to the SMTP server could not be completed (email address mistake, error after SMTP transmission, lack of detection on controller side).

429

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

15-7. Format HD
It is possible to erase all the information stored on the hard disk and initialize it.
On the [Main Menu] screen, select [Format HD].
For details on initialization, refer to [The hard disk does not operate normally] (

430

Page 685).

V Control panel Chapter 15 Printer Settings

V Control panel (For administrator)

Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

This chapter explains the contents of the settings that can be made with key operator mode on
the copier.

16-1. Key operator mode .........................................................................432


16-2. Contents of settings .......................................................................435

431

16-1. Key operator mode


Usage objectives for key operator mode
Key operator mode is for making detailed settings concerning the printer and scanner, for example scanning
resolution.
To make the settings, use the [Memory SW] screen from key operator mode.

Switching the key operator mode

Press the

button on the control panel.

The [Copy basic mode] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Press the

button on the copier control panel.

The [HELP MODE] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

432

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-1. Key operator mode

Touch the [Key Ope mode] key on the LCD screen.

If a password is set, input the key operator password.

z For details on passwords, refer to the copier's users manual.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Key operator mode] screen is displayed.

433

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-1. Key operator mode

Touch the [3] key on the LCD screen.

The [Memory SW] screen is displayed.

434

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-2. Contents of settings


The default values for the following items can be set with key operator mode.
Auto reset timer
PRINT W/O key count
Scan Quality
Scan W/O key count
Moving to power save
Scan image rotation
Main Menu display
Reset data after job

435

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-2. Contents of settings

Auto reset timer


You can set how long the copier will wait with the [Scanner] screen left unused until it automatically
returns to the [Printer basic mode] screen.
z The factory default is [Off] (Do not switch screens automatically.).

Select [Auto reset timer] on [Memory SW] screen on the LCD screen.

When you touch the [] or [] key on the LCD screen, the selection item is switched.
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Memory SW] screen, refer to [Switching the key operator mode]
(
Page 432).

Touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, then change the setting.
Each time you touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, the setting is switched.
Select the setting item from among the following.
OFF, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, 300 (seconds)
When you select [OFF], auto resets are not triggered.

Touch the [RETURN] key on the LCD screen.


From now on, the copier operates in accordance with this setting.

436

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-2. Contents of settings

PRINT W/O key count


This sets whether to enable printing or disable printing when the key counter is removed during print operations.
z The factory default is [Not valid] (printing is possible whether or not the key counter is present).

Select [PRINT W/O key count] on [Memory SW] screen on the LCD screen.

When you touch the [] or [] key on the LCD screen, the selection item is switched.
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Memory SW] screen, refer to [Switching the key operator mode]
(
Page 432).

Touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, then change the setting.
Each time you touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, the setting is switched.
If you select [Valid], operation is according to the copier setting.
If you select [Not Valid], printing is possible whether or not the key counter is present.
z As for the copier setting, if the [Valid] is selected, ask your service representative.

Touch the [RETURN] key on the LCD screen.


From now on, the copier operates in accordance with this setting.

437

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-2. Contents of settings

Scan Quality
This changes the default value for the scanner resolution.
z The factory default is [200 dpi].

Select [Scan Quality] on [Memory SW] screen on the LCD screen.

When you touch the [] or [] key on the LCD screen, the selection item is switched.
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Memory SW] screen, refer to [Switching the key operator mode]
(
Page 432).

Touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, then change the setting.
Each time you touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, the setting is switched.
Select the setting item from among the following.
[200 dpi]: The scanner resolution is set to 200 dpi.
[300 dpi]: The scanner resolution is set to 300 dpi.
[400 dpi]: The scanner resolution is set to 400 dpi.
[600 dpi]: The scanner resolution is set to 600 dpi.

Touch the [RETURN] key on the LCD screen.


From now on, documents are scanned according to this setting.

438

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-2. Contents of settings

SCAN W/O key count


This sets whether to enable scanning or disable scanning when the key counter is removed during scan operations.
z The factory default is [Not valid] (scanning is possible whether or not the key counter is present).

Select [SCAN W/O key count] on [Memory SW] screen on the LCD screen.

When you touch the [] or [] key on the LCD screen, the selection item is switched.
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Memory SW] screen, refer to [Switching the key operator mode]
(
Page 432).

Touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, then change the setting.
Each time you touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, the setting is switched.
If you select [Valid], operation is according to the copier setting.
If you select [Not valid], scanning is possible whether or not the key counter is present.
z As for the copier setting, if the [Valid] is selected, ask your service representative.

Touch the [RETURN] key on the LCD screen.


From now on, the copier operates in accordance with this setting.

439

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-2. Contents of settings

Moving to power save


This sets the standby time from when printing starts during power save mode until it returns to power save
mode again.
z For details on power save mode, refer to the copier's users manual.
z The factory default is [Normal]. (The copier returns to power save mode after the time set as the power save time.)

Select [Moving to power save] on [Memory SW] screen on the LCD screen.

When you touch the [] or [] key on the LCD screen, the selection item is switched.
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Memory SW] screen, refer to [Switching the key operator mode]
(
Page 432).

Touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, then change the setting.
Each time you touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, the setting is switched.
When you select [Normal], the copier returns to power save mode after the time set as the power save
time.
When you select [Immediate], the copier returns to power save mode about one minute after the end
of printing.

Touch the [RETURN] key on the LCD screen.


From now on, the copier operates in accordance with this setting.

440

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-2. Contents of settings

Scan image rotation


This sets whether or not to automatically rotate images imported in with the scanner.
z The factory default is [Rotation OFF].

Select [Scan image rotation] on [Memory SW] screen on the LCD screen.

When you touch the [] or [] key on the LCD screen, the selection item is switched.
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Memory SW] screen, refer to [Switching the key operator mode]
(
Page 432).

Touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, then change the setting.
Each time you touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, the setting is switched.
When you select [Rotation OFF], images imported in with the scanner are not rotated.
When you select [Rotation ON], images imported in with the scanner are rotated.

Touch the [RETURN] key on the LCD screen.


From now on, the copier operates with these settings.

441

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-2. Contents of settings

Main menu display


This sets the default on [Transmission method selection] screen for scanner mode.
z The factory default is [E-Mail].

Select [Main menu display] on [Memory SW] screen on the LCD screen for scanner
mode.

When you touch the [] or [] key on the LCD screen, the selection item is switched.
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Memory SW] screen, refer to [Switching the key operator mode]
(
Page 432).

Touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, then change the setting.
Each time you touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, the setting is switched.
[E-mail]: The email selection screen is displayed by default at scanner mode.
[Box]: The box selection screen is displayed by default at scanner mode.
[FTP]: The FTP selection screen is displayed by default at scanner mode.

Touch the [RETURN] key on the LCD screen.


From now on, the copier operates with these settings.

442

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-2. Contents of settings

Reset data after job


This sets whether or not to reset the settings after scanning data.
z The factory default is [YES].

Select [Reset data after job] on [Memory SW] screen on the LCD screen.

When you touch the [] key or [] key on the LCD screen, the selection item is switched.
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Memory SW] screen, refer to [Switching the key operator mode]
(
Page 432).

Touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, then change the setting.
Each time you touch the [EDIT] key on the LCD screen, the setting is switched.
[Yes]: All the settings are reset after the upload and the display returns to the address selection screen.
[No]: Scanning continues with the same settings.

Touch the [RETURN] key on the LCD screen.


From now on, the copier operates with these settings.

443

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

16-2. Contents of settings

Blank page

444

V Control panel Chapter 16 Key Operator Settings

VI Network
This volume explains how to make the
network settings.

Chapter 17 Summary of Network


Functions ........................... 446
Chapter 18 Setting from the Control
Panel .................................. 451
Chapter 19 Using Utilities ...................... 542
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer
(Windows 95/98/Me only) ... 549
Chapter 21 Using IPX Peer-to-Peer
(Windows 95/98/Me only) ... 569
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/
LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP
only) ..................................... 576
Chapter 23 Using with NetWare ............ 601
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows
2000/XP) ............................... 608
Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration............. 624
Chapter 26 Use with AppleTalk ............. 637
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the
Network ................................ 643
445

VI Network

VI Network

Chapter 17 Summary of Network Functions

This chapter summarizes the print controller network functions.

17-1. Network functions...........................................................................447


17-2. Network function usage .................................................................449
17-3. Network setting item list.................................................................450

446

17-1. Network functions


Features of network functions
This unit can handle various network environments flexibly and is equipped with the following network functions.
10Base-T/100Base-TX (Fast Ethernet) automatic selection
It supports for multiple protocols (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (EtherTalk))
Through dedicated utilities, it supports IP Peer-to-Peer printing through TCP/IP from Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me.
Through dedicated utilities, it supports IPX Peer-to-Peer printing through IPX/SPX from MicroSoft Windows 95/98/Me.
It supports LPD/LPR on TCP/IP for Microsoft Windows NT/2000/XP.
It supports lpd/lpr on TCP/IP for UNIX.
It supports Novell NetWare printer server functions and supports both bindary mode and Novell Directory Service (NDS).
It supports AppleTalk on Macintosh.
An HTTP server is built in and through links with the accessory Management Access Program (MAP),
standard web browser, etc., the printing system can be managed.
It supports for acquiring IP addresses automatically through DHCP
It supports for setting up Netware on NWSetup utility for Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP.
It supports for assigning IP addresses on BOOTP Lite utility for Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP.
It supports printing from various UNIX systems through UNIX-TCP/IP Programs.

Use with peer-to-peer connections (Windows 95/98/Me)


With LAN (Local Area Network) comprised solely of computers running Windows 95/98/Me, the printer can
be used even without a dedicated printer server. In this case, the print controller is connected to the network
with a connection configuration called peer-to-peer.

z Peer-to-peer: A network configuration that connects computers under equivalent conditions without using a central
server.

447

VI Network Chapter 17 Summary of Network Functions

17-1. Network functions

Use through LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP)


This printing system supports printing with LPD/LPR with Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP.
You can connect the print controller to a print server in a UNIX environment and send print instructions to the
printer from Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP.
z This must be a print request format that can be used with LPD (Line Printer Deamon)/LPR:Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP.

Using with UNIX


This printing system supports printing with lpd/lpr with UNIX.
You can connect the print controller to a print server in a UNIX environment and sent print instructions to the
printer from various UNIX systems.

Using with NetWare


The Novell NetWare 3.x or Novell NetWare 4.x printer server functions are supported.
You can connect the print controller to a network that uses Novell NetWare 3.x or 4.x as the network OS and
send print instructions to the printer server (network controller) from a client terminal.
z For details on NetWare functions, refer to the NetWare manual.

Using with Macintosh (Only when PostScript option installed)


Printing on a Macintosh with AppleTalk is supported.
You can connect the print controller to the AppleTalk environment print server and send print instructions to
the printer from a Macintosh.

448

VI Network Chapter 17 Summary of Network Functions

17-2. Network function usage


Connection with the network
Please connect the UTP cable (Category 5 recommended) connected to the network to the Ethernet connector (RJ-45) of the print controller (network controller).

The settings required for connecting to the network depend on the environment of the network the print controller is connected to, the OS of the computers making up the network, etc. Make the settings required to
match the environment into which this system is being introduced.

Network setting method


There are the following two methods for making the print controller network settings.
Setting from the copier control panel
Load the setting screen from the copiers control panel and set the network functions.
z For the method setting the network functions from the copiers control panel, refer to [Chapter 18 Setting from the
Control Panel] (
page Page 451)

Setting using the Web Utilities


This sets the network controller from a computer connected to the network using the Web Utilities.
z For details on the Web Utilities, refer to the Web Utilities users manual.

449

VI Network Chapter 17 Summary of Network Functions

17-3. Network setting item list


This explains the settings required when connecting the print controller to the network.
Set each setting item to match the environment of the network to which the print controller is connected.
When changing the setting for an item, ask the network administrator.
Unit Info (

Page 457)

Check such information as the MAC address and ROM version for the network controller.
Update NIC (

Page 458)

The Network setting items are updated to the changed contents.


Print on Startup (

Page 462)

This sets whether or not to output the Network settings list immediately after the copier power is
switched on.
TCP/IP Setup (

Page 464)

This sets the items required for communicating with TCP/IP.


NetWare Setup (

Page 482)

This sets the items required for communicating with NetWare.


AppleTalk Setup (

Page 501)

This sets the items required for communicating with AppleTalk.


WINS Setup (

Page 508)

This sets the items required for searching with NetBIOS.


FTP Setup (

Page 515)

This sets the items for sending scanned images from the print controller to the FTP server.
Email Setup (

Page 520)

This sets the items required for sending scanned images from the print controller as email attachments.
DNS Setup (

Page 535)

This sets the items required for using a DNS server in the network to which the print controller is connected.
Admin Password (

Page 460)

This is used for changing the Network controller password.


Factory Default (

Page 540)

This returns the Network settings to their default state (the factory defaults).

450

VI Network Chapter 17 Summary of Network Functions

VI Network

Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

This chapter explains the method for making the network settings from the Copiers control
panel.

18-1. Method for setting network from control panel..........................452


18-2. NIC ..................................................................................................457
18-3. Print on startup..............................................................................462
18-4. TCP/IP setup ..................................................................................464
18-5. NetWare setup ...............................................................................482
18-6. AppleTalk setup.............................................................................501
18-7. WINS setup ....................................................................................508
18-8. FTP setup .......................................................................................515
18-9. Email setup ....................................................................................520
18-10. DNS setup ......................................................................................535
18-11. Factory default ..............................................................................540

451

18-1. Method for setting network from control


panel
This explains how to set the network connection using the Copiers control panel and LCD screen.

Press the

button on the control panel.

The [Printer basic mode] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the [SETTING] key on the LCD screen.

The [Main Menu] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

452

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-1. Method for setting network from control panel

Touch the [5] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Network Setup] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

The following settings are made on the [Network Setup] screen.


Unit Info

Page 457

Update NIC

Page 458

Print on Startup

Page 462

TCP/IP Setup

Page 464

NetWare Setup

Page 482

AppleTalk Setup

Page 501

WINS Setup

Page 508

FTP Setup

Page 515

Email Setup

Page 520

DNS Setup

Page 535

453

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-1. Method for setting network from control panel


Admin Password

Page 460

Factory Default

Page 540

z To switch the items displayed on [Network Setup] screen, touch the [PREV] or [NEXT] key on the LCD screen.

5
6

Select the item to set, then touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.
Set each item and when setting of all the items is complete, touch the [CANCEL] key or
[OK] key.
The display returns to the [Network Setup] screen.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC] (

8
9

Page 458).

Wait until the [Please wait Printer initializing] display on the LCD screen changes to
[Ready to print].
Switch off the Copier main power, wait about 10 seconds, then switch the power back
on again.
The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.

After switching Off the Copier main power, if you switch it back on without waiting, the print controller
may not operate normally and errors may be displayed.
In this case, if you switch the Copier main power Off again, wait at least 10 seconds or so, then switch
the main power On again, the system will operate normally.

454

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-1. Method for setting network from control panel

IP address settings
There are the following two methods for setting the IP address etc. for the network controller.
Assigning the IP address automatically with the DHCP server
When managing IP addresses with the DHCP server on the network that the network controller is connected to, there is no need to set a unique IP address for the network controller. The IP address can be
acquired automatically from the DHCP server.
Setting a unique IP address for the network controller
When setting individual IP addresses for equipment connected to the network, the IP address assigned
to the network controller is set with manual input. In this case, it is also necessary to set the sub-net
mask and other information with manual input.
z For details on management methods for network IP addresses etc., check with the network administrator.
z For details on making network settings manually, check with the network administrator.
z When making network settings manually, in addition to the method explained here using the Copiers control panel,
you can also use a web utility. For details, refer to the Web Utilities users manual.

455

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-1. Method for setting network from control panel

Character input on LCD screen


When characters must be input on the LCD screen, touch the alphanumeric input keys on the screen.
When you touch [] or [] the buttons that can be input are switched.
When you touch [BS], one input character is deleted.
When you touch [CLR], the input characters are all deleted.

456

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-2. NIC
After checking the information related to the network controller installed in the print controller and making any
necessary changes, finalize the settings. The password used must be changed when the network settings
are updated and when the network controller is initialized.

Unit Info
This checks the hardware information for the network.

Touch the [1] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).
z The [Network Setup] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The network controller [ROM Version], [Serial Number] and [Ethernet Address] are displayed.

To check information, touch the [CANCEL] key on the LCD screen.

The display returns to the [Network Setup] screen.

457

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-2. NIC

Update NIC
The [Network Setup] items are updated to the changed contents.

Touch the [2] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

[2] cannot be selected until the contents of the [Network Setup] items have been changed.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


A screen is displayed to confirm that you want to execute an [Update NIC].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

The screen for inputting the password is displayed.


z To cancel the [Update NIC], touch the [2] key on the LCD screen, then touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

458

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-2. NIC

Use the alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the password.

z The default setting for the password is [sysadm].


z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

The [Please wait] message is displayed and the initial operation starts. Wait until [Ready] is displayed and operations end.

Switch off the Copier main power, wait about 10 seconds, then switch the power back
on again.
The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.

The updated settings do not operate normally until the Copier is switched Off, then On again.
After switching Off the Copier main power, if you switch it back on without waiting, the print controller
may not operate normally and errors may be displayed.
In this case, if you switch the Copier main power Off again, wait at least 10 seconds or so, then switch
the main power On again, the system will operate normally.

459

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-2. NIC

Admin Password
The password to input when changing the network controller settings can be changed.

Touch the [11] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [NIC Password] screen is displayed.

Touch the alphanumeric input keys on the LCD screen and input the current password
at [Current password].

z The default setting for the password is [sysadm].


z If you have forgotten your current password, by inputting [3069] for the [Current password input], the new password
input screen is displayed.
The only password that can be displayed using [3069] is the NIC password.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [NIC Password] screen is displayed.

460

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-2. NIC

Touch the alphanumeric input keys on the LCD screen to input a new password 4-8
characters long.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The screen for inputting the new password is displayed.

Use the alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the new password again.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Network Setup] screen.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

Page 458).

The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.

461

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-3. Print on startup


This sets whether or not to print a network settings list automatically when the power for the Copier is
switched on.

Touch the [3] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Print on Startup] screen is displayed.

To print the network settings list when the power is switched on, touch the [1] key on
the LCD screen; to not print, touch the [2] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Network Setup] screen.

462

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-3. Print on startup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC] (

463

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup


The information required for using the print controller in the TCP/IP environment is set.

Touch the [4] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [TCP/IP Setup] screen is displayed.

The following settings are made on this screen.


Page 466
Enable TCP/IP
Page 468
IP Address
Page 470
Subnet Mask
Page 472
Default Gateway
Page 474
Base Port Number
Page 476
Enable DHCP
Page 478
IP Addr.in NVRAM
Page 480
LPD Banner
z To switch the items displayed on the [TCP/IP Setup] screen, touch the [PREV] key or [NEXT] key on the LCD screen.

464

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

When the settings for all the items is complete, touch the [CANCEL] key on the LCD
screen.
The [Network Setup] screen is displayed.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC] (

465

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

Enable TCP/IP
This sets whether or not to enable TCP/IP usage.

Touch the [1] key on [TCP/IP Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z The [TCP/IP Setup] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The screen for setting TCP/IP usage is displayed.

To disable TCP/IP settings, touch the [2] key on the LCD screen; to enable them, touch
the [1] key on the LCD screen.

z The factory default is [Yes].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [TCP/IP Setup] screen.

466

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

467

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

IP Address
The IP address for the print controller network controller is registered.
z When using the DHCP server for IP address management, in [DHCP usage] enabled, the IP address acquired with
DHCP is displayed.

Touch the [2] key on [TCP/IP Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [IP Address] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input the IP address.


Specify four numbers from 0-255 delimited in [.(dot)].
When you touch [] or [], the input position is moved.

IP address input example:192.168.00.10

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [TCP/IP Setup] screen.

468

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

469

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

Subnet Mask
This inputs the subnet mask for the network to which the print controller is connected.
z When using the DHCP server for IP address management, in [DCHP usage] enabled, the subnet mask acquired with
DHCP is displayed.

Touch the [3] key on [TCP/IP Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Subnet Mask] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input the subnet mask.
Specify four numbers from 0-255 delimited in [.(dot)].
When you touch [] or [], the input position is moved.

Subnet mask input example:255.255.255.0

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [TCP/IP Setup] screen.

470

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

471

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

Default Gateway
This inputs the gateway for the network to which the print controller is connected.
z When using the DHCP server for IP address management, in [DHCP usage] enabled, the gateway address acquired
with DHCP is displayed.

Touch the [4] key on [TCP/IP Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Default Gateway] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input the gateway address.
Specify four numbers from 0-255 delimited in [.(dot)].
When you touch [] or [], the input position is moved.

Gateway address input example:192.168.0.1

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [TCP/IP Setup] screen.

472

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

473

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

Base Port Number


This specifies any value as the base port number.

If the port number is changed inappropriately, this may create obstructions for the network. Do not
change the port number unless necessary.

Touch the [5] key on [TCP/IP Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Base Port Number] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input a new base port number from 1000 to
65530.

z The factory default is [10000].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [TCP/IP Setup] screen.

474

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

475

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

Enable DHCP
This sets whether or not to automatically acquire IP addresses and other such information from a DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server.
z For details on [IP Addr .in NMRAH] and [Enable DHCP], refer to [IP address settings] (
[27-4. Using DHCP] (
Page 649).

Touch the [6] key on [TCP/IP Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

Page 455) and

The DCHP settings screen is displayed.

When not acquiring information from a DHCP server, touch the [2] key on the LCD
screen; when acquiring it, touch the [1] key on the LCD screen.

z The factory default is [DHCP Disable].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [TCP/IP Setup] screen.

476

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

477

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

IP Addr.in NVRAM
This sets whether or not to save the IP address displayed at [IP Address] in the print controller non-volatile
RAM.
z For details on [IP Addr .in NMRAH] and [Enable DHCP], refer to [IP address settings] (
[27-4. Using DHCP] (
Page 649).

Touch the [7] key on [TCP/IP Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

Page 455) and

The [IP Addr.in NVRAM] screen is displayed.

To save the IP address, touch the [1] key on the LCD screen; to not save it, touch the
[2] key on the LCD screen.

z The factory default is [YES].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [TCP/IP Setup] screen.

478

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

479

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

LPD Banner
This sets whether or not to print information as a banner page for LPD/LPR printing.

Touch the [8] key on [TCP/IP Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [LPD Banner] screen is displayed.

To print banner pages, touch the [1] key on the LCD screen; to not print, touch the [2]
key on the LCD screen.

z The factory default is [NO].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [TCP/IP Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

480

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-4. TCP/IP setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

481

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup


The information required for using the print controller in the NetWare network environment is set.

Touch the [5] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [NetWare Setup] screen is displayed.

z To switch the setting items displayed on the [NetWare Setup] screen, touch the [PREV] key or [NEXT] key on the LCD
screen.
z For details on NetWare settings, refer to the NetWare users manual.

The following settings are made on this screen.


Page 483
Enable NetWare
Page 485
Server Name
Page 487
Server Password
Page 489
File Server
Page 491
NDS Context
Page 493
NDS Tree
Page 495
Queue Scan Rate
Page 497
Frame Type
Page 499
Disable Bindery

482

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

Enable NetWare
This sets whether or not to use the print controller in the NetWare network environment.

When NetWare is not being used as the network OS, if [Use NetWare] is enabled, it may take more time
for the network controller to start up. When not using NetWare, always set [No].

Touch the [1] key on [NetWare Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z The [NetWare Setup] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Enable NetWare] screen is displayed.

To use the print controller in the NetWare environment, touch the [1] key on the LCD
screen; to not use it, touch the [2] key on the LCD screen.

z The factory default is [YES].

483

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [NetWare Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

484

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

Server Name
This sets the printer server name assigned to the network controller.

Touch the [2] key on [NetWare Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Server Name] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the print server name.

The printer server name is a combination of up to 47 symbols and alphanumerics.


z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [NetWare Setup] screen.

485

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC] (

486

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

Server Password
This sets the password required for logging the print server onto the file server.

Touch the [3] key on [NetWare Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Server Password] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the password.

The password is a combination of up to 31 symbols and alphanumerics.


z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen] (

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [NetWare Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

487

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

488

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

File Server
This sets the name of the file server that the print server logs onto.

Touch the [4] key on [NetWare Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [File Server] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the file server name.

The file server name is a combination of up to 47 symbols and alphanumerics.


z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [NetWare Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

489

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

490

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

NDS Context
This sets the NSD (Novell Directory Service) context name.

Touch the [5] key on [NetWare Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [NDS Context] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the NDS context name.

The NDS context name is a combination of up to 127 symbols and alphanumerics.


z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [NetWare Setup] screen.

491

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

492

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

NDS Tree
This sets the NDS tree name.

Touch the [6] key on [NetWare Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [NDS Tree] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the NDS tree name.

The NDS tree name is a combination of up to 47 symbols and alphanumerics.


z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [NetWare Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

493

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

494

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

Queue Scan Rate


This sets the time interval for searching the print queue.

Touch the [7] key on [NetWare Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Queue Scan Rate] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input a detect time from 1 to 255 seconds.

z The factory default is [1 seconds].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [NetWare Setup] screen.

When going on to set another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

495

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

496

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

Frame Type
This sets the frame type used for communications.

Touch the [8] key on [NetWare Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Frame Type] screen is displayed.

Touch one of the [1] - [5] keys on the LCD screen matches the network environment.

z The factory default is [Auto].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [NetWare Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

497

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

498

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

Disable Bindery
This sets whether or not to enable bindery service for NetWare 4.x or later.

Touch the [9] key on [NetWare Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Disable Bindery] screen is displayed.

To enable bindery service, touch the [1] key on the LCD screen; to disable it, touch the
[2] key on the LCD screen.

z The factory default is [NO].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [NetWare Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

499

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-5. NetWare setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

500

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-6. AppleTalk setup


Set the information required for using the print controller in the AppleTalk network environment.

Touch the [6] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [AppleTalk Setup] screen is displayed.

The following settings are made on this screen.


Enable AppleTalk
Page 502
Printer Name
Page 504
Zone Name
Page 506

501

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-6. AppleTalk setup

Enable AppleTalk
This sets whether or not to enable AppleTalk.

Touch the [1] key on [AppleTalk Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z The [AppleTalk Setup] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Enable AppleTalk] screen is displayed.

To enable AppleTalk, touch the [1] key on the LCD screen; to disable it, touch the [2]
key on the LCD screen.

z The factory default is [YES].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [AppleTalk Setup] screen is displayed.

502

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-6. AppleTalk setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

503

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-6. AppleTalk setup

Printer Name
This sets the Copier (network controller) name displayed on the AppleTalk network.

Touch the [2] key on [AppleTalk Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Printer Name] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the printer name.

The printer name is a combination of up to 32 symbols and alphanumerics.


z The symbols below cannot be used.
(, ), *, @, -, =, :, ~
z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [AppleTalk Setup] screen.

504

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-6. AppleTalk setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

505

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-6. AppleTalk setup

Zone Name
This specifies the zone that the print controller is connected to.

Touch the [3] key on [AppleTalk Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Zone Name] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric buttons on the LCD screen to input the zone name.

The zone name is a combination of up to 32 symbols and alphanumerics.


z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](
Page 456).
z If there is no zone (when using a network with no shielded router), leave this column blank.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [AppleTalk Setup] screen.

506

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-6. AppleTalk setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

507

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-7. WINS setup


This makes the settings required for using WINS (Windows Internet Name Service).

Touch the [7] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [WINS Setup] screen is displayed.

The following settings are made on this screen.


NetBIOS Name
Page 509
Primary Server
Page 511
Secondary Server
Page 513

508

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-7. WINS setup

NetBIOS Name
This sets the print controller NetBIOS name.

Touch the [1] key on [WINS Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z The [WINS Setup] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [NetBIOS Name] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric keys to input the NetBIOS name.

The NetBIOS name is a combination of up to 15 symbols and alphanumerics.


z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [WINS Setup] screen.

509

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-7. WINS setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

510

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-7. WINS setup

Primary Server
This specifies the IP address for the primary print server.

Touch the [2] key on [WINS Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Primary Server] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input the IP address of the primary server.
Specify four numbers from 0-255 delimited in [.(dot)].
When you touch [] or [], the input position is moved.

IP address input example:192.168.00.21

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [WINS Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

511

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-7. WINS setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC] (

512

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-7. WINS setup

Secondary Server
This specifies the IP address for the secondary print server.

Touch the [3] key on [WINS Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Secondary Server] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input the IP address of the secondary server.
Specify four numbers from 0-255 delimited in [.(dot)].
When you touch [] or [], the input position is moved.

IP address input example:192.168.0.22

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [WINS Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

513

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-7. WINS setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

514

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-8. FTP setup


This makes the settings required for uploading images scanned with the scanner function to an FTP server.

Touch the [8] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).
z For details on scanner functions, refer to [Chapter 12 Using the Scanner Functions](
Page 320).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [FTP Setup] screen is displayed.

The following settings are made on this screen.


FTP Port Number
Page 516
FTP Timeout
Page 518

515

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-8. FTP setup

FTP Port Number


This specifies a port number to use for communications with the FTP server.

If the port number is changed inappropriately, this may create obstructions for the network. Do not
change the port number unless particularly necessary.

Touch the [1] key on [FTP Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z The [FTP Setup] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [FTP Port Number] screen is displayed.

Use the numeric keys on the LCD screen to input a port number from 1 to 65535.

z The factory default is [21].

516

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-8. FTP setup

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC] (

517

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-8. FTP setup

FTP Timeout
This automatically stops the upload if communications bog down during data uploading to the FTP server and
a certain period of time passes.
[FTP Timeout] sets this [time from when communications bog down until the upload is stopped] (timeout
value).

Touch the [2] key on [FTP Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [FTP Timeout] screen is displayed.

Use numeric keys on the LCD screen to input a timeout value from 1 to 60 seconds.

z The factory default is [15 sec].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [FTP Setup] screen.

518

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-8. FTP setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

519

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup


This sets the information for the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) etc. that is necessary for sending
images as email attachments with the scanner functions.

Touch the [9] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).
z For details on scanner functions, refer to [Chapter 11Summary of Scanner Functions](
Page 302).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Email Setup] screen is displayed.

The following settings are made on this screen.


SMTP Server Name
Page 521
SMTP Port Number
Page 523
SMTP Timeout
Page 525
Max.Message Size
Page 527
From
Page 529
Subject
Page 531
Message Body
Page 533
z To switch the items displayed on the [Email Setup] screen, touch the [PREV] key or [NEXT] key on the LCD screen.

520

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

SMTP Server Name


This sets the name of the SMTP server used for sending email.

Touch the [1] key on [Email Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z The [Email Setup] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [SMTP Server Name] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the name or IP address of the
SMTP server used for sending email.

The SMTP server name is a combination of up to 239 symbols and alphanumerics.


z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen] (

Page 456).

Unless the DNS settings are made correctly, the system will not operate correctly even if the SMTP
server name is input.

521

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Email Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

522

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

SMTP Port Number


This specifies a port number to use for communications with the SMTP server.

If the port number is changed inappropriately, this may create obstructions for the network. Do not
change the port number unless necessary.

Touch the [2] key on [Email Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [SMTP Port Number] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input a port number from 1 to 65535.

z The factory default is [25].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Email Setup] screen.

523

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

524

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

SMTP Timeout
This automatically stops the transmission if communications bog down during sending of email to the SMTP
server and a certain period of time passes.
[Connection timeout] sets this [time from when communications bog down until the transmission is stopped]
(timeout value).

Touch the [3] key on [Email Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [SMTP Timeout] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input a timeout value from 1 to 60 seconds.

z The factory default is [15 seconds].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Email Setup] screen.

525

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

526

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

Max.Message Size
This sets the maximum capacity that the SMTP server can receive for one email.

Touch the [4] key on [Email Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Max.Message Size] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input a capacity from 10-1000 (x100 kilobytes).

z The factory default is [1000x100 kilobytes].

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Email Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

527

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

528

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

From
This sets an email address used as the sender data when an email is sent from the print controller.
z When there is an error notice from the SMTP server or a response to the sent email, it is sent to an email address set
here.

Touch the [5] key on [Email Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [From] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the administrator email address.

The administrator email address is a combination of up to 239 symbols and alphanumerics. (The number of characters that can actually be used depends on the provider used.)
z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Email Setup] screen.

529

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

530

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

Subject
This sets the subject of the email.
z The contents input here are registered as the third title in the [Scan to E-mail] title list. For details, refer to [12-2.
Registering storage locations/destinations] (
Page 334).

Touch the [6] key on [Email Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Subject] screen is displayed.

The subject is a combination of up to 45 symbols and alphanumerics.

z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Email Setup] screen.

531

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

532

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

Message Body
This sets the main text of the email.
z The contents input here are registered as the eleventh title in the [Scan to E-mail] title list. For details, refer to [12-2.
Registering storage locations/destinations] (
Page 335).

Touch the [7] key on [Email Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Message Body] screen is displayed.

The main text is a combination of up to 239 symbols and alphanumerics.

z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [Email Setup] screen.

533

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-9. Email setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

534

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-10. DNS setup


This sets the DNS (Domain Name System) and NIC domain name for the network to which the print controller
is connected.

Touch the [10] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [DNS Setup] screen is displayed.

The following settings are made on this screen.


DNS Server
Page 536
NIC Domain Name
Page 538
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).

535

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-10. DNS setup

DNS Server
This sets the DNS server address.

Touch the [1] key on [DNS Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

z The [DNS Setup] screen displays with [1] already selected.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [DNS Server] screen is displayed.

Touch numeric keys on the LCD screen to input the DNS address.
Specify four numbers from 0-255 delimited in [.(dot)].
When you touch [] or [], the input position is moved.

DNS address input example:255.255.000.01

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [DNS Setup] screen.

536

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-10. DNS setup

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

537

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-10. DNS setup

NIC Domain Name


This sets the NIC domain name.

Touch the [2] key on [DNS Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [NIC Domain Name] screen is displayed.

Touch alphanumeric input keys on the LCD screen to input a domain name of up to 127
characters for the network connected to.

z For the domain name, input the completely modified domain name.
Example: abc.konica.co.jp

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The display returns to the [DNS Setup] screen.

When setting another item, do so now.


z For details on the operation methods for other settings, refer to the respective page.

538

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-10. DNS setup

The [Update NIC] is executed.


The network setting items are updated with the changed contents.
z For the [Update NIC] procedure, refer to [Update NIC](

539

Page 458).

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-11. Factory default


The network controller settings can be returned to their factory defaults.
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Network Setup] screen, refer to [18-1.Method for setting network from
control panel] (
Page 452).
z A password is required to execute [factory defaults].
z When [Factory Default] is executed, the values currently set for the network functions are all returned to their default
values.

Touch the [12] key on [Network Setup] screen on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


A screen for confirming execution of [Factory Default] is displayed.

To execute [Factory Default], touch the [1] key on the LCD screen; to not execute,
touch the [2] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Password input] screen is displayed.
If [2] was selected in Step 3, the display returns to the [Network Setup] screen.

540

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

18-11. Factory default

Touch alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the password.

z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen](


z The factory default for the password is [sysadm].

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

Wait until the LCD screen display changes from [Initializing] to [Ready].

Switch off the Copier main power, wait about 10 seconds, then switch the power back
on again.
The network controller parameters are returned to their factory default.

After switching Off the Copier main power, if you switch it back on without waiting, the print controller
may not operate normally and errors may be displayed.
In this case, if you switch the Copier main power Off again, wait at least 10 seconds or so, then switch
the main power On again, the system will operate normally.

541

VI Network Chapter 18 Setting from the Control Panel

VI Network

Chapter 19 Using Utilities

This chapter summarizes the MAP (Management Access Program) and the method for installing it on the computer.

19-1. MAP (Management Access Program) ...........................................543


19-2. Installing MAP .................................................................................544
19-3. MAP settings ...................................................................................547
19-4. Starting MAP....................................................................................548

542

19-1. MAP (Management Access Program)


You can use the MAP utility on the [User Software CD] to automatically detect the network controllers on the
network and list them on the Web browser. From this list, you can directly select the network controller to
change the network settings for and operate the Web utility on a Web browser.
z For details on the Web Utilities, refer to the Web Utilities users manual.

MAP operation conditions


OSs supported
Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP
Browser
One of the following browsers is required.
Netscape Navigator
Internet Explorer
z For details on the supported versions of the Web browser, refer to the Web Utilities users manual.

Other conditions
TCP/IP protocol must be installed on the computer.
TCP/IP protocol must be set on both the network controller and the computer to detect the network controller.
The IPX/SPX protocol must be set as necessary.

543

VI Network Chapter 19 Using Utilities

19-2. Installing MAP


MAP is installed on the computer with the following procedure.

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

When installing on Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, log on with a user name that has administrator rights.
z If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights
incorporating those of a Power User.

3
4
5

Put the [User Software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.


Select the CD-ROM with Windows Explorer and display the contents of the [\English\NetUtil\MAP]
folder.
Double-click [Setup.exe].
The setup program is started and the installation screen is displayed.

Check the contents of the screen, then click the [Next ] button.

The [Installation Notes] screen is displayed.

544

VI Network Chapter 19 Using Utilities

19-2. Installing MAP

Click the [Yes] button.

The [Choose Destination Directory] screen is displayed.

Click the [Next ] button.

The installation destination confirmation screen is displayed.


z The default installation destination is [c:\Program Files\MAP]. To change the installation destination, click [Browse]
then specify the installation destination.

Click the [Next ] button.

The necessary files are copied to the hard disk, a message is displayed announcing that the installation is complete.

545

VI Network Chapter 19 Using Utilities

19-2. Installing MAP

10

Click the [OK] button.

The installation is complete.

546

VI Network Chapter 19 Using Utilities

19-3. MAP settings


When you execute the MAP setup program, two programs are installed: [MAP settings] and [MAP].
When using MAP, first you must make the MAP settings.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Programs] - [Map] - [MAP setup].

[MAP settings] is started.

This selects the protocol used by the network controller.


When detecting a network controller using IPX, check [Search for IPX based printers].
When detecting a network controller using IP, check [Search for IP based printers].

When using IP as the network protocol, specify the [Max Hops for IP Search] from 0 to
15.
z The default setting is [2].
z If too high a number is specified, it creates much traffic on the network.
z The [Max Hops for IP Search] sets how far a range of the network to detect equipment in. If [0] is specified, only the
segment in which MAP is started is detected.
If [2] is specified, the entire network that can be accessed going through two or fewer routers is detected.
z A segment is the section of a larger network delimited by a router.

547

VI Network Chapter 19 Using Utilities

19-4. Starting MAP

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Programs] - [Map] - [MAP].


MAP is started and network controller on the network are detected according to the MAP settings.
When a network controller is detected, your default Web browser is started and a list of the usable network controllers is displayed.

When you select the desired network controller on the Web browser screen, the [Main page] of the
Web utility is displayed.
z If proxy settings are set for your Web browser, MAP may not be able to initiate Web Utilities. For details, check with
your network administrator.
z This is not displayed unless the computer's TCP/IP is set correctly.

548

VI Network Chapter 19 Using Utilities

VI Network

Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer


(Windows 95/98/Me only)

This chapter explains the settings required for printing with a Windows 95/98/Me computer and
the copier connected in an IP Peer-to-Peer network.

20-1. IP Peer-to-Peer ................................................................................550


20-2. Preparation for Peer-to-Peer printing............................................551
20-3. Print controller TCP/IP settings .....................................................552
20-4. Computer TCP/IP settings ..............................................................553
20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting ........................................554
20-6. Installing a printer driver ................................................................564

549

20-1. IP Peer-to-Peer
Peer-to-Peer is a network configuration in which the client computers are connected directly to each other
without a server at the center of the network. Peer-to-Peer connections are used to configure a small-scale
network with a few computers.
This printer can send print jobs directly to the computers making up the Peer-to-Peer network without going
through a dedicated server. This is called [Peer-to-Peer] printing.
z Peer-to-Peer printing can be set and executed with Windows 95/98/Me.

550

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-2. Preparation for Peer-to-Peer printing


The computer and network controller are prepared with the following procedure.

An IP address is assigned to the network controller.


Refer to [IP address settings], (

Page 455)

A Web utility or the copier LCD screen is used to make the network controller TCP/IP
settings.
Refer to [Print controller TCP/IP settings], (

The computer TCP/IP settings are made.


Refer to [Computer TCP/IP settings], (

Page 552).

Page 553).

The [IP-P2P] is installed from the user software CD.


Refer to [IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting], (

Page 554).

The [printer driver] is installed.


Refer to [Installing a printer driver], (

Page 564).

551

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-3. Print controller TCP/IP settings


To execute IP Peer-to-Peer printing, the network controller TCP/IP settings must be complete.
z For details on making the network controller TCP/IP settings, refer to [Enable TCP/IP] (

552

Page 466).

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-4. Computer TCP/IP settings


When executing IP Peer-to-Peer printing, the computer sending the print instructions must use TCP/IP as its
communications protocol.

Communications protocol check method

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Control panel].


The [Control Panel] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Network] icon.


The [Network] screen is displayed.

Ensure that the [Configuration] tab [The following network components are installed] column is [TCP/IP].
z If the [The following network components are installed] column is not [TCP/IP], add TCP/IP, referencing the help files
for your OS as necessary.

Select [TCP/IP], then click the [Properties] button.


The [TCP/IP] screen is displayed.

Ensure the communications with TCP/IP are enabled.


z For details on the current network settings and necessary information, check your network administrator.

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Network] screen.

If an inappropriate IP address or other parameter is set, it can obstruct the entire network. Make the network settings in consultation with the network administrator.

553

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting


This explains the software [IP Peer-to-Peer] required for executing Peer-to-Peer printing.

IP Peer-to-Peer installation
The IP Peer-to-Peer software is included on the [User Software CD].

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

2
3
4

Put the IP-422 [User Software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.
Select the CD-ROM with Windows Explorer and display the contents of the
[\English\NetUtil\IP-P2P] folder.
Double click [Setup.exe].
The setup program is started and the [Welcome] screen is displayed.

Check the contents of the screen, then click the [Next ] button.

The [Installation Notes] screen is displayed.

554

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting

Click the [Yes] button.

[Choose Destination Directory] screen will appear.

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Select Program Folder] screen is displayed.


z In the default setting, [c:\ProgramFile\IP-P2P] is selected. To change the installation destination, click [Browse]
then specify the desired installation destination.

Click the [Next ] button.

The necessary files are copied to the hard disk and the [IP-Peer to Peer Settings] screen is displayed.

555

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting


z For details on displaying the [IP-Peer to Peer Settings] screen, refer to [IP Peer-to-Peer settings] (
557).

Page

Click the [OK] button.

The [Printers] window is displayed.


z For details on displaying the [IP-Peer to Peer Settings] screen, refer to [IP Peer-to-Peer settings] (
557).

Page

Deleting IP Peer-to-Peer

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Control Panel].


The [Control Panel] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.


The [Add/Remove Programs Properties] screen is displayed.

From the list, select [IP-P2P], then click the [Add/Remove] button.
A screen for confirming the deletion of the program is displayed.

Click the [Yes] button.


IP Peer-to-Peer is removed from the hard disk.

556

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting

IP Peer-to-Peer settings
This section explains IP Peer-to-Peer settings and various operation methods.

Selecting the network controller for IP Peer-to-Peer printing


Select the network controller used for IP Peer-to-Peer printing. When this setting is made, the network
controller can be selected as the print destination.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Programs] or [Ip-p2p].

IP Peer-to-Peer starts and the [IP-Peer To Peer Setup] screen is displayed.

Input the [Max Hops for] from 0 to 15 to specify the range of the network to be detected.

557

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting


z The default setting is [2].
z If too high a number is specified, this creates much traffic on the network.
z IP Peer-to-Peer broadcasts to detect network controllers on the network. The [Maximum number of hops] sets how
far a range of the network to detect equipment in. If [0] is specified, only the segment in which IP Peer-to-Peer is
started is detected. If [2] is specified, the entire network that can be accessed going through two or fewer routers is
detected.
z [Broadcast] means communications to all the nodes (computers and other terminals on the network) on the network.
z A segment is a section of a larger network delimited by a router.

Specifying the [IP Port].


The same value is set as is specified in [TCP/IP settings] - [Base port number].
z The default setting is [10000].
z For details on making the printer TCP/IP settings, refer to [TCP/IP setup] (

Page 464).

Click the [Printers] button.


The [Printers] dialog box is displayed.

Click the [Find Printers] button.

The network controller information is listed in [Available Printers].


The following information can be checked here. From this information, find the desired network controller.
Unit Names: Name set for the network controller
Unit IP:
Network controller IP address
Port Number: Port number set for the network controller
Description: Network controller
Flags:
Network controller flag on computer
z For details on the network controller settings, refer to [Chapter 17 Summary of Network Functions]
(
Page 446).
z From this screen, network controller information addition, deletion, and other settings can be executed. For details,
refer to [Selecting the network controller for IP Peer-to-Peer printing] (

558

Page 557).

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting

From [Available Printers], select the network controller to use for printing.
z If there is no network controller being used, the network controller information can be added from this screen. For
details, refer to [Network controller name display method selection] (

Page 560).

Click the [Select] button.


The network controller is selected.
z To cancel a network controller selection, click the [Select] button again.

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [IP-Peer To Peer Setup] screen.

Click the [OK] button.


[IP-Peer To Peer Setup] is closed.
The network controller selected here can now be selected as the output destination.
After the network controller has been selected, install the printer driver on the computer. For details,
refer to [20-6. Installing a printer driver] (

Page 564).

Setting the network controller information with IP Peer-to-Peer


The following settings can be made using IP Peer-to-Peer.
Network controller name display method selection
Set the network controller name for when [Print port] is selected with the printer driver settings.
Network controller information addition
Information on the network controller used for printing is added with IP Peer-to-Peer.
Network controller deletion
This deletes the network controller information.
Network controller search
This searches for the network controllers connected to the network.
Flag settings
This sets the [flag] that determine various attributes for the network controllers displayed in the list
resulting from the network controller search.
Deleting network controller information
This deletes network controller information from the list displayed as the result of the network
controller search.

559

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting

Network controller name display method selection

The display method is selected from the [Printer Names] on the [IP-Peer To Peer Setup]
screen.

z For details on displaying the [IP-Peer to Peer Setup] screen, refer to [IP Peer-to-Peer settings] (
557).

Page

The respective contents below are listed as the printer name according to the results of this selection.
Based on Serial Numbers:The network controller serial number
Based on IP Address:
The network controller IP address
Based on DNS Name:
The network controller DNS (Domain Name Service) name
Based on unit name:
The name set for the network controller
z For details on the network controller settings, refer to [Chapter 17 Summary of Network Functions]
(
Page 446).

Click the [OK] button.


The [IP-Peer to Peer Setup] screen is closed.
From now on, the network controller information is displayed on the printer port list with the display
method set with the printer driver.
z If you click the [Cancel] button, the settings are cancelled.

Adding network controller information

This adds network controller information in [Printers] screen.

560

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting


z For details on displaying the [Printers] screen, refer to [IP Peer-to-Peer settings] (

Page 557).

The following information is input to the input columns of the [Printers] screen.
IP Address:The network controller IP address
Name:
The name for selecting the print destination port information when making the printer
driver settings
Port:
[1] added to the value for the base port number set for the network controller
z For details on the network controller settings, refer to [Chapter 17 Summary of Network Functions]
(
Page 446).

Click the [Add] button.


The network controller information is registered.

Click the [OK] button.


The [Printers] screen is closed.
z You can cancel the settings by clicking the [Cancel] button on the [Printers] screen.

Click the [OK] button.


The [IP-Peer To Peer Setup] screen is closed.
z Even if the network controller information added with this procedure is not set, it becomes the [network controller that
can be used for printing] and [default information]. For details, refer to [Flag settings] (

Page 562).

Deleting network controller information

On the [Printers] screen at [Available Printers], you can click the network controller information to delete.

z For details on displaying the [Printers] screen, refer to [IP Peer-to-Peer settings] (

Page 557).

Click the [Delete] button.


The network controller information is deleted from [Available Printers].

561

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting

Network controller search


When you click the [Find Printers] button on the [Printers] dialog box, the network controllers connected to the network are displayed in the list of [Available Printers].

z Here, a list is displayed of the network controllers in the range set in [IP-peer to peer settings] screen [Max Hops for].
To change the search range, return from the [Printers] screen to the [IP-peer to peer settings] screen and change
the [Max Hops for] range.
z If the [Max Hops for] is set too high, this increases traffic on the network.

Flag settings
[Flag] can be set that determine various attributes for the network controllers displayed at [Available
printers].
z The current flags are listed in the [Flags] column of [Available printers].

S flag
Network controllers for which the S flag is set are displayed in the [Available ports] list for the [Add
printer wizard]. Selecting a network controller here makes it possible to use a network printer as a
virtual local printer.
To set the S flag for a network controller, select the network controller for which the flag is to be
set in [Connected printers] on the [Printers] screen, then click the [Select] button. The S flag is
set for this network controller and [S] is displayed in the [Flags] column.
If you click the button with the S flag displayed, this ends the S flag.
P flag
When a network controller has the P flag set, the information is not deleted from the [Connected
printers] screen even if you click the [Delete] button on the [Printers] screen.
To set the P flag for a network controller, select the network controller for which the flag is to be
set in [Connected printers] on the [Printers] screen, then click the button. The P flag is set for
this network controller and [P] is displayed in the [Flags] column.
If you click the [Permanent] button with the P flag displayed, this ends the P flag.
M flag
The M flag set for a network controller shows that network controller was added manually with the
[Printers] screen.
z The [S], [M]. and [P] flags are set for network controllers added manually in [Printers] screen.

562

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-5. IP Peer-to-Peer installation and setting

Deleting network controller information


When you click the [Delete] button on the [Printers] screen, the network controller information displayed in [Available Printers] is deleted.
z Information for a network controller for which the P flag is set, the information is not deleted even if the [Delete] button
is clicked.

563

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-6. Installing a printer driver


This installs the printer driver on the computer executing Peer-to-Peer printing.
z Select the network controller for printing in [IP Peer-to-Peer] before installing the printer driver. For details, refer to [IP
Peer-to-Peer settings] (

Page 557).

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

Put the [User Software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] window is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

564

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-6. Installing a printer driver

Click the [Next ] button.

The screen for selecting the connection method is displayed.

Select [Local printer] tab, then click the [Next ] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Open] screen is displayed.

565

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-6. Installing a printer driver

In [Drives], select the CD-ROM drive. For the folder, double-click the
[\English\Printer\Win9X_Me] folder.

[oemsetup.inf] is displayed as the [File name:].

10

Click the [OK] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

11

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Port] screen.

12

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PCL] is displayed in the [Printers], then click the [Next ]
button.

The screen for selecting the port to be used with the printer is displayed.

566

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-6. Installing a printer driver

13

In [Available ports], select the port (network controller) selected in [IP Peer-to-Peer].

z The name displayed for the network controller depends on the [IP Peer-to-Peer] settings. For details, refer to [Setting
the network controller information with IP Peer-to-Peer] (

14

Page 559).

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

15

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

16
17

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].
Click the [Next ] button.
A screen is displayed asking whether or not you want to print a test print.

567

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

20-6. Installing a printer driver

18

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z A test print means printing a standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in the [Konica IP-422
PCL properties]. (

19

Page 31)

Click the [Finish] button.


The printer driver is installed on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

20

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [Yes] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] folder.
This completes printer driver installation.

568

VI Network
Chapter 20 Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

VI Network

Chapter 21 Using IPX Peer-to-Peer


(Windows 95/98/Me only)

This chapter explains the settings required for printing with a Windows 95/98/Me computer and
the copier connected in an IPX Peer-to-Peer network.

21-1. IPX Peer-to-Peer ..............................................................................570


21-2. Preparation for IPX Peer-to-Peer printing .....................................571
21-3. IPX Peer-to-Peer installation and setting ......................................572

569

21-1. IPX Peer-to-Peer


Windows Peer-to-Peer printing allows Windows 95/98/Me computers to print to the printing system without an
intervening server and without using IP. The main features of the Windows IPX Peer-to-Peer printing are as
follows:
Runs on Windows 95/98/Me "out of the box".
Runs on networks that do not have a NetWare file server, as well as those that do.

570

VI Network
Chapter 21 Using IPX Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

21-2. Preparation for IPX Peer-to-Peer printing


The Peer-to-Peer implementation uses the IPX/SPX stacks that are provided with Windows 95/98/Me. The
IPX Peer-to-Peer provided will establish a connection with the printers supporting IPX Peer-to-Peer, without
using an intermediate file server, whether or not your network uses Novell NetWare.
When configuring the network capabilities for the Windows computer, you must include the [IPX/SPX Compatible Protocol]. If you are not using NetWare, you do not need to activate any NetWare Client application.
This inclusion of IPX/SPX can also be done after initial Windows installation by going to the [Network] setup
function under [Control Panel]. To do this, you will need the Windows CD.

Because IPX Peer-to-Peer uses the IPX/SPX Protocol, Novell operation must remain enabled on the
network interface card, even if traditional Novell printing facilities are not being used. The name of the
IPX Peer-to-Peer printer, as it appears in the Windows Port List, is the same as the Novell Print Server
name, and may be changed by changing the Novell Print Server name using the Web Utilities or MAP
utility.

On power up, the network interface card checks the network to see if there is Novell activity. If there is, it will
use the same frame type and the local network number that it senses. If, in addition, the network interface
card can log on to a file server, it will assume that Novell is normally used and will store this frame type and
new number in NVRAM so that, when it comes up again, it will not have to spend the time sensing (which can
take some time).
However, if the network interface card cannot attach to a file server, it will use the sensed values, but will not
store them.
If the network interface card does not see any Novell activity, it will use 802.2 on 802.3 as a frame type and
will assign itself a network number of 0. The frame type and network number being used is reported on the
Status Page.
If a network interface card is being moved from a site that had active Novell to a site that does not, the unit
should be reset to factory default to clear the frame type and network number information.

571

VI Network
Chapter 21 Using IPX Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

21-3. IPX Peer-to-Peer installation and setting


IPX Peer-to-Peer installation
To install the IPX Peer-to-Peer, perform the following procedure:

Insert the CD-ROM that came with the network interface card into the CD-ROM drive.

From the Windows main window, click on [Start].

Click on [Run].

From [Run], type <CDROM drive>:\IPX-P2P\SETUP.EXE.

Click on [OK].

At the [IPX Peer-to-Peer Setup] screen, click on [Next].


z If setup detected a previous installation of the IPX Peer-to-Peer, it will prompt you to have Setup delete the old driver
and continue the installation procedure. Click on [Yes] or [No].
z Once the IPX Peer-to-Peer is installed, each printer on the network that supports this peer to- peer capability will
appear as a [Port] under [Printer Properties].
z To use the Peer-to-Peer connection, create a logical printer using the [Add Printer Wizard] according to the instructions for the print controller. Set up the printer as a [LOCAL] printer.
z Use the driver that came with the print controller. When the [Add Printer Wizard] asks you to choose the [Port], select
the name of the Peer-to-Peer printer you wish to print to. When you complete the installation, select the [Test Print
Page] option.

Deleting IPX Peer-to-Peer


When uninstalling the IPX Peer-to-Peer, perform the following procedure.

Delete the printer using IPX Peer-to-Peer from the [Printers] folder.

Delete the [IPX-P2P] by using [Add/Delete Applications] from [Control Panel].

572

VI Network
Chapter 21 Using IPX Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

21-3. IPX Peer-to-Peer installation and setting

IPX Peer-to-Peer setup


IPX Peer-to-Peer printing allows you to print to a network printer for networks without a file server or for networks where you do not want to use the network interface card for printing.
Use peer-to-peer printing on Windows 95/98/Me systems. Click on the [IPX-P2P] menu item in Windows to
bring up the [IPX Setup] screen.
An explanation for each field on the screen is described below:

OK:
Accepts changes made to setup and exits the program.

Cancel:
Discards any changes made to setup and exits the program.

Clear:
Clears the [Available Printers] list below. This will not clear any printer marked with the [Permanent]
flag.

Delete:
Deletes the highlighted printer(s) from the [Available Printers] list below. Printers deleted in this fashion
will no longer be listed in the [PORT] listing when adding a printer.
However, this does not actually delete the printer from the network, it only removes it from the list maintained on this computer. The printer may be re-added to the list by selecting the [Find Printers] button
(described below) as long as it remains connected to the network.

Permanent:
Flags the highlighted printer(s) with the [P] flag. Any printer marked with this flag will not be removed
from the [Available Printers] list, even if the printer is physically removed from the network or the [Clear
List] button is selected (described above).

Find Printers:
Initiates a search routine out to the network. This routine will then list all printers found on the network
by their print server name (defined in the printer). The default Print Server Name for a printer is a three
letter identifier and the six digit serial number of the network interface card (e.g., KON_(serial number)).

573

VI Network
Chapter 21 Using IPX Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

21-3. IPX Peer-to-Peer installation and setting

Select:
Flags the highlighted printer(s) with the "S" flag. Only 30 printers may be selected at one time. When
displaying the [PORT] list during the process of adding or changing a printer, only [Selected] printers
will be displayed.

Available Printers:
List of printers that was detected on the network. This list can be cleared using the [Clear List] button
(described above) and this list can be updated or refilled using the [Find Printers] button (described
above).Printers in this list are described with three fields:
Unit Name:
This is the print server name defined in the printing system. The default print server name for a
printing system is a three letter identifier and the six digit serial number of the network interface
card (e.g., KCA_(serial number)).
Description:
Printer's description. This field usually contains the manufacturer's name and the printer's model.
Flags:
[S], selected or [P], permanent. Any printers marked with an [S] flag will be displayed in the [Window's Port] Listing. When displaying the Windows port list during the process of adding or changing a printer, only [Selected] printers will be displayed. Only 30 printers may be selected at one
time.
Any printer marked with a [P] flag will not be removed from the [Available Printers] list, even if the
printer is physically removed from the network or the [Clear List] button is selected.

Add Printers for IPX Peer-To-Peer Printing


You can add printers manually whenever the program cannot find printers automatically because of
router setup or hop count setting. In general, this should not be necessary:
Step 1: Use IPX-P2P to Add Printers

Click on the IPX-P2P menu item in Windows. The [IPX Peer-to-Peer Setup] screen will
appear.

A list of available IPX-enabled printers is displayed after a brief pause while the program
searched the network.

Highlight the printer(s) you wish to have displayed in the Windows Printer Port listing and
click "Select". This will ensure these the printers are included in the Windows Printer Port
listing. You may have a maximum of 30 printers selected at any one time.

Click OK when you have finished selecting all the printers you wish to have displayed in the
Windows Printer Port list.

574

VI Network
Chapter 21 Using IPX Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

21-3. IPX Peer-to-Peer installation and setting


Step 2: Use the Add Printers option in Windows.

Click on the Add Printer button.

Select Local Printer from the menu.

Select the make and model of the printer you want to use. A list of printer ports appears.
Any IPX peer-to-peer printers that have been selected from IPX-P2P Setup will appear in
this list.

Select the IPX printer you want to use.

Complete the remainder of the printer setup procedure as you would normally.

1
2
3
4
5

You may change the printer driver setting at a later time by doing the following:
Right click on the printer driver icon and select properties.
Select the Details tab (it may take up to 15 seconds to access).
Click on the arrow in the box labeled Print to the Following Port.
Select the printer address you wish to use.
Click OK.

575

VI Network
Chapter 21 Using IPX Peer-to-Peer (Windows 95/98/Me only)

VI Network

Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR


(Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

This chapter explains the settings required for printing with LPD/LPR using Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000 or Windows XP

22-1. LPD/LPR ...........................................................................................577


22-2. Preparations for printing with LPD/LPR .......................................578
22-3. Print controller TCP/IP settings .....................................................579
22-4. Windows NT 4.0 settings ................................................................580
22-5. Windows 2000 settings...................................................................587
22-6. Windows XP settings ......................................................................594

576

22-1. LPD/LPR
An LPD (Line Printer Daemon) is a printer daemon (mechanism for executing printing) used with a standard
print server; an LPR (Line Printer Remote) is the protocol for making print requests to a printer daemon.
Printing using this LPD/LPR is possible from computers using Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP as their operating
system.
In printing with LPD/LPR, TCP/IP is used as the communications protocol.

VI Network
577
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-2. Preparations for printing with LPD/LPR


The computer and network controller are prepared with the following procedure.

An IP address is assigned to the network controller.


Refer to [IP address settings] (

Page 455).

The network controller TCP/IP settings are made.


Refer to [Print controller TCP/IP settings] (

Page 579).

The computer TCP/IP settings are made.


Refer to the pages below.
Windows NT 4.0 [Checking the network service](

Page 580)

Windows 2000 [Checking the Unix print service](

Page 587)

Windows XP

Page 594)

[Checking the Unix print service](

The printer port and printer driver is added.


Refer to the pages below.
Windows NT 4.0 [Adding a printer port and installing a printer driver](

Page 581)

Windows 2000 [Adding a printer port and installing a printer driver](

Page 588)

Windows XP

Page 594)

[Adding a printer port and installing a printer driver](

VI Network
578
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-3. Print controller TCP/IP settings


To execute LPD/LPR printing, the network controller TCP/IP settings must be complete.
z For details on making the network controller TCP/IP settings, refer to [TCP/IP setup] (

Page 464).

VI Network
579
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-4. Windows NT 4.0 settings


This section explains how to make the settings with Windows NT 4.0.

Checking the network service


Printing with LPD/LPR requires that there be [Microsoft TCP/IP printing] and [Network service] in [Network
service].

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] [Control Panel].


The [Control Panel] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Network] icon.


The [Network] screen is displayed.

Click the [Services] tab.


The [Network Services:] list is displayed.

Check that [Microsoft TCP/IP Printing] is in the list.


If it is not in the list, add it from the Windows setup CD-ROM.
z For details on how to add a [Network Services], refer to the users manual for the operating system.

VI Network
580
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-4. Windows NT 4.0 settings

Adding a printer port and installing a printer driver


This adds an LPD/LPR printer port and installs its printer driver.

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


z If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights
incorporating those of a Power User.

Put the [User Software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

VI Network
581
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-4. Windows NT 4.0 settings

Select [My Computer], then click the [Next ] button.

The printer port setting screen is displayed.

Click the [Add port] button.

The [Printer Port] screen is displayed.

From [Available Printer Port], select [LPR Port], then click the [New Port] button.

The [Add LPR compatible printer] screen is displayed.

At [Name or address of server providing lpd:], input the IP address assigned to the network controller.

VI Network
582
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-4. Windows NT 4.0 settings

10

For the [Name of printer or print queue on that server], input [PORT1], then click the
[OK] button.
The [Printer Ports] screen is displayed.

11

Click the [Close] button.


The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.
The LPR port (network controller IP address) is added to the [Available ports:].

12

Check that the added port checkbox is checked, then click the [Next ] button.

A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.

13

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

14

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

VI Network
583
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-4. Windows NT 4.0 settings

15

From [Look in:], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Printer\
WinNT_2000_Xp] folder.
[Printer.inf] is displayed as the [File name:].

16

Click the [Open] button.

The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

17

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

18

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PCL] is displayed selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ]
button.

A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

VI Network
584
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-4. Windows NT 4.0 settings

19

Check the printer name.

To change it, input a new printer name.

20

Click the [Next ] button.


The screen for checking whether or not the printer is shared is displayed.

21

To share the printer, select [Shared]; to not share it, select [Not shared].

z To assign a share name to the printer, input the Share name.

22

If necessary, select the substitute driver for the network client.

23

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed asking whether or not you want to print a test print.

24

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

VI Network
585
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-4. Windows NT 4.0 settings


z If there are any files that cannot be deleted because Windows is using them, with the service stopped, log off, then
log on again with the same user name and password. Execute from Step 9 on to delete those files.
(
Page 582)

25

Click the [Finish] button.


The printer driver is installed on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

26

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [Yes] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] folder.
This operation completes the addition of the LPR port and the installation of the printer driver.

VI Network
586
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-5. Windows 2000 settings


This section explains how to make the settings with Windows 2000.

Checking the Unix print service


Printing with LPD/LPR requires that the Unix print services are installed and that they be usable. Check the
settings with the following procedure.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Control Panel].


The [Control Panel] window is displayed.

Double click [Network and Dial-up Connections] icon.


The [Network and Dial-up Connections] window is displayed.

Select [Advanced] [Optional Network Components].


The [Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard] screen is displayed.

Select [Other Network File and Print Services], then click the [Details] button.
The [Other Network File and Print Services] screen is displayed.
If [Print Services for Unix] is not checked in the list, check that and add from the Windows setup CDROM.
z For details on how to add a [Print Services for Unix], refer to the Users Manual for the operating system.

VI Network
587
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-5. Windows 2000 settings

Adding a printer port and installing a printer driver


This adds an LPD/LPR printer port and installs its printer driver.

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


z If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights
incorporating those of a Power User.

Put the [User Software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

VI Network
588
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-5. Windows 2000 settings

Click the [Next ] button.

Select [Local printer].

z Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer] checkbox is not checked.

Click the [Next ] button.


[Select the Printer Port] screen is displayed.

Select [Create a new port], the select [Type] [LPR Port].

VI Network
589
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-5. Windows 2000 settings

10

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Add LPR compatible printer] screen is displayed.

11

12

At [Name or address of server providing lpd:], input the IP address assigned to the network controller.

For the [Server printer name or print queue], input [PORT1], then click the [OK] button.
The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

13

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

14

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

15

From [Look in], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\Printer\
WinNT_2000_Xp] folder.

[Printer.inf] is displayed as [File name].


VI Network
590
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-5. Windows 2000 settings

16

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

17

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

18

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PCL] is displayed selected in [Printer], then click the [Next ]
button.

A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

19

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

20

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].

VI Network
591
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-5. Windows 2000 settings

21

Click the [Next ] button.


The screen for checking whether or not the printer is shared is displayed.

22

To share the printer, select [Share as]; to not share it, select [Do not share this printer].

z To assign a share name to the printer, input the Share name.

23

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test page.

24

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z If there are any files that cannot be deleted because Windows is using them, with the service stopped, log off, then
log on again with the same user name and password. Execute from Step 9 on to delete those files.

25

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

VI Network
592
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-5. Windows 2000 settings

26

Click the [Finish] button.

The [Digital Signature Not Found] screen is displayed.

27

Click the [Yes] button.

The printer driver is installed on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

28

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] folder.
This completes printer driver installation.

VI Network
593
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-6. Windows XP settings


This section explains how to make these settings with Windows XP.

Checking the Unix print service


Printing with LPD/LPR requires that the Unix print services be installed and that they be usable. Check the
settings with the following procedure.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Control Panel] - [Network and Internet Connection].
The [Network and Internet Connections] screen is displayed.

Select [Network connection].


The LAN or High-Speed Internet] screen is displayed.

Select [Advanced] menu - [Optional Networking Components].


The [Windows Optional Networking Components] screen is displayed.

Select [Other Network File and Print Services], then click the [Details] button.
The [Other Network File and Print Services] screen is displayed.
If [Print Services for Unix] is not checked in the list, check that and add from the Windows setup CDROM.
z For details on how to add a [Unix print services], refer to the copiers user's manual for the operating system.

Adding a printer port and installing a printer driver


This adds an LPD/LPR printer port and installs its printer driver.

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


z If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights
incorporating those of a Power User or the like.

Put the [User Software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

VI Network
594
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-6. Windows XP settings

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

Select [Printer Tasks] - [Add a printer].

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

Click the [Next ] button.

The [Local or Network Printer] screen is displayed.


VI Network
595
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-6. Windows XP settings

Select [Local printer attached to this computer].

z Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer] checkbox is not checked.

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Select a Printer Port] screen is displayed.

10

Select [Create a new port], the select [Type of port] - [LPR Port].

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Add LPR compatible printer] screen is displayed.

11

At [Name or address of server providing lpd:], input the IP address assigned to the network controller.

VI Network
596
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-6. Windows XP settings

12

For the [Name of printer or print queue on that server], input [PORT1] then click the
[OK] button.
The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

13

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

14

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

15

From [Look in], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the
[\English\Printer\WinNT_2000] folder.

[Printer.inf] is displayed as the [File name].

16

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

VI Network
597
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-6. Windows XP settings

17

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

18

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PCL] is displayed selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ]
button.

[Name Your Printer] screen is displayed.

19

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

20
21

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].
Click the [Next ] button.
A screen is displayed asking whether or not you want to print a test print.

VI Network
598
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-6. Windows XP settings

22

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z The test print prints the standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in the [Konica IP-422 PCL
Properties].

23

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

24

Click the [Finish] button.

The [Hardware Installation] screen is displayed.

25

Click the [Continue Anyway] button.

The printer driver is installed on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

VI Network
599
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

22-6. Windows XP settings

26

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers and Faxes] screen.
This completes printer driver installation.

VI Network
600
Chapter 22 Settings for Printing with LPD/LPR (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP only)

VI Network

Chapter 23 Using with NetWare

This chapter explains the settings required for using the network controller connected to a network using NetWare.
The setting methods depend on the version of NetWare used, the resource management
methods, etc. Refer to the pages appropriate to your system and make the necessary settings.

23-1. Print controller NetWare settings ..................................................602


23-2. NetWare 3.x......................................................................................603
23-3. NetWare 4.x......................................................................................604

601

23-1. Print controller NetWare settings


The network controller NetWare settings must be complete before the NetWare settings are made.
z For details on the network controller NetWare settings, refer to [NetWare setup] (

602

Page 482).

VI Network Chapter 23 Using with NetWare

23-2. NetWare 3.x


This section explains the setting method for NetWare 3.x.

Before setting NetWare


The printer server name are set from the copier LCD screen [Network settings] or Web Utilities before the
NetWare side settings are made.
z For details on making the NetWare settings using the Web Utilities, refer to the Web Utilities users manual.

NetWare settings
z The setting operations explained can be made only with super-user rights.
z For details on PCONSOLE and the concrete details of the operations described here, refer to the Novell NetWare
users manual.

1
2
3
4
5

Start PCONSOLE and select the file server to use.


Prepare and assign the print queue.
Set the network controller as the printer server.
Set the notice list/password as necessary.
Set the primary file server as necessary.
z If the primary file server on a large network connected to many sites including multiple file servers, it must be defined.
Make the setting using PCONSOLE. For details on PCONSOLE, refer to the NetWare users manual.

When the above settings are complete, switch Off the print controller and copier power, wait 10 seconds, then switch the power back on.
When you start the Copier with the default settings, the network setting list is printed. The file server the
network controller is installed on, the service queue serviced by the file server, and other such information can be seen on this list.

After switching Off the copier main power, if you switch it back on without waiting, the print controller may
not operate normally and errors may be displayed.
In this case, if you switch the copier main power Off again, wait at least 10 seconds or so, then switch the
main power On again, the system will operate normally.

z For details on network setting list, refer to [Printing the network settings list] (
Page 726).
z If the network setting list output method has been changed and it is not printed automatically at startup, use the
Copier control panel to print the network setting list manually. For details, refer to [NIC Config.] (
396).

603

Page

VI Network Chapter 23 Using with NetWare

23-3. NetWare 4.x


This section explains the setting method for NetWare 4.x.

Features of NetWare 4.x


Novell NetWare 4.x has two modes: Novell direct service (NDS) and bindery service emulation (bindery emulation).
These two modes can be executed simultaneously. The printer server can be set to operate in either of these modes.

When NDS is not set correctly on the print server, if bindery service mode does not operate correctly, the
print server card cannot recognize this file server. In this case, if you print the network setting list, the list
will show that the Novell NetWare protocol is not active.

NDS (Novell Directory Service)


NDS makes possible higher-level network control than previous versions of NetWare. NDS basically
manages all integrated network objects.
In principle, for NDS to operate, NDS must be loaded on all NetWare 4.x servers. Therefore, since each
NetWare 4.x server services printing systems, print servers, print queues, and other specified directory
objects, each server is a directory server.
If you have the appropriate rights, you can prepare print server objects. Setting these objects in contexts on the network eliminates the need to setup printer servers on the network servers.
NDS makes possible true enterprise networking based on shared network databases, not physical sites
defined separately. This greatly improves the printer server setup and management efficiency.

604

VI Network Chapter 23 Using with NetWare

23-3. NetWare 4.x


Bindery emulation
NetWare 4.x maintains backward compatibility with 3.x and 4.x print services through bindery simulation.
When saving server/service, user, printing system, gateway, and other information, use the DIB (Directory Information Base). The DIB is a distributed database with which information saved anywhere can
be accessed from anywhere on the network.
The data for 4.x and earlier versions of NetWare is also the same as that in the DIB. However, for those
versions of NetWare, the information is stored in the NetWare bindery.
DIB was designed for flexible accessibility and reliable security. It is divided into partitions for distribution.
This directory uses an object-oriented structure rather than the flat file structure of bindery. This makes it
possible to access the entire network rather than single servers.
This directory realizes backward compatibility with NetWare bindery through bindery simulation. When
bindery emulation is enabled, the directory service accepts bindery requests and responds to them as
though there were a bindery on the NetWare server being accessed.
z The directory is a distributed database divided into partitions. Therefore, the information acquired with bindery
requests is sometimes not on the server accessed.
z NetWare 4.x servers do not operate with binderies, but the application making the bindery request cannot tell the difference.

605

VI Network Chapter 23 Using with NetWare

23-3. NetWare 4.x

NDS settings
NDS settings use the following utilities. Each has its own usage objective.
Web Utilities
Used for setting print server (network controller) context.
z For details on the Web Utilities, refer to the Web Utilities user's manual.

Novell NWADMIN
Used for preparing directory tree, print server, print system, and tree print queue objects.
z The network controller is equipped to support the NetWare utilities (NWADMIN) just by being connected. Therefore,
the NDS administrator can control from one point (print server centralized control).
For details on NWADMIN, refer to the NetWare users manual

PCONSOLE
With NetWare, PCONSOLE can be used instead of NWADMIN. PCONSOLE is used to set such static
print server information as [which queue to service] and [who to notify if a problem occurs].
z For details on NDS PCONSOLE, refer to the NetWare user's manual.

606

VI Network Chapter 23 Using with NetWare

23-3. NetWare 4.x

Bindery emulation settings

This checks the bindery context.


Before connecting a printer server (network controller) to a bindery mode Novell NetWare 4.x server,
check whether or not the NetWare server you are connecting to has a context.
If no bindery context is set, the network administrator must execute the following operations.
Revise the AUTOEXEC.NCF file to add the appropriate SET command, then restart the NetWare server.
Input the SET command from the system console.

Console prompt commands take effect immediately but the autoexec.ncf file definitions do not take effect
until the server is restarted.

When you have checked that the file server has the bindery context, use PCONSOLE to
set the network controller.
z For details on PCONSOLE, refer to the NetWare users manual.

When using bindery mode, only uppercase letters are valid for the NetWare server password.

607

VI Network Chapter 23 Using with NetWare

VI Network

Chapter 24 Using via the Internet


(Windows 2000/XP)

This chapter explains how to use IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) to print data received via the
Internet or an intranet and the settings required for using IPP.

24-1. Internet printing...............................................................................609


24-2. Printer settings................................................................................610
24-3. Windows 2000 settings...................................................................611
24-4. Windows XP settings ......................................................................617

608

24-1. Internet printing


This printing system supports Internet printing using IPP (Internet Printing Protocol).
Internet printing is a printing technology that exchanges print data between a computer and printer at physically separate locations over the Internet or an intranet.
If you are connected over the Internet or an intranet, you can print with print instructions sent from a computer
at a site remote from the printer. With Internet printing, the printer can be used like a fax.
z Internet printing can only be executed on computers running Windows 2000/XP as their operating system.

Router
HUB

Internet

HUB
Router
Printer (Copier)

IPP is a standardized protocol for sending and receiving print data over the Internet or an intranet. IPP is
a protocol based on HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) and can send/receive data through firewalls,
so it makes possible print instructions via the Internet.

609

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-2. Printer settings


This section explains the printer settings required for Internet printing.

Printer TCP/IP settings


To use the Internet printing functions, the network controller TCP/IP settings must be complete.
z For details on making the network controller TCP/IP settings, refer to [TCP/IP setup] (

Page 464).

IPP attribute settings


The IPP attributes are set as necessary.
The IPP attributes are the name, installation location, and other information concerning the printer used for
Internet printing. Pre-registering the IPP attributes makes it possible to check the information concerning the
printer used for Internet printing from a remote site via the Internet.
z For details on IPP attributes and how to set them, refer to the Web utility users manual.

610

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-3. Windows 2000 settings


This section explains how to make these settings with Windows 2000.
z To execute Internet printing, it is necessary that the computer TCP/IP settings be complete, that the computer be
able to connect to the Internet, and that the printer be connected to the Intranet.

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


z If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights
incorporating those of a Power User.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Printers].

The [Printers] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Add Printer] icon.

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

611

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-3. Windows 2000 settings

Click the [Next ] button.

Select [Network printer].

z Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play Printer] checkbox is not checked.

Click the [Next ] button.


[Locate Your Printer] screen is displayed.

Select [Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intranet].

z For the printer IP address section, input the IP address allocated to the network controller. For details on network
controller IP address, refer to [18-4. TCP/IP setup] (

Page 464).

z If the DNS (Domain Name System) is set, the printer (network controller) host name can also be set. For details on
DNS settings, refer to [18-10. DNS setup] (

Page 535).

612

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-3. Windows 2000 settings

10

Input the output printer's URL at [URL].


Input as follows.

http://printer IP address:631/ipp

When a proxy is set with the Web browser, the printer cannot be accessed. For details on proxy settings,
check with your network administrator.

11

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Connect to Printer] screen is displayed.

12

Check the [OK] button.

A screen for checking the printer manufacturer and name is displayed.

13

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

14

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

613

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-3. Windows 2000 settings

15

From [Look in], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the
[\English\Printer\WinNT_2000_XP] folder.

[Printer.inf] is displayed as the [File name].

16

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

17

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

18

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PCL] is displayed selected in [Printer], then click the [Next
] button.

A screen for checking the printer name is displayed.

614

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-3. Windows 2000 settings

19

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

20
21

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].
Check the [Next ] button.
The screen for checking whether or not the printer is shared is displayed.

22

To share the printer, select [Share as]; to not share it, select [Do not share this printer].
z To assign a share name to the printer, input the Share name.

23

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test print.

24

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z The test print prints the standard Windows test page. Test prints can also be executed in the [Konica IP-422 PCL
Properties].
(

Page 48)

615

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-3. Windows 2000 settings

25

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

26

Click the [Finish] button.

The [Digital Signature Not Found] screen is displayed.

27

Click the [Yes] button.

The printer driver is installed on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

28

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers] screen.
This completes printer driver installation.

616

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-4. Windows XP settings


This section explains how to make these settings with Windows XP.
z To execute Internet printing, it is necessary that the computer TCP/IP settings be complete, that the computer be
able to connect to the Internet, and that the printer be connected to the Intranet.

Switch on the power for the computer and start Windows.


z Close down any applications that are running.

Log on with a user name that has administrator rights.


z If you cannot log on with a user name that has administrator rights, log on with a user name that has rights
incorporating those of a Power User or the like.

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Printers and Faxes].

The [Printers and Faxes] screen is displayed.

617

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-4. Windows XP settings

Select [Printer task] - [Add a printer].

The [Add Printer Wizard] screen is displayed.

Click the [Next ] button.

Select [A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer].

z Ensure that the [Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer] checkbox is not checked.

618

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-4. Windows XP settings

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Specify a Printer] screen is displayed.

10

Select [Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home or office network].

Input the output printer URL at [URL].


Input as follows.

http://printer IP address:631/ipp
z For the "Printer IP address section", input the IP address allocated to the network controller.
z For details on network controller IP address, refer to [18-4. TCP/IP setup] (

Page 464).

z If the DNS (Domain Name System) is set, the printer (network controller) host name can also be set.
z For details on DNS settings, refer to [18-10. DNS setup] (

Page 535).

z When a proxy is set with the Web browser, the printer cannot be accessed.
For details on proxy settings, check with your network administrator.

11

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Install Printer Software] screen is displayed.

619

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-4. Windows XP settings

12

Click the [Have Disk] button.

The [Install From Disk] screen is displayed.

13

Click the [Browse] button.

The [Locate File] screen is displayed.

14

From [Look in], select the CD-ROM drive, then double-click the [\English\
Printer\WinNT_2000_XP] folder.

[Printer.inf] is displayed as the [File name].

15

Click the [Open] button.


The display returns to the [Install From Disk] screen.

620

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-4. Windows XP settings

16

Click the [OK] button.

The display returns to the [Add Printer Wizard] screen.

17

Ensure that [Konica IP-422 PCL] is displayed selected in [Printers], then click the [Next ]
button.

The [Name Your Printer] screen is displayed.

18

Check the printer name.


To change it, input a new printer name.

19
20

If you want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [Yes]; if you do
not want to use this printing system as your default printer, select [No].
Click the [Next ] button.
A screen is displayed checking whether or not you want to print a test print.

621

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-4. Windows XP settings

21

To print a test print, select [Yes]; to not print a test print, select [No].

z Test prints can also be executed in the [Konica IP-422 PCL properties].
(

22

Page 91)

Click the [Next ] button.


A screen is displayed announcing that the [Add Printer Wizard] is complete.

23

Click the [Finish] button.

The [Hardware Installation] screen is displayed.

24

Click the [Continue Anyway] button.

The printer driver is installed on the PC and printing of the test page starts.

622

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

24-4. Windows XP settings

25

If the test page is printed correctly, click the [OK] button.

The icon for the installed printer driver is displayed in the [Printers and Faxes] screen.
This completes printer driver installation.

623

VI Network
Chapter 24 Using via the Internet (Windows 2000/XP)

VI Network

Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

This section explains how to configure the network interface card and your network for use
with TCP/IP communication in various UNIX environments. Independent setup and installation
procedures are provided for most popular UNIX systems.

25-1. UNIX printing through TCP/IP ........................................................625


25-2. Printing overview ............................................................................626
25-3. Configuring IP address to the network interface card.................627
25-4. lpd UNIX printing .............................................................................628

624

25-1. UNIX printing through TCP/IP


The TCP/IP capability of the network interface card will also operate with lpr spoolers on other systems, and
with spooler/supervisor capabilities that communicate raw print jobs to the TCP/IP port of the network interface card. This port number is 10001.

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol for network management services. SNMP
is supported for Management Information Base (MIB) II over the IP for the network interface card. This
support allows you to query MIB II to get system information about the network interface card.

The network interface card can support UNIX TCP/IP printing in two modes:
Host-based where a supplied line printer daemon is run on one or more workstations and print data is
communicated to the network interface card via a TCP/IP port.
Printer-based lpd where the print controller appears as a host running a line printer daemon.
Many operating systems provide the option of using host-resident printing or printer-resident printing.
In general, printer-based lpd is easier to use on BSD UNIX systems. This requires an entry in the printcap file
once the network interface card has its IP information. Some UNIX System V systems have restrictions on
support of remote lpd printers, requiring that the host-based lpd approach be used.
Each printing mode has certain advantages over the other mode, as follows:
The host-resident method can print the username and filename on its banner page; whereas the
printer-resident method prints a banner page with the host's name.
The printer-resident method requires you to configure the print controller and the network interface card
only one time, when you install the network interface card; whereas, the host-resident method requires
that a printing daemon be installed on every host that you want to be able to print jobs.

The network interface card will also operate with other host-resident print supervisor/spooler programs
that present a print image to the print controller over a TCP/IP port.

625

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-2. Printing overview


Considering both the host-based and printer-based TCP/IP printing capabilities, the network interface card
works with the following systems:
All UNIX systems that support lpd
System V Rel. 4 (on 386 platforms)
DEC ULTRIX RISC Versions 4.3 and 4.4
DEC OSF/1 Versions 2.0 and 3.0
Solaris:
Version 1.1.3 (SunOS 4.1.3),
Version 2.3 (SunOS 5.3),
Version 2.4, and
Version 2
HP-UX Series 700 and 800 Version 9.01 and Version 10
IBM AIX Version 3.2.5 and Version 4.0
SCO UNIX Version 3.2
AS400

If the systems you are using do not run lpd, refer to "Installing UNIX TCP/IP programs".
The UNIX-TCP/IP Programs on accompanying CD-ROM also include source code so that you can
recompose host-based code for configuring on other System V platforms.

626

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-3. Configuring IP address to the network interface card


Regardless of the printing mode selected, the network interface card must be given the IP address and routing parameters. You can configure the IP address for the network interface card in one of the following ways:
Use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
(
Page 649) Using DHCP
Use arp and ping capability.
(
Page 650) Using arp command (Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP)
Use BOOTP (Internet Boot Protocol).
(
Page 651) Using BOOTP Lite (Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP)
Use reverse ARP (rarp) capability (Ethernet II frame type only).
(
Page 653) Using arp command (UNIX)
Use arp command, MAP (Management Access Program), or BOOTP Lite for Windows.

You can use the BOOTP, rarp, or arp and ping procedures only when the network interface card is in its
default state (when no IP information has been entered).

Depending on the topology, you may need to provide the MAC address of the network interface card. The
MAC address is the 12-character code that is printed on the Status Page each time the print controller and
the main body printer is turned on.
After the network interface card has an IP address, you must use the MAP utility, or other dedicated utilities
(for Windows or Macintosh) to change an IP address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway.

627

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-4. lpd UNIX printing


lpd is an implementation of the standard UNIX line printer daemon that lets you print across a TCP/IP network
without the need to install software on your workstation, with all filtering and banners done by the network
interface card.
Remote printing uses the same commands (lpr, lpq, lpc) as local printing.
The process begins when the lpr call finds the printer on a remote system by looking at the remote (rm) entry
in the /etc/printcap file for that printer.
lpr handles a print job for a remote printer by opening a connection with the lpd process on the remote system
and sending the data file (followed by the control file containing control information for this job) to the remote
system.
The printer-based lpd then filters the data and prints the job according to information contained in the control
file and its own printcap file.
The network interface card lpd recognizes the format of a certain printer emulation and filters the data, if possible, so it can be printed on the printer you specify.
You can indicate to the network interface card lpd what type of print controller it is attached to by either:
Accepting the default port setting (PCL5e, PostScript and other), or
Changing the listed emulations via a standard IP based Web Browser.
The sections that follow give specific lpd setup instructions for various systems.

Setting Up a BSD Remote Printer to Use lpd


To set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the network interface card using printer resident lpd,
add an entry to the /etc/printcap file on your host for each printer you use. Perform the following procedure:

Open the /etc/printcap file.


Make an entry naming the network interface card as the remote host and PORT1 as the remote printer
name. A typical printcap entry is as follows:
<printer_name>\ (for example, lprprinter)
:lp=:\
:rm=<remote_host>:\ (for example, name as entered in /etc/hosts)
:rp=PORT1:\
:sd=/usr/spool/lpd/<printer_name>:
(for example, spool directory on system used to spool data and control
files)
This entry will send jobs spooled at /usr/spool/lpd/<printer_name> to the printer designated
<printer_name> to be printed at PORT 1 (the internal connection to the printer) of the network interface card designated as <remote_host>.

Create the spooling directory. For example, type:


mkdir /usr/spool/lpd/<printer_name>

628

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-4. lpd UNIX printing

To print via the spooler, use the lpr command. Type:


lpr-P <printer_name> < file_name>
Installation and testing are done. You are now ready to print.

Setting Up an AIX version 2.5 Remote Printer to Use lpd


Use the following procedure to set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the network interface
card using the lpd of the network interface card.

At the prompt, type:


#smit spooler <cr>

When a window appears, select [Manage Remote Printers].

When a menu appears, select [Client Services].

Another menu appears, select [Remote Printer Queues].

Another menu appears, select [Add a Remote Queue].

When a window appears, change the values shown to configure the network interface
card.
The values displayed are default values. You must replace the short and long form filter values with
the values shown in the following table.
Data Requested
Example
Name of queue to add
print1
queue Destination
Host printfast
Short Form Filter
/usr/lpd/bsdshort
Long Form Filter
/usr/lpd/bsdlong
Name of remote printer queue PORT1
Name of device to add
print1

Data Description
Name of local printer
NIC IP hostname
Required value
Required value
Network interface card
Name of local queue

After you have supplied all values, press Enter.


You can now print.

629

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-4. lpd UNIX printing

Setting Up an AIX 4.0 System


Use these procedures to install the network interface card in a AIX 4.0 system:

Run SMIT Printer.

Select [Print Spooling].

Select [Add a Print Queue].

Select [Remote].

Use [Standard Processing].

Assign a queue name.

Use the host address of the Network Interface Card for the Remote System.

Use [PORT1] for the queue on the remote system.

Add a description (optional).

10

Press [Enter] to generate.


Installation is complete. Test your printer by executing the following command:
lp -d<queue_name> <file_name>

630

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-4. lpd UNIX printing

Setting Up an HP-UX Remote Printer to Use lpd


Set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the network interface card using the lpd of the network
interface card. To do this:

At the prompt, type:


sam

When a window appears, select [Printer/Plotter Manager].

When the menu appears, select [List printer and plotters].

When a list appears, select [Actions] in the title bar.

From the pull-down menu, select [Add Remote Printer].

When a window appears, add values to configure the network interface card.
See example below.

Data Requested
Printer Name
Remote System Name

Example
myprinter
fastprint

Remote printer

Name PORT1

Description of Input Data


name to be used in lp command
Network Interface Card hostname as in
/etc/hosts
lpd queue name

At the bottom of the screen, select [Remote Printer is on BSD system] from the three
choices available.

Click on the OK button.

Ping the unit to test communications. Type:


ping <IP address of the network interface card>

10

Ping should confirm your IP address with the message:


<IP address of the network interface card> is alive

11

If the connection is confirmed, you can now print.

631

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-4. lpd UNIX printing

Setting Up an AS/400 System to Use lpd


When working with the output queue description (WORKOUTQD), there are several fields that must be
defined for the network interface card to function properly as a remote printer device.
Use the following procedure to define fields for the network interface card to make it function as a remote
printer:

When prompted for the remote system, type INTNETADR so the AS/400 recognizes the
device as an IP device.

Port must be [PORT 1].

Connection type must be [IP].

Internet address must be the IP address of the network interface card.

Destination type must be [OTHER].

6
7

When prompted for transforming SCS to ASCII, type YES to allow the AS/400 do the
character translation.
Manufacturer type and model must be the print driver that goes with your print controller.

632

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-4. lpd UNIX printing

Setting Up a DEC ULTRIX 4.3 RISC or OSF1 Remote Printer


Use the following procedure to set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the network interface
card.

At the prompt, type: lprsetup, then select [add].

Enter a name for your printer, then press [Enter].

"Do you want more information on specific printer types?" Press Enter.
A list of ULTRIX-supported printers is listed.

Type: remote, and press [Enter].

Enter a printer synonym (alias) and press [Enter].

Designate a spooler directory and press [Enter], or accept the default spooler directory
displayed and press [Enter].

Designate a remote system name and press [Enter].

Designate PORT1 as the remote system printer name and press [Enter].

9
10

You are asked to enter the name of a printcap symbol from a displayed list. Type: Q,
and press [Enter].
Your configuration is displayed.
You are asked whether these values are final. Type: Y or N, and press Enter. An example is shown
below.
Printer #7 Symbol
lp (line printer)
rm (remote host)
rp (remote printer)
sd (spooler directory)

Type
STR
STR
STR
STR

Representative Value
Network Interface Card_host
PORT1
/usr/spool/lpd7

633

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-4. lpd UNIX printing

11

Add comments to the printcap file. For example, you can type:
Lois' printer down the hall <Enter>

12

Select exit to save your configuration, then press [Enter].


You are now prepared to print.

Setting Up a SCO UNIX Remote Printer to Use lpd


Use the following procedure to set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the network interface
card using lpd.

At the prompt, enter the mkdev rlp command.

You cannot run mkdev rlp twice. If you have additional printers to be configured, use the rlpconf command.

You are now asked a series of questions. Respond as follows (shown in bold type):
Please enter a printer name: lprprinter1
Is lprprinter1 a remote printer or a local printer? R
Enter remote host name: lprprinter
Confirm the information you entered: Y
Confirm the preceding connection as your system
default: Y
Enter another printer name or quit setup: Q

If necessary, stop and restart your remote daemon.

Using a line editor of your choice, edit the /etc/printcap file and change the:
rp=entry to PORT1.

634

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-4. lpd UNIX printing

Setting Up System V Release 4 and Solaris 2.X to Use lpd


If your system recognizes the LPSYSTEM command, you do not need to install the dedicated utility, Konica's
host-side software. Another option is the admintool if your system supports it.
LPSYSTEM Installation
The following procedure must be executed from the Bourne Shell.
Type: SH then press Enter to enter the Bourne Shell program.
Use the following procedures to install LPSYSTEM:

lpsystem -t bsd < Print server host name in /etc/hosts file >

lpadmin -p <local printername> -s <remote host name or IP address> !PORT1


Your system may want its IP address instead of the remote host name.

Enable <local printername>

Accept <local printername>

635

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

25-4. lpd UNIX printing

Printing on Linux

Start x terminal.

At the command prompt, enter the printtool command.


The Red Hat Print System Manager window opens.

Click the Add button.


The Add Printer Entry window opens.

Choose Remote Unix (lpd) Queue and click OK .


The Edit Remote Unix Queue Entry window opens.

Specify the following:


The printer name
The spooler directory (typically, /usr/spool/lpd/prntr-name)
The IP address of the Network Interface Card (in the Remote Host field)
PORT1 (in In the Remote Queue field)
An input filter (optional)
When you finish, click OK.

Restart the daemon by choosing lpd -> Restart lpd in the Print Server Manager.

636

VI Network Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration

VI Network

Chapter 26 Use with AppleTalk

This chapter explains the settings required for connecting to a network using AppleTalk and
printing from a Macintosh.

26-1. Preliminary procedure for using with AppleTalk .........................638


26-2. Network controller TCP/IP settings ...............................................639
26-3. Network controller AppleTalk settings .........................................640
26-4. Macintosh settings..........................................................................641
26-5. Installing a printer driver ................................................................642

637

26-1. Preliminary procedure for using with AppleTalk


The Macintosh and network controller are prepared with the following procedure.

An IP address is assigned to the network controller.


Refer to [IP address settings], (

Page 455).

The copier control panel or Web utility is used to make the network controller AppleTalk settings.
Refer to [26-3.Network controller AppleTalk settings],(

The Macintosh is set.


Refer to [26-4.Macintosh settings],(

Page 640).

Page 641).

The [printer driver] is installed.


Refer to [26-5.Installing a printer driver], (

Page 642).

638

VI Network Chapter 26 Use with AppleTalk

26-2. Network controller TCP/IP settings


To print using AppleTalk, it is necessary that the network controller TCP/IP settings already be complete.
z For details on making the network controller TCP/IP settings, refer to [18-4. TCP/IP setup] (

639

Page 464).

VI Network Chapter 26 Use with AppleTalk

26-3. Network controller AppleTalk settings


The network controller is set as follows to print with a printer using AppleTalk.
AppleTalk usage
Set the network controller [Use AppleTalk] - [Yes].
z For details on making the [Use AppleTalk] setting, refer to [18-6. AppleTalk setup] (

Page 501).

Printer name settings


This sets the copier (network controller) name (printer name) displayed on the AppleTalk network.
z For details on the [Printer name] setting, refer to [18-6. AppleTalk setup] (

Page 501).

Zone name setting


This sets the name of the [Zone] to which the print controller is connected in the AppleTalk network.
z For details on setting the [Zone name], refer to [18-6. AppleTalk setup] (

640

Page 501).

VI Network Chapter 26 Use with AppleTalk

26-4. Macintosh settings


The TCP/IP and AppleTalk settings are made with the Macintosh from which you will print.

From the [Apple] menu, select [Control panels] - [TCP/IP].


The [TCP/IP] screen is displayed.

As [Connect via], select [AppleTalk (Mac IP)].


The AppleTalk settings screen is displayed.

Check that the [Configure] is set to [Using Mac IP server].

As [Connect via], select [Ethernet ].


The Ethernet settings screen is displayed.

Select the [Configure] items corresponding to the settings for the network the Macintosh is connected to and set the IP address, subnet mask, etc.
z For details on network settings, check with your network administrator.

Click the close button at the top left of the screen.


The [Save changes to current configuration] message is displayed.

Click the [Save] button.


The AppleTalk and Ethernet settings are saved.

641

VI Network Chapter 26 Use with AppleTalk

26-5. Installing a printer driver


The Adobe PostScript driver is installed from the PostScript option User software CD onto the Macintosh
you will print from.
z For details on installing the Adobe PostScript driver, refer to [2-7. Using this printing system with a Macintosh]

Page 94).

642

VI Network Chapter 26 Use with AppleTalk

VI Network

Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

This chapter explains the causes of problems that can affect networks and network equipment
and how to solve those problems.

27-1. Troubleshooting network hardware connections ........................644


27-2. MAP troubleshooting ......................................................................645
27-3. NetWare protocol troubleshooting ................................................646
27-4. Using DHCP .....................................................................................649
27-5. Using arp command (Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP) ................650
27-6. Using BOOTP to assign IP Address ..............................................651
27-7. Using rarp to assign IP Address....................................................653
27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs ..................................................655
27-9. Resetting to the factory default .....................................................671

643

27-1. Troubleshooting network hardware connections


Check the network cables.
Check that the 100Base-TX or 10Base-TX network cable connector is connected to the RJ45 connectors on the network controller.
Replace the network cable to see if the problem is the cable.

LEDs showing network controller status


The network controller has two LEDs, one amber and one green.
You can check the status of print jobs in the network controller from the status of these LEDs.
If the status display LEDs show that an error has occurred, notify the network administrator or service representative.
LED status

Printer status

Network controller status

Operating status

Immediately after power


switched on

Self-diagnostics executing

Normal

Waiting print job

Normal operation

Normal

Green LED flashes three


times Lights up

Self-diagnostics completed

Network setting list print

Normal

Amber flashing

Waiting print job

Receiving print job

Normal

Amber lit up

Print job waiting/processing

Normal operation

Normal

Amber off

Waiting print job

No print jobs

Normal

Green LED flashing rapidly

Self-diagnostics executing

RAM chip defect detected

Error

Green LED flashes four times


rapidly Goes out

Self-diagnostics executing

Ethernet hardware
self-diagnostics failure

Error

Amber LED flashes about 10


seconds Goes out
Green LED continues flashing

Flash memory self-diagnostics


executing

Did not pass the check-sum


test

Error

Green LED flashing slowly

Power on completed, then


print job waiting

Printer interface error

Error

Green LED flashing rapidly

Print job waiting

NetWare connection to file


server not possible

Error

Green lit

644

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-2. MAP troubleshooting


If the target network controller cannot be detected from the MAP, check the following points.
Check the network controller network settings.
Check that the MAP settings are correctly executed.
Check that the protocol for the computer using MAP is set correctly.
Check that the Web browser for the computer using MAP is set correctly.
If there is no problem with any of the above points, switch off the main power for the copier, wait 10 seconds,
then switch it back on. Wait about 5 minutes, then execute MAP again.

645

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-3. NetWare protocol troubleshooting


It is recommended that you execute MAP and check the NetWare setup and parameters. If executing MAP
did not solve the problem, check the following items.

NetWare check items


Is the print server registered correctly?
The factory default name is [KCA-(serial number)]. The serial number is written in the network settings
list.
Is a print queue assigned to the printing system?
It is recommended that each print queue be assigned to one printing system connected to the network
controller. If the print queue assigned to the printing system connected to the network controller is also
assigned to another network printer, print jobs may be output on the other network printer.
Is the print controller set to the Remote Other/Unknown type?
If the PCONSOLE or NWADMIN settings are correct, it is possible that the connection between the
printing system and the network is cut.
Switch Off the print controller and the printer itself, then use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN to wait for the
[Not Connected] status message. When you switch the print controller and printer itself back On, the
status changes to [Waiting].

File Server check items


Does the file server have adequate disk capacity? Is it operating?
Is the correct file server related to the printing system?
Use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN to check the relationship.
Do you have the appropriate rights (super-user/administrator rights) to set the print controller?
Are the file server and network controller communicating with each other?
To check these communications, execute the NetWare COM-CHECK utility from any workstation.
Are you logged onto the file server with the appropriate user rights?

646

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-3. NetWare protocol troubleshooting

Workstation check items


Can the workstation connect to the network?
For details, refer to the NetWare users manual.
Is the application set up for printing with the printing system? Is the correct driver being used?
Is the workstation connected to the correct print queue?
Print and check that the workstation is connected to the correct print queue.
Is the print queue assigned to the printing system connected to the network controller assigned to
another printer too?
In this case, jobs may be output on the other printer.
Are jobs active? Are jobs printed?
Use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN to register a sample job directly to the assigned queue.
Is AUTO ENDCAP enabled?
If AUTO ENDCAP is enabled, data is output on the network printer.
Use PRINTCON to check AUTO ENDCAP. If AUTO ENDCAP is disabled, enable it.

Network controller setting check items


If all the hardware connections are good, check the following points.
Use MAP to check the printer server status.
The printer status screen shows the status of the selected print server. The file server status, error contents, and the queue assigned to the printing system are displayed.
It is possible that the print controller is not assigned to a valid print queue.
To send the print job to a valid queue, use CONSOLE or NWADMIN. Then, check that the print job is in
the destination queue.
If there is a changed or new network controller, use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN to check that it is set
correctly.
Check that the printer server name is correctly input [KCA (serial number)].
When the name is changed using MAP, always change the name with PCONSOLE or NWADMIN too
to enable that setting.
Use PCONSOLE Version 1.0 or later to check the printer status.
When upgrading PCONSOLE, ask Novell.

647

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-3. NetWare protocol troubleshooting

Print server/file server/printer check items


If the network controller cannot log onto the file server or cannot process jobs from the file server, check
the following.
Ensure if the network controller is set for the file server. If it not set, set it using PCONSOLE or NWADMIN.
The password assigned to the network controller through PCONSOLE or NWADMIN must match the
password assigned through MAP.
If you change the password stored in the network controller memory, use MAP.
Ensure that the print job is in the print queue and that it is waiting for printing.
To check that print jobs are sent to the printing system, use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN.

Work station and network controller connection check items.


To check that the work station and the network controller are communicating with each other, check the following.
Print a file from the work station and use PCONSOLE or NWADMIN to check that the print job reaches
the print queue.
If printing is possible, the problem is not in the connection between the work station and the network
controller.
When sending data from a work station software application to the printing system, use CAPTURE.
Refer to the NetWare print server manual.
Check that no other printer is taking the print job from the queue before the network controller processes it.
Disable other printers until you have checked the setup of the printing system to which the network controller is connected.

When the connection between the network controller and the


Novell file server is cut
If the connection between the network controller and the file server is cut, reconnection takes about 5-10 minutes. If the connection is not re-established after that long, it is necessary to troubleshoot the error.

When output from a different context is not possible


The network controller does not support printing from contexts other than its installed context. To print from
another context, you must create an alias queue.
For details, refer to the NetWare users manual.

648

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-4. Using DHCP


DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a service that provides methods for assigning and maintaining IP addresses. The network controller can obtain the IP information from this service.
The network controller has the following 2 user-settable variables related to the DHCP functions. These user
settable variables are set with the LCD panel on the copier itself or [Network management] - [TCP/IP settings]
in the Web utility.
DHCP

Specified IP
address

IP address
0. 0. 0. 0

X. X. X. X

Enable

Automatic DHCP setting


(The specified IP address is
invalid.)

Set address
(DHCP does not operate.)

Disable

Automatic DHCP setting

Automatic DHCP acquisition

Enable

The address cannot be acquired


(0. 0. 0. 0)

Set address
(DHCP does not operate.)

Disable

The address cannot be acquired


(0. 0. 0. 0)

Indeterminate operation

Use

Not used

a. When DHCP can be used, if the network controller does not have the specified IP address or
[Enable specified address] is Off, then DHCP is requested when the network controller is reset/the
power is switched On.
b. When DHCP can be used, if the network controller does have the specified IP address and [Enable
specified address] is On, the network controller uses the IP information from the non-volatile memory (NVRAM), DHCP service is not used.
The default factory default is [Use DHCP] On and [Enable specified IP address] On.
If this case, if there is no IP identification information already stored into the non-volatile memory, then
DHCP is required.

If [Do not use DHCP] is set and [Disable IP address] is set, operation cannot be guaranteed. When setting [Disable DHCP], always set [Enable specified IP address].
When DHCP is enabled, if the network controller has the factory default settings, it is necessary to set
(schedule) continued use of the network controller IP address on the DHCP server. If this is not set, the
same address may be set for another host.

649

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-5. Using arp command (Windows 95/98/Me/NT/


2000/XP)
From Windows 95/98/Me MS-DOS prompt or at Windows NT/2000/XP command prompt, you can use the
arp command to assign the IP address to the network interface card. It is necessary that TCP/IP is set up correctly on the computer that will execute the arp command. Perform the following procedure:

1
2

At Windows 95/98/Me, select [MS-DOS prompt] from the [Start] menu. At Windows NT/
2000/XP, select [Command prompt] from the [Start] menu.
Execute the arp command. For example, if the MAC address of the network interface
card is 00:11:22:33:44:55 and the IP address to assign is 192.168.0.128, then input as
shown below, and then press [Enter].
(Example: C:\>arp -s 192.168.0.128 00-11-22-33-44-55

Execute the ping command for the assigned IP address. In this case no response is
returned from the network interface card.
(Example: C:\>ping 192.168.0.128

Turn off the main power supply to the print controller and the main body printer, then
turn it back on.
A Status Page will be output. Ensure that the IP address is correctly set in the list. Or, when about 5
minutes have passed after having restarted the print controller and the main body printer using the
ping command, ensure that the network interface card responds correctly. The ping command is also
executed at Windows 95/98/Me MS-DOS prompt or Windows NT/2000/XP Command prompt. An
example of executing the ping command is shown below:
(Example: C:\>ping 192.168.0.128

650

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-6. Using BOOTP to assign IP Address


The BOOTP daemon is a native TCP/IP option for configuring the IP address of a non-disk network device.
To communicate the IP address, use the following procedure:

1
2
3
4

Turn off the print controller and the main body printer.
Log in as superuser on a host that is attached on the same network segment as the
print server. Confirm the subnet mask is the one you intend to use. However, if the
server resides on another subnet, complete this procedure to store the IP address in
the print server.
Find the MAC address of the network interface card. The address is printed on the Status Page each time you turn the print controller and the main body printer on.
Edit the hosts file (usually /etc/hosts) or use NIS or DIS to add the IP address and node
name of the network interface card. Refer to the network administrator for the IP
address. For example, a network interface card named printfast with an IP address of
192.9.200.200 has the following entry:
192.9.200.200 printfast

5
6

Stop the BOOTP daemon if it is running.


Edit the /etc/bootptab file and add the following information:
Konica_host:\
:ht = hardware type:\
:ha = ethernet address:\
:ip = IP address:\
:sm = subnet mask:\
:gw = gateway address:

Example, for an RFC 1048 system:


printfast:\
:ht = ether:\
:ha = 0040AF03AF6E:\
:ip = 192.9.200.200:\
:sm = 255.0.0.0:\
:gw = 192.9.200.10:\

(If running SCO UNIX, add:)


:vm = rfc1048:

The same information uses the following format on an RFC 951 system:

host

htype

haddr

iaddr

bootfile

printfast

00:40:af:03:af:6e

192.9.200.200

default boot

Start the BOOTP daemon by typing:


bootpd -s

651

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-6. Using BOOTP to assign IP Address

8
9
10

Ensure the print controller to verify that the network interface card is connected to the
network. Turn on the print controller and the main body printer.
Wait until the print controller and the main body printer power up and finish initializing
to allow enough time for the IP address to become known and to be saved in nonvolatile memory. The network interface card should re-initialize itself.
After the network interface card has re-initialized, send a ping command to verify that
the print server obtained its IP address. For example:
ping 192.9.200.200

If the print server has the address, a confirmation message displays:


192.9.200.200 is alive

11
12

Remove your changes to the /etc/bootptab file.


Stop the BOOTP daemon and, if you want it to run, restart it.

652

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-7. Using rarp to assign IP Address


The Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (rarp) allows network devices to query a server for their IP
addresses on start-up. This procedure requires a workstation with a rarp server.

To store the IP address, use the following procedure:

1
2
3
4

Turn off the print controller and the main body printer.
Log in as superuser on the rarp server.
If the server resides on another subnet, complete this procedure to store the IP
address in the print server. Reconnect the print server anywhere on the network.
Find the MAC address of the network interface card. The address is printed on the Status Page when you power on the print controller and the main body printer.
Edit the hosts file (usually /etc/hosts) or use NIS or DIS to add the IP Address and node
name of the network interface card.
Refer To the network administrator for the IP address. For example, a network interface
card with the name of printfast has the following entry:
192.9.200.200 printfast

Edit the /etc/ethers file or use NIS or DIS to add the MAC address.
To continue the example, for the printfast card with an MAC address of
00:40:c8:00:00:ff, make the following entry:
0:40:c8:0:0:ff printfast

6
7
8

If the rarp daemon is running, stop it and restart it. Verify that the daemon is running.
Ensure the print controller to see that the network interface card is connected to the
network. Turn on the print controller and the main body printer.
Wait until the print controller and the main body printer power up and finish initializing
to allow enough time for the IP address to become known and to be saved in nonvolatile memory. The network interface card should then reset itself.

653

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-7. Using rarp to assign IP Address

After the network interface card has reset, send a ping command to verify that the print
server obtained its IP address. For example:
ping 192.9.200.200

If the print server has the address, a confirmation message displays:


192.9.200.200 is alive

10
11

Remove your changes to the /etc/ethers file.


Stop the rarp daemon and, if you want it to run, restart it.

654

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs


The accompanying CD-ROM provided with the network interface card includes installation scripts, UNIXTCP/IP Programs, for various UNIX systems.
This section describes how to install UNIX-TCP/IP Programs on the network interface card for any of the following operating systems:
DEC ULTRIX 4.3 RISC
System V Rel. 4
Solaris (Ver. 1.x, 2.x)
SCO UNIX
OSF1/ALPHA
IBM AIX
HP-UX
Once the network interface card has its IP information loaded, the following steps are necessary for host-side
TCP/IP printing:

1
2
3

Load the UNIX-TCP/IP Programs on your workstation. It is presented as a tar file on the
accompanying CD-ROM.
Run the appropriate installation script, if available.
Complete the configuration for your operating system.

655

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Loading the UNIX-TCP/IP Programs


The following procedures are only necessary when using the supplied host-based lpr capability.
Loading the software is not necessary if printer-based lpr is used.

1
2
3

Log in as superuser to the system that spools directly to the print server.
Insert the CD-ROM in to the host CD-ROM drive.
Go to or create the directory in which you want to install the UNIX-TCP/IP Programs.
For example:
mkdir /usr/PSC_install

If you already have a printing system at your site and you are now installing another one, delete the files
in the installation directory not (/usr/Konica). If these files remain, they can prevent the installation of a
subsequent network interface card.

Use the tar command to load the UNIX-TCP/IP Programs from the accompanying CDROM. Choose your UNIX version from the example of the following table, or if not
shown, consult the main page for your system:
UNIX Version

Example

BSD/ULTRIX/AIX/SCO
System V
System V/Solaris 2.3

tar -xvf/dev/rfd0
tar -xvf/dev/rdsk/f13ht
tar -xvf/dev/rCDROM

The device name varies depending on the computer and its peripheral designations. The first BSD
floppy device is often called rfd0.

After performing the tar, the system will display a list of files of the network interface
card copied by the tar. At this point, go to the appropriate section in this manual for
instructions on running the installation script on your system.

656

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Filters
There will be certain options in executing the script for various systems.

PostScript UNIX Printing


The installation script can create an entry in the /etc/printcap file for the print controller and the network
interface card:
ASCII, PCLfiles
If your printing system is not a PostScript printer, the install script uses an input filter (infilter) that supplies CR/LF translation to print ASCII files on a PCL printer.
If your printing system is a PostScript printer, your printcap file will reference psfilter which offers easy
ASCII-to-PostScript conversion. Normal PostScript format files are not affected. Proprietary and public
domain filters are available for broader filtering capabilities.

PSBanner
The network interface card ships with an input filter called psbanner, an output filter to print PostScript
banners.
You may change infilter or outfilter entries in the /etc/printcap file.
The following is a sample printcap entry using these filters:
<print_name> | Konica Print Server printer:\
:lp=/dev/nic/<printer_name>:\
:if=/usr/nic/psfilter:\
:of=/usr/nic/psbanner
:sd=/usr/spool/<printer_name>:

657

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Installing and Printing on Ver. 1 Solaris and OSF1 Systems

Run the Installation script by typing: nicinst.


The script automatically downloads the correct network interface card utilities for your particular system and prompts you for information as needed.

2
3
4

What is the node name of the network interface card?


Type the node name entered in /etc/hosts.
For example, type: printfast, then press Enter.

What is the printer name? Type desired printer name, then press Enter.
The screen displays install script information you provided, for example:
Node name of the Konica Print Server: printfast
Printer name to be used: <printer_name>
The printer is attached on: PORT1

When asked to OK this configuration, type yes or no, then press Enter.

The script creates a printcap entry for the printer just configured.
The screen displays the entry and asks if you want the script to append it to your /etc/
printcap file. Refer To below for a sample printcap file.
Type yes or no, then press Enter.
If you type no, you may perform manual edits.

In your /etc/printcap file, be sure not to change the name of the device given the network interface card in Step 2. You must reference the same lp entry you wrote on the lp
command line of the printcap file. For example:
<printer_name> | Konica Print Server printer:\
:lp=/dev/<printer_name>:\
:if=/usr/nic/infilter:\
:sd=/usr/spool/<printer_name>:

Except for the first line, all printcap entries must be prefaced with a tab.

The Installation script creates a spool directory in /usr/spool and starts the daemon for
the newly configured printer.
It also displays the path used in case you need to restart the daemon.
For example:
/usr/nic/nic_print /dev/nic/<printer_name> printfast 10001 &

658

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Run the ps command so that you can view all your lpd processes.
Type: ps -ax | grep lpd

To stop ALL printing, use the kill command on your lpd processes.
Type: kill -9 <Process ID>

Restart the daemon.


Type: /usr/lib/lpd

10

Installation for the system is completed.


When prompted to configure additional printers:
Type: yes or no, then press Enter.

It is recommended that you ping the network interface card to test communications.

659

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Installing and Printing on DEC ULTRIX 4.3 System

1
2

Run the Installation script by typing: nicinst.


The script automatically downloads The correct the network interface card utilities for
your particular system and prompts you for information as needed.
What is the node name of the network interface card?
Type the node name entered in /etc/hosts. For example,
type printfast, then press Enter.

What is the printer name?

The screen displays your install script information, for example:

Type the desired printer name, then press Enter.

Node name of the network interface card: printfast


Printer name to be used:
<printer_name>
The printer is attached on:
PORT1

You are asked to OK this configuration. Type yes or no, then press Enter.

The script creates a printcap entry for the printer just configured.
The screen displays the entry (refer to sample printcap file below) and asks if you want
the script to append it to your /etc/printcap file.
Type yes or no, then press Enter. Type no to perform manual edits.
<printer_name> | Konica Print Server printer:\
:lp=/dev/<printer_name>:\
:if=/usr/nic/infilter:\
:sd=/usr/spool/<printer_name>:

Installation for the system is completed. When prompted to configure additional printers, type yes or no, then press Enter. It is recommended that you ping the network
interface card to test communications.

Like all BSD systems, ULTRIX uses the /etc/printcap file to configure a printer. The interface to the installation script is the same for all BSD systems, however, the printcap entry is different.
If you use the printcap entry generated automatically by the installation script, this will be invisible to you.

660

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Installing and Printing on HP/UX System

1
2

Run the Installation script by typing: nicinst.


The script automatically downloads the correct network interface card utilities for your
particular system and prompts you for information as needed.
What is the node name of the network interface card?
Type the node name entered in /etc/hosts. For example,
type printfast, then press Enter.

3
4

What is the printer name?


Type the desired printer name, then press Enter.
Your screen displays your install script information, for example:
Node name of the Konica Print Server: printfast
Printer name to be used: <printer_name>
The printer is attached on: PORT1

When asked to OK this configuration, type yes or no, then press Enter.

The script starts the daemon for the newly configured printer automatically. It also displays the path used should you ever need to restart the daemon. In the following example, the path would be:
/usr/nic/nic_print /dev/Konica/printer_name printfast 10001 &

This example reflects names supplied to the script earlier.

When the installation script is completed, you must configure the printer and make it
known to the lp system. The HP/UX lp system uses the lpadmin maintenance command
to configure a printer (there is no /etc/printcap file).
Use the following specific commands to configure the printer:
lpadmin -p printer_name -v /dev/nic/printer_name
enable printer_name
accept printer_name

Refer To HP's alternative SAM method for configuring the printer on the next page.

661

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Using the SAM Program to Configure the Printer


HP supplies the sam program as an alternative method for configuring the printer. The printer name must be
the same as the one you entered during the network interface card installation.
When using sam, specify everything as if the printer were directly connected to /dev/lprprinter/printer_name.
The software installed with your HP system can satisfy most of your printing needs. HP supplies ASCII-toPostScript filters, and the system will invoke the filters automatically if you define the content type of the
printer as PostScript.
The HP/UX lp system also supplies interface scripts that produce PostScript banners. Use the lpfilter command to define new filters and content types if necessary.
The full power and flexibility of the lp print service is now available to you. The fact that you are printing
across the network is completely transparent.

662

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Installing and Printing on System V (Solaris Ver. 2)/System V


Rel. 4 386-based Machine
Installation and setup is exactly the same for System V Solaris and SVR4 i386-based machines.
Solution uses a network direct filter called nicfilter. The system invokes nicfilter directly from the printer interface file.
After completing the software download in Loading the Software, you must configure the printer and make it
known to the lp system.

1
2

Run the Installation script by typing: nicinst.


The script automatically downloads the correct the network interface card utilities for
your particular system and prompts you for information as needed.
Select your system by choosing one of the following options:
1) AT&T/SVR4; 386
2) SCO UNIX System V
3) None of the above
Type 1, 2, or 3, then press Enter.

You have now installed TCP/IP on the Konica Print Server.


Copy your interface file.
(/usr/nic is a good place to keep your copy).

Edit the printer interface program this printer uses to redirect output to the Konica
Print Server. Then, configure your printer using lpadmin.

In most cases you would use the default interface script named standard (usually found in the /usr/spool/lp/
admins/lp/model directory).
If you wish to use an interface tuned to a specific printer, you must have a copy of the interface file for the port
you want to initialize. For example:
cp /usr/spool/lp/model/standard /usr/nic/port1_interface
Most Version 2 Solaris machines have a shell variable called FILTER that can be changed to invoke nicfilter.
A typical example is:
FILTER=" /usr/nic/infilter | /usr/nic/nicfilter \
PSC_name 10001 ${nobanner} \
${user_name} ${request_id} ${files} "
You must specify the network interface card name (PSC_name) and the port of the network interface card
(10001) indicated above to enable the nicfilter to connect to the Konica Print Server unit. The name must be
the same as the one you entered in /etc/hosts for this network interface card.
The remaining arguments are optional. The nicfilter uses them to produce a high quality banner. The lp print
service user name, request id, file names and options always pass to the interface file. They will be available
in any interface script as shell variables, although they may have different names.
If you disable banners in the lp command, the system will set the ${nobanner} option to yes. This will suppress the network interface card banner generation.
If you do not define the FILTER shell variable in your interface file, you can usually modify it to pipe data to
nicfilter. The simplest way to accomplish this is to enclose the entire script in parentheses and pipe it to nicfilter, using the arguments described above.

663

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs


If you wish to use the banner generated by the interface file, simply omit the last four arguments.

These arguments are shell variables from the interface file. They may have different names (names
used above are from the standard interface file supplied with most Version 2 and i386 systems).

664

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Installing and Printing on SCO UNIX System


Installation and setup is similar for HP/UX and SCO UNIX systems.
The network interface card solution uses a network direct filter called nicfilter. The system invokes nicfilter
directly from the printer interface file.
After completing software download in Loading the software, you must configure the print controller + network interface card and make it known to the lp system. Use the following steps:

1
2

Run the Installation script by typing: nicinst.


The script automatically downloads the correct Konica Print Server utilities for your
particular system and prompts you for information as needed.
Select your system. Choose one from these options:
1) AT&T/SVR4; 386
2) SCO UNIX System V
3) None of the above
Type 1, 2, or 3 and press Enter.

What is the node name of the Konica Print Server?


Type the name assigned in the /etc/hosts file, then press Enter.
For example, type: printfast

4
5

What is the printer name for this Konica Print Server-linked printer?
Type a printer name, then press Enter.
The screen displays your install script information. For example:
Node name of the Konica Print Server: printfast
Printer name to be used: <printer_name>
The printer is attached on: PORT1

Do you want to accept this configuration? Type yes or no, then press Enter.

The script automatically starts the daemon for the newly configured printer. It also displays the path used should you ever need to restart the daemon. In the preceding
example, the path would be:
/usr/nic/nic_print /dev/nic/printer_name printfast 10001 &

665

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs


This example reflects names supplied to the script earlier. When the installation script is complete, you must
still configure the printer and make it known to the lp system.
The SCO UNIX lp system uses the lpadmin maintenance command to configure a printer (there is no /etc/
printcap file).
The specific commands to do this are:
lpadmin -p printer_name -v /dev/nic/printer_name

Your host may require you to specify the model by using the -i command.
enable printer_name
accept printer_name

You can also use other options for the lpadmin command. Refer To your system documentation for details.
Note that the printer name must be the same as the one you entered during Konica Print Server installation.
The software installed with your SCO system can satisfy most of your printing needs. SCO supplies ASCII to
PostScript filters and the system will invoke them automatically if you define the content type of the printer as
PostScript.
The SCO UNIX lp system also supplies interface scripts that produce PostScript banners. Use the lpfilter
command to define new filters and content types if necessary. The full power and flexibility of the lp print service is now apparent. Your printing across the network is completely transparent.

666

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Installing and Printing on AIX RISC System/6000


The AIX printing subsystem is driven by the qdaemon program.
The qdaemon uses configuration information stored in the /usr/lpd/qconfig file to manage queues and route
jobs to the proper devices. This information includes entries for each virtual printer and physical device
known to the system.
An AIX virtual printer is simply a high level software view of a data stream, queue, and device that controls
how a given job will be processed. A different virtual printer should be defined for each data stream that a real
printer supports. For example, you would use different virtual printers for PostScript and PCL jobs even
though they are destined for the same physical printer.
Configuring the print controller and the network interface card on an AIX system approximates configuration
of a local printer as closely as possible. The only difference is that the physical device associated with your
Konica Print Server printer must be a named pipe used by the print daemon to route data to the Konica Print
Server.
The following procedure shows the most straightforward way to add a printer to your system:

1
2

Run the Install script by typing: nicinst.


The script automatically downloads the correct Konica Print Server utilities for your
particular system and prompts you for information as needed.
What is the node name of the Print Server unit?
Type the node name entered in /etc/hosts, for example,
type: printfast, then press Enter.

What is the printer name?


Type: the desired printer name, then press Enter.

The screen will display the install script information you provided, as for example:
Node name of the Konica Print Server: printfast
Printer name to be used: <printer_name>
The printer is attached on: PORT1

When asked to OK this configuration, type yes or no, then press Enter.

5
6

Configure a virtual printer using printer_name as the physical device, where


printer_name is the same printer name chosen during install.
Use the following command to shut down the qdaemon and stop all printing:
stopsrc -s qdaemon

667

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Edit /etc/qconfig to change the special file for device printer_name


from:/dev/printer_name
to:/dev/nic/printer_name.

Restart the daemon with:


startsrc -s daemon

The installation script creates the named pipe and starts the supplied print daemon using the printer name
and Konica Print Server information you supplied.
Since the AIX System Management Interface Tool (SMIT) cannot accept a named pipe as a printer device,
the installation script creates a null character device in /dev/printer_name.

668

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

Virtual Printer Commands


By entering the device name printer_name for configuration purposes, virtual printers can be added either
through SMIT or through the mkvirprt command.
During this process you also select a particular printer type for the new printer, which inherits the set of predefined attributes for that printer type.
In most cases, this set of attributes will be sufficient, but it can be changed either through SMIT or by using
the chvirprt command. If you need to make more extensive changes on your printer, refer to the AIX RISC
System/6000 documentation for information.
Before you edit the files, be sure that the following daemon is running:
/usr/nic/nic_print /dev/nic/printer_name printfast 10001 &
Use the following procedures to add or change virtual printers:

Run nicinst.
When prompted, enter information for the following questions:

Nodename (host name in the /etc/hosts file)


Printer name
Unit type
Port number - Enter 1 for parallel port 1

Answer y to accept the configuration and n when prompted to configure another


printer.

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

At the prompt, type smit, then press Enter.


Choose Devices.
Choose Printer/Plotter.
Choose Manage Local Printer Subsystem.
Choose 1. Printer or Plotter attached to Host.
Enter the Device name.
Use the same name entered during the install for printer name.
For Type of Printer, enter a number from the printers list, then press Enter.
Header pages wanted? Type n for none.
Trailer pages wanted? Type n for none.
Enter Print Queue name. Type ! to bypass configuration.
Should this be the default queue?
Enter y for yes or n for no, then press Enter.

669

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-8. Installing UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

13
14

Exit smit.
Type cd/etc, then press Enter.
After the virtual printer has been added, there will be a stanza in /etc/qconfig for device
printer_name that looks like the following:
printer_name:
file=/dev/printer_name
backend=/usr/lpd/probe

Edit /usr/qconfig and change the following:


file=/dev/printer_name to file=/dev/nic/printer_name

15
16

Type stopsrc -s qdaemon.


Type startsrc -s daemon. Now you can print using the lp command.

AIX Print Commands


The AIX lp command works slightly differently from the lp command for other System V Release 4 systems. The following lp commands can be used to print files:
lp -d <queue_name> <filename> or
lp -d <queue_name>:<device_name> <file_name>

670

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

27-9. Resetting to the factory default


All the parameters set on the network controller can be initialized.
If the cause of the network error cannot be specified, reset the network controller settings.
z For details on initializing the network controller, refer to [Factory default] (

671

Page 540).

VI Network
Chapter 27 When There Is Trouble on the Network

VII Appendix
This volume covers the product specifications and basic troubleshooting.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting............. 673


Chapter 29 Appendix......................... 676

672

VII Appendix

VII Appendix

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains solutions for when trouble occurs during use of this equipment.
If the methods explained here do not solve the problem, contact your service representative.

28-1. When trouble occurs in this printing system ...............................674

673

28-1. When trouble occurs in this printing system


If trouble occurs in this printing system, first check the following basic elements.

Check that the printing system is correctly functioning.


Check that the copier and computer power are on and that the cables are correctly connected.
Check the contents of the problem for the information displayed on the control panel LCD screen.
If possible, print a [Test Page] and check the contents of the current settings.
z For information on the method for printing the test Page, refer to [Checking printing] (

Page 99).

Check the LED that shows the status of the network controller.
z For details on the LEDs showing the status of the network controller, refer to [LEDs showing network controller
status]
Page 675).

Check the print controller status.


This checks the current status of the control panel LCD screen.
On the LCD screen, touch the [JOB LIST] to check the status of jobs.

Checking from the computer


For Windows, you can check the status of printing instructions executed from the computer using the
following procedure.

With the computer from which the printing was executed, select taskbar [Start] - [Settings] [Printers].
The printer screen is displayed.

Double-click the icon for the IP-422 driver.


The print status screen is displayed.
If there is a job being processed or not yet output, information about it is displayed in the screen.

If possible, print a list of the network settings.


If it was possible to print this list, check which protocol can be used and whether or not it is operating.
z For details on the network setting list, refer to [29-10. Printing the network settings list] (

Page 726).

Check if other users can print.


If other users using the same network OS cannot print either, refer to the Windows user's manual.

674

28-1. When trouble occurs in this printing system

Switch off the main power for the copier, wait about 10 seconds, then switch the power
back on again.
If this does not solve the problem, refer to [Chapter 25 UNIX Configuration] (
and check the cause of the problem.

Page 624)

After switching Off the Copier main power, if you switch it back on without waiting, the print controller
may not operate normally and errors may be displayed.
In this case, if you switch the Copier main power Off again, wait at least 10 seconds or so, then switch
the main power On again, the system will operate normally.

LEDs showing network controller status


The network controller has two LEDs, one amber and one green.
You can check the status of print jobs in the network controller from the status of these LEDs.
If the status display LEDs show that an error has occurred, contact the network administrator or service
representative.
LED status

Printer status

Network controller status

Operating
status

Immediately after power


switched on

Self-diagnostics executing

Normal

Waiting print job

Normal operation

Normal

Green LED flashes three


times Lights up

Self-diagnostics completed

Network setting list print

Normal

Amber flashing

Waiting print job

Receiving print job

Normal

Amber lit up

Print job waiting/processing

Normal operation

Normal

Amber off

Waiting print job

No print jobs

Normal

Green flashing rapidly

Self-diagnostics executing

RAM chip defect detected

Error

Green LED flashes four


times rapidly Goes
out

Self-diagnostics executing

Ethernet hardware self-diagnostics failure

Error

Amber LED flashes


about 10 seconds
Goes out Green LED
continues flashing.

Flash memory self-diagnostics executing

Did not pass the check-sum


test

Error

Green LED flashing


slowly

Power on completed, then


print job waiting

Printer interface error

Error

Green LED flashing rapidly

Print job waiting

NetWare connection to file


server not possible

Error

Green lit

675

VII Appendix Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

VII Appendix

Chapter 29 Appendix

This appendix contains such information as the IP-422 product specifications and a list of
installed fonts. It also explains the printer driver function list, the default values for various settings (factory default), the method for initializing settings, and other such information.

29-1. IP-422 product specifications ........................................................677


29-2. PostScript PS-343 option product specifications ........................681
29-3. Options.............................................................................................682
29-4. Function list.....................................................................................688
29-5. Fonts ................................................................................................702
29-6. Font number list (Control panel-PCL setup).................................716
29-7. Symbol sets list (Control panel-PCL setup) .................................719
29-8. Factory default ................................................................................721
29-9. Initializing setting values................................................................722
29-10. Printing the network settings list ................................................726
29-11. Index according to item ................................................................727
29-12. Purpose-oriented index ................................................................732

676

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-1. IP-422 product specifications


Printer function
Type

Built into Konica 7122/7130 series copier

Paper

U.S.A
11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x 11, 8.5x11R, 5.5x8.5, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, F4
Europe
11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x 11, 8.5x11R, 5.5x8.5, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, F4, 16K,
16KR, 8K

Paper input/output amounts

Same as copier

Paper output
capacity

Same as copier

Mode

Copier/printer dual operation possible (A maximum of five jobs can be processed.)

Special printing

Duplex printing, media type selection, output tray selection, print quality mode selection,
alternating printing
Staple function, front cover and back cover function, version display, confidential output

Print direction

Vertical (portrait), horizontal (landscape)

Resolution

Printer resolution: 600 dpi

Scanner resolution

200dpi, 300dpi, 400dpi, 600dpi

Number of tones

Binary

Number of print
setting sheets

1 to 999

Printable area

Top/bottom/left/right margins 4.0mm

Warm up

Same as copier

CPU

AMD Elan 133MHz

Program memory

FLASH ROM (compact flash)16MB

System memory

SD-RAM64MB (standard)
Option: MU-411(dedicate memory)64MB

Interface

Parallel port
Centronics (IEEE1284)/Amphenol 36-pin male connector

OSs supported

Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Mac OS8.X or higher [Max OS X is not supported] (when PostScript option installed)

Printer driver

Windows 95/98/Me printer drivers


Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP printer drivers
Mac OS7.1 or higher (when PostScript option installed)
Mac OS 8.x or higher (when PostScript option installed)

677

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-1. IP-422 product specifications

Fax function
Transmission
standards

Super G3

Modem speeds

33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/19,200/16,800/14,400/12,000/9,600/
7,200/4,800/2,400bps

Encoding formats

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG

Transmission
time

2-second level
This is the transmission time for JBIG communications for at A4-size document containing approximately 700 characters send at standard quality (8x3.85 lines/mm) in super
G3 mode (ITU-T V.34, 28.8 bps or faster).

Communication
size

A3 maximum (Maximum document length 800 meters)

Recording paper
size

A3 maximum

Scan line density

Main scanning 16/8 lines/mm


Secondary scanning 15.4/7.7/3.85 lines/mm

Resolution

100x100 dpi (standard), 200x200 dpi (fine), 400x400 dpi (super fine)

Memory capacity

2 MB (With optional expanded memory: up to 16 MB can be allocated.)

PC-Fax transmission/reception

Possible when option installed

Quick dialing

200 numbers

One-touch dialing

40 numbers

Sequential broadcast transmission

200 maximum

Scanner functions
Driver

Konica Network Scanner Driver

OSs supported

Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP

Protocol supported

TCP/IP

Function

Scan to box
Scan to E-Mail
Scan to FTP

Magnification
ratio

Changes according to read-in resolution


200 dpi: 75 - 400%
For 300 dpi: 75-400%
For 400 dpi: 38-400%
For 600 dpi: 25-400%

Paper sizes that


can be read in

A3/A4R/A4/A5/A5R/B4/B5R/B5/B6R/8.5 x 11R/8.5 x 11/5.5 x 8.5/5.5 x 8.5R/8.5R x 14/


11 x 17/Postcard/entire surface

Number of pages
that can be stored
in the hard disk
(A4 documents)

Depends on the resolution and contents of the document


For 200 dpi: approx. 890 pages of text only; approx. 430 pages with images
For 400 dpi: approx. 310 pages of text only; approx. 130 pages with images
For 600 dpi: approx. 140 pages of text only; approx. 40 pages with images

Special functions

Dual page, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse lmage, Frame/Fold Erase, Mixed Original,
Holded Original, Memory Mode, Flip Side correction, Output

Hard disk

PCMCIA card type of 2 GB or more (For details,

678

Page 683).

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-1. IP-422 product specifications

Network functions
Type

Incorporated model

Frame type

IEEE802.2/802.3/Ethernet II/IEEE802.3SNAP

Connection cable
type

10Base-T/100Base-TX

Connector

RJ-45

Protocol supported

TCP/IP (BOOTP, ARP, RARP, ICMP, DHCP, SNMP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, IPP), IPX/SPX,
AppleTalk (EtherTalk)

OSs supported
(NOS)

Novell NetWare (3.x, 4.x), Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me, Microsoft Windows NT 4.0,
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP, Mac OS 7.x or higher [Mac OS X is not supported]

Multiple protocols

Automatic discrimination

Printing methods
supported

Peer-to-Peer (TCP/IP for Windows 95/98/Me), Pserver (IPX/SPX), LPD/LPR (TCP/IP),


AppleTalk (EtherTalk), IPP (TCP/IP for Windows 2000/XP)

Dedicated utilities

IP-P2P (IP peer-to-peer)


IPX-P2P (IPX peer-to-peer)
MAP (Management Access Program)
NWSetup
UNIX-TCP/IP Programs

General utilities

Web browser (Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer)

Operation environment

Temperature 0-50C, relative humidity 5-80%

Status display
LEDs

Green LED, amber LED, one each

Settings

Stored in non-volatile memory

Radio signal
emission regulations

VCCI Class I

Restrictions
The copier weekly timer functions can be used in printer mode, but if print data remains in the ERDH memory, the power is not switched off until output of that data is completed.
If the optional hard disk is not connected, and data is sent to the print controller on both the parallel
port and the network at the same time, the print controller may stop operating correctly.

These specifications are subject to improve without prior notice.

679

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-1. IP-422 product specifications

10/100Base-T UTP cable specifications


When a 10/100Base-T UTP cable is set for connecting to the RJ45 connector on the network, the general Ethernet standard below is used. Use a cable of at least Category 5.
Pin number

Color

Blue/white

Blue

Orange/white

Green/white

Green

Orange

Receive+

Brown/white

Transmit-

Brown

Transmit+

Ethernet

Receive-

680

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-2. PostScript PS-343 option product specifications


This section gives the PostScript option product specifications.
Type

Built into Konica IP-422

Number of print
setting sheets

1 to 999 (Windows 95/98/Me), 1 to 9999 (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, Macintosh)

Program memory

FLASH ROM (compact flash)32MB

Hard disk

PCMCIA card type of 2 GB or more (For details,

OSs supported

Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Mac OS8.X or higher

681

Page 683).

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-3. Options
This section contains information on memory, hard disks, and other options.

Memory
Almost all the memory installed in the print controller is used for image rasterizing (bitmap development processing), font cache, form function, and other processing. Part is used for system operation.
The basic memory setting for the print controller is 64 MB, which makes printing in 1-bit mode (600 dpi) possible for all sizes of paper. The print controller memory can be expanded to up to 128 MB.
The larger the capacity of the memory in the print controller, the more pages can be rasterized while waiting
for earlier jobs in the queue to print. For A4 size paper, printing 1-bit mode data uses about 4,345 KB of memory (600 dpi).
Also, the copier's E-RDH memory is used for print processing. The E-RDH memory can be expanded to up to
160 MB.

E-RDH (Electronic Recirculating Document Handler) memory


The E-RDH is a system that stores print data temporarily in the copier main unit memory (E-RDH memory) and processes it according to the selected settings.
When printing from the print controller, the copier main unit E-RDH is used.
The copiers E-RDH memory is 32 MB standard and can be expanded to up to 160 MB.
The print controller uses 1-bit mode. It can hold approximately 180 pages of A4 data in the 32 MB (standard) of E-RDH memory.
Under conditions such as the following, because the print controller does not have adequate memory
installed, the desired print results cannot be obtained.
When error dispersion (normal fine or fine) is specified with the printer driver, if the data is complex, image processing is switched automatically to dither and so printed.
When form data is complicated (the file sizes large), the form is not printed.
In the above cases, it is recommended that the print controller's memory be expanded.
Also, when printing specifying multiple copies, booklet, job control partial stop functions, etc., the data
for all the pages (in one job) that have been rasterized with the print controller are temporarily stored in
the E-RDH memory. Therefore, when you print a document with a particularly large number of pages, if
you use these functions, it may be impossible to print it correctly.
In this case, it is recommended that the copier's E-RDH memory be expanded.

Expanding memory
To always obtain optimum printer performance, it is recommended that you expand the memory.
The print controller memory can be expanded to up to 128 MB.
The E-RDH memory can be expanded to up to 160 MB.

For details on expansion memory, ask your service representative.

682

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-3. Options

Hard disk
A PCMCIA card type hard disk can be connected to the IP-422.
Hard disks that meet the following conditions are supported.
Card Type

PCMCIA Type1 or Type2

Power supply voltage

3.3V+/-0.15V(Stand-alone operation)

Current consumption

500mA max.

Safety approvals

The following certifications must have already been acquired.


UL Recognized Component (NWGQ2)
Standard: UL1950 or UL60950
C-UL or CSA Recognized Component (NWGQ2)
Standard: CSA c22.2 No.950 or CSA c22.2 No.60950
TV-GS
Standard: EN 60950

The OS used in the print controller can handle disk capacities up to 2 GB.
When a hard disk larger than 2 GB is connected, the hard disk capacity displayed on the copier Control
Panel or [Setting information list] is 2 GB.

Recommended products
The following hard disks have been checked by Konica and found to be compliant.
Manufacturer
TOSHIBA

IBM

Product name

Capacity

Remarks

PAMHD002

2GB

PAMHD005

5GB

The area that can actually be used is


up to 2 GB.

DSCM-11000

1GB

A PC card adaptor is required.

For information on installing on the print controller, ask your service representative.

683

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-3. Options

Problems with optional products


This section gives information concerning memory and hard disk problems and explains how to solve them.

Insufficient memory
The following print problems can occur due to insufficient print controller basic memory or copier main
unit E-RDH memory.
Parts of images are left out of printing.
Forms are not printed
Error dispersion is specified, but the data is printed with dither.
Memory overflows occur.
If any of the above problems occur, use the solutions on this page.
z For details on the E-RDH memory, refer to [E-RDH (Electronic Recirculating Document Handler) memory]
(

Page 682).

When parts of images are left out of printing


When the data for a single page in a print job received by the print controller is complex, for example
when it includes an extremely large amount of straight lines and other vector graphics on one page for
a graphics application, the memory used for rasterizing with the print controller may sometimes be
insufficient.
In this case, set the printer driver graphic setting to raster mode.

Forms are not printed


If any of the conditions below occur, forms may not be printed.
The form exceeds the maximum data size
The relationship between the memory installed in the print controller and the maximum size of
form data is as follows.
Installed memory capacity

Maximum form data size

64 MB (no expansion
memory)

Approx. 2.6 MB

128 MB (64 MB expansion


memory)

Approx. 5.2 MB

When [Make transparent] is specified with the [Form tab]


When forms are not printed due to insufficient memory, it is recommended that the print controller's memory be expanded.

When error dispersion is specified, but the data is printed with dither
Error dispersal requires more printer memory for image processing than dither.
In this case, it is recommended the print controller's memory be expanded.

684

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-3. Options

When memory overflows occur


The amount of data for print job depends on the functions selected with the printer driver (booklet, center fold/center bind functions, 2-in-1 functions, etc.) and on the number of pages in the print documents,
so sometimes memory overflows occur in the copiers E-RDH memory. If a memory overflow occurs,
the output for that print job is canceled.
If the [Memory overflow] error message is displayed on the LCD screen, cancel the print job, take the
steps below, then issue the print instructions again.
Check that there are currently no jobs in the copier being processed or waiting for processing,
then send the job again.
If the document has many pages, do not send the print instructions for all the pages at once, but
rather send the print instructions divided over a number of jobs.
Deleting unnecessary function specifications
If memory overflows occur frequently, it is recommended that the copier's memory be expanded.

The hard disk does not operate normally


If the main power is switched off while the hard disk is operating, data may stop writing correctly and the
hard disk may stop operating normally. If the hard disk is not operating normally, initialize the hard disk
with the procedure below.

Switch on the copier power. The [Main menu] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.
z For details on the procedure for displaying the [Main menu] screen, [Menu configuration] (

Touch the [7] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


A screen for checking whether or not to initialize the hard disk is displayed.

685

Page 385).

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-3. Options

Touch the [1] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


When the formatting ends, [Switch the power off, then on again] is displayed.

Switch the copier power switch Off, wait about 10 seconds, then switch the power back On
again.
If the above procedure does not restore normal operation of the hard disk, contact your service
representative.

After switching Off the Copier main power, if you switch it back on without waiting, the print controller
may not operate normally and errors may be displayed.
In this case, if you switch the Copier main power Off again, wait at least 10 seconds or so, then switch
the main power On again, the system will operate normally.

When the hard disk is initialized, the scan data, confidential print data, and PC-Fax reception data is
erased.
Setting of the Printer default settings and the Controller settings are reset to the factory default.
When the PostScript option is installed, the font information downloaded to the hard disk is also erased.

686

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-3. Options

The hard disk is full


The message below is displayed on the control panel LCD screen when the print controller's hard disk
is running low on free space.
The hard disk is full.
Free space on the hard disk.
When the message above is displayed, execute the following steps.

Using a computer on the network to delete scan jobs stored on the print controller's hard
disk.
z For details on scan data erasing, refer to [Using the network scanner driver] (

Page 363).

This uses the control panel to output confidential output (password printing) jobs on the
print controller's hard disk.
z For details on confidential output from the control panel, refer to [Operating from the control panel]
(

Page 195)

The print controller's automatic timer function automatically deletes jobs stored on the print controller's hard disk approximately 24 hours after the data is stored on the hard disk.
If the hard disk capacity is insufficient, transmitted print jobs stop being printed.
Also, when a scan job is transmitted, the job is automatically canceled and the message below is displayed.
The hard disk is full.
Scan job is canceled.
Scan jobs canceled in this way are displayed in the [Scanner error list].
z For details on the [Scanner error list], refer to [Output error lists] (

687

Page 375).

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


This lists the PCL printer driver setting items (Adobe PostScript if the PostScript option is installed).
For details on the function settings, [Chapter 3 Printing with Windows] (
Printing with Macintosh] (

Page 118), [Chapter 4

Page 213).

PCL function list


The tabs in the main text show the [Konica IP-422 PCL] property tabs.
Tab name

Setting item

Setting value

Comment
Separator page

General

Add port
Delete Port
Print using the
following driver
Details

New Driver
Capture Printer
Port

End Capture
Time out settings

This selects the separator page.

Specify the folder in which the file


used is stored as the separator
page.

Print test
Print to the port

This inputs a comment.

[none]
Full
Simple

Browse

Reference
page

Summary

This prints a test page.

Page 31,
69

COMx: (Communications port)


FILE: (Makes a file
on the disk)
LPT1: (ECP printer
port)

This sets the print port.


Printing is not possible from
serial port Comx.

Network
Other

This adds a port.

Page 203,
207

This deletes an unnecessary


port.

Page 203,
207

This selects the driver used for


printing.

Device
Path
Reconnect at logon

Not selected (seconds)


Transmission retry
(seconds)

688

This adds a driver for printing.

Page 201,
204

This specifies the printer device


name/path for printing through
the network. This also sets
whether or not to automatically
connect when logging on to the
network.

Page 202

This deletes the network path for


an unnecessary network printer.

Page 202

This sets the parallel port timeout


time (in seconds) and the wait
time (in seconds) until transmission is retried.

Page 205,
210

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Setting item

Reference
page

Setting value

Summary

Spool settings

Spools print jobs program finishes printing faster


Start printing after
last page is
spooled
Start printing after
first page is
spooled
Print directly to the
printer
Bi-directional support for this printer

This sets whether or not to spool


print data when it is sent to the
printer from an application.

Page 203,
207, 212

Port Settings

Spool MS-DOS print


jobs
Check port state
before printing

This sets whether or not to spool


MS-DOS print jobs and whether
or not to check the status of the
LPTx: port before printing.

Page 202

Copies

1 to 999

This sets the number of copies to


print.

Page 139

Collate

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to sort in


order of page numbers when
printing jobs with multiple copies
of multiple pages.

Page 162,
235

Orientation

Portrait
Landscape

This sets the direction for printing.

Page 140

Features

Offset
Staple
Combination
Smoothing
Toner Save

This sets the optional functions


for printing, such as Offset and
Staples.
Select functions in the upper column, and setting options in the
lower column.

Page 159,
164, 166,
173, 175

Paper Size

5.5"8.5"
8.5"11"
8.5"14"
11"17"
A3-297420mm
A4-210297mm
A5-148210mm
B4-250354mm
B5-182257mm
B6-128182mm
F4-8.0"13"
8K-267390mm
16K-195267mm

This sets the size of the paper to


print on.

Page 218

Duplex

-NoneFlip on long edge


Flip on short edge

This sets whether or not to make


a duplex printing and the paper
direction for folding.

Page 155

Details

Paper

689

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Setting item

Summary

Media Type

Plain paper
OHP [Transparency]
OHP-Interleave [Blank]
OHP-Interleave [Print]

This sets the media type for output.

Page 143

Output Tray

-DefaultTray1
Tray2

This sets the output tray.

Page 149

Paper Source

Auto Select
Bypass tray
Tray1
Tray2
Tray3
Tray4

This selects the input tray containing the paper to print on.

Page 147,
222

Password Print

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to Password print.


When you select ON, enter your
User ID and Password into the
screen displayed.

Page 193

Settings

User ID
Password

This sets User ID and Password


for Password Print.

Paper

Restore
Defaults

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

Page 193

Front cover

Blank
Printed

This sets whether or not to print


the first page on the front cover
when the front cover paper is different from the paper for the
main text.

Page 169

Back cover

Blank
Printed

This sets whether or not to print


the last page on the back cover
when the back cover paper is different from the paper for the
main text.

Page 169

Tray

Bypass tray
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4

This sets the paper source for


the paper used for front covers
and back covers.

Page 169

Cover

Restore Defaults

Graphics

Reference
page

Setting value

Halftoning

Solid Black and


White
Patterned Grays
Diffused Grays

Brightness
Contrast
Negative
Restore
Defaults

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

This sets the reproduction


method of halftone area.

Page 172

-100 to 100

Adjust the Brightness of the image.

Page 172

-100 to 100

Adjust the Contrast of the image.

Page 172

This sets whether or not to


reverse the image.

Page 177

ON
OFF

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

690

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Options

Setting item

Setting value

Layout- pages
per sheet

1
2
4
6
9
16

This prints combining multiple


pages from the document into
one page of print paper.

Page 230

Layout- Scaling

20 to 400%

This sets the scaling value.

Page 145

True Type
options

Outline soft fonts


Bitmap soft fonts
Rasters

This sets TrueType font settings.

Page 180

Printer Language

PCL-5E (Monochrome)
PCL-6 (Monochrome)

This sets a printer language for


printing.

Page 138

Restore Defaults

Watermarks

Reference
page

Summary

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

Watermark- Text

CONFIDENTIAL
COPY
DRAFT
FILE COPY
FINAL
PROOF
TOP SECRET

This selects characters for watermarks.

Page 189

WatermarkPage

ALL but first page


All pages
First page only
No watermark

This sets the range to apply


watermarks.

Page 189

This sets watermarks to [Top].

Page 189

This sets watermarks to [Bottom].

Page 189

Watermark- Top

Watermark- Bottom

WatermarkCount

1 to 14

This sets the number to repeat


watermarks in one page of print
paper.

Page 189

Watermark- Separation

0 to 50

This sets the interval between


watermarks, when multiple
watermarks are printed on one
page of print paper.

Page 189

This selects fonts for watermarks.

Page 189

Font- Name

Font- Color

Black
Dark Gray
Light Gray
White

This sets the color of watermarks.

Page 189

Font- Darkness

0 to 100%

This sets the density of watermarks.

Page 189

691

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Setting item

Setting value

Font- Bold

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to put


characters in bold type face.

Page 189

Font- Italic

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to put


characters in italics.

Page 189

Font- Size

1 to 300

This sets the character size.

Page 189

PositionAutomatically

This sets the position of watermarks automatically.

Page 189

PositionUser defined

X:0 to 100
Y:0 to 100

This sets any position of watermarks.

Page 189

Position- Angle

0 to 360

This sets the angle of watermarks.

Page 189

This changes the adjustment value.

Page 189

This repeats adjustment.

Page 189

Adjustment- Move

AdjustmentRotate

Show layout

New

This creates new watermarks.

Page 189

This deletes the current watermarks.

Page 189

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

Page 189

Delete
Restore Defaults

Symbol- File

-None1.BMP

This sets whether or not to apply


overlay.

Page 186

Symbol- Page

All but first page


All Pages
First page only
No overlay

This sets the range to apply overlay.

Page 186

This displays the [Open overlay


file] screen.
Select the file for overlay in this
screen.

Page 186

Select Bitmap

Overlay

Reference
page

Summary

Shade- Color

Black
Dark Gray
Light Gray
White

This sets the color of shade.

Page 186

ShadeDarkness

0 to 100

This sets the density of shade.

Page 186

This sets the size where the symbol is automatically applied.

Page 186

SizeAutomatically

SizeUser defined

10 to 100

This sets any size where the


symbol is applied.

Page 186

Percent

10 to 100

This sets the percentage for any


size where the symbol is applied.

Page 186

This sets the position of symbol


automatically.

Page 186

This sets any position of symbol.

Page 186

PositionAutomatically
PositionUser defined
Show Layout

X:0~100
Y:0~100

Page 186

Restore Defaults

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

692

Page 186

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Setting item

Reference
page

Summary

Mode Selection

FAX
Printer

This switches the document destination between fax and printer.

Page 273

FAX Mode SetupResolution

200dpi
400dpi

This sets the resolution for fax


transmission.

Page 273

When you click here, the [Fax


Mode Setup] screen is displayed.
This screen is used to make various settings for fax transmission.

Page 273

FAX Mode SetupSetup

FAX

Setting value

Enter Recipient
- Recipient
- Name

This inputs the name of the fax


recipient.

Page 273

Enter Recipient
- Recipient
- Fax No.

This inputs the fax number of the


recipient.

Page 273

Enter Recipient
- Recipient
- Error Correction Mode

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to use


ECM (error correction) for fax
transmission.

Page 273

Enter Recipient
- Recipient
- Intl Transmission Mode

ON
OFF

Check this setting to slow the


communications speed for international calls.

Page 273

Enter Recipient
- Recipient
- V.34Mode

ON
OFF

This is to be set when sending


faxes in super G3 mode.

Page 273

Clicking here adds the contents


set with the [Direct input] column
to the [Recipient list].

Page 273

Page 273

Clicking here displays a list of the


fax numbers already registered
so that you can select the fax
recipient from that list.
This displays detailed information
for the fax recipients already registered.

Page 273

This deletes the recipient


selected in the [Recipients] from
that list.

Page 273

Enter Recipient
- Recipient
- Add
Phonebook

Recipients

Recipients
- Delete

693

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Setting item

Setting value

Base DB-209/
210[2Trays] Base
FAX Option DB-409/
410[1Trays] Finisher
w/2Trays Finisher w/
3Trays Finisher w/
4Trays Inner Tray w/
2Trays

This selects the expansion


equipment adding to the copier.

Page 22,
40, 58, 80

Add

This adds the expansion equipment selected with [Available


options] - [Installed options].

Page 22,
40, 58, 80

OptionsInstalled options

This displays the added expansion equipment.

Page 22,
40, 58, 80

Remove

This removes the expansion


equipment selected with
[Installed options].

Page 22,
40, 58, 80

Options- Available options

Setup

Installed memory
About

Reference
page

Summary

64MB
128MB

This sets the memory installed in


the copier.
This displays the printer driver
version information.

694

Page 200,
204, 208

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list

Adobe PostScript Function list


The tabs in the main text show the [Konica IP-422J PostScript] property tabs.
Tab name

Setting item

Setting value

Comment
Separator page
General

[none]
Full
Simple

Browse

This inputs a comment.

This selects the separator


page.

This specifies the name of


the folder in which the file
used for the separator page
is stored.

Print Test Page

This prints a test page.

Print to the following port

COMx: (Communications port)


FILE : (Creates a file on
disk)
LPT1 : (Printer Port)

This sets the print port.


Printing is not possible from
serial port Comx.

Network
Other

This adds a port.

Page 203

This deletes an unnecessary


port.

Page 203

Add Port
Delete Port
Details

Reference
page

Summary

Print using the


following driver
New Driver
Capture Printer
Port

Drivers

This selects the driver used


for printing.

Device
Path
Reconnect at logon

695

Page 31, 48

This adds a driver for printing.

Page 201

This specifies the printer


device name/path for printing through the network. This
also sets whether or not to
automatically connect when
logging on to the network.

Page 202

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Setting item

End Capture

Reference
page

Setting value

Summary

This deletes the network path


for an unnecessary network
printer.

Page 202

Time out settings

Not selected (seconds)


Transmission retry
(seconds)

This sets the parallel port


time out time (in seconds)
and the wait time (in seconds) until transmission is
retried.

Page 201

Spool settings

Spool print jobs so program finishes printing


faster.
Start printing after
last page is spooled
Start printing after first
page is spooled
Print directly to the
printer
Spool data format:RAW
Disable bi-directional
support for this printer.
Enable bi-dinectional
support for this printer.

This sets whether or not to


spool print data when it is
sent to the printer from an
application.

Page 203,
207, 212

Port settings

Spool MS-DOS print


jobs
Check port state
before printing

This sets whether or not to


spool MS-DOS print jobs and
whether or not to check the
status of the port before printing.

Page 202

Details

696

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Setting item

Setting value

Reference
page

Summary

Paper size

Statement/Letter/
Legal/Tabloid/A3/A4/
A5/B4/B5/B6/F4/8K/
16K

This sets the size of the


paper used for output.
The paper sizes that can be
set depend on the specifications for the country and on
the tray.
For details, refer to the
copier's user's manual.

Page 141

Orientation

Portrait/F4/8K/16K
Landscape
Rotated

This sets the direction for


printing.

Page 140

Print Control

None
Flip on long edge
Flip on short edge

This sets the binding direction during finishing for paper


printed on both sides.

Page 155

Paper source

Auto Select Tray


Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Manual feed

This sets the input tray. The


number of trays available for
selection depends on the
copier model and the options
installed.

Page 222

Paper output
method

Default
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4

This sets the output tray. The


number of trays available for
selection depends on the
copier model and the options
installed.

Page 149

Paper type

Plain paper
OHP (Trans parency)
OHP-Interleave
[Blank]
OHP-Interleave
[printed]

This sets the media type for


output.

Page 143

Margins - Units

Inches
Millimeters

This sets the unit for margins


set for print paper.

Page 151

Margins - Top

0.18~7.67 (Inches)
4.6-145.5 (Millimeters)

This sets the amount of the top


margin.

Page 151

Margins - Bottom

0.18~7.67 (Inches)
4.6-145.5 (Millimeters)

This sets the amount of the


bottom margin.

Page 151

Margins - Left

0.18-5.25 (Inches)
4.6-104.8 (Millimeters)

This sets the amount of the left


margin.

Page 151

Margins - Right

0.18-5.25 (Inches)
4.6-104.8 (Millimeters)

This sets the amount of the


right margin.

Page 151

This displays the printer


driver version information.

This displays the help file.

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

Paper

About
Help
Restore Defaults

697

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Graphics

Setting item

Setting value

Resolution

600dpi

This displays the output resolution.

Page 176

Special
- Print as a negative image

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to


reverse white and black
when printing.

Page 177

Special
- Print as a mirror image

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to


reverse left and right when
printing.

Page 179

Paper handling
- Layout

1 up
2 up
4 up
6 up
9 up
16 up

This prints combining multiple pages from the document


into one page of print paper.

Page 157

Paper handling
- Print page border

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to


print a border around each
document page for layout
printing.

Page 157

Scaling

25 to 400%

This sets the amount of


enlargement or reduction.

Page 145

Convert gray text


to PostSript gray

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to convert gray text in a document into


PostScript gray.

Convert gray
graphics to PostScript gray

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to convert gray images in a document


into PostScript gray.

This displays the help file.

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

Help
Restore Defaults

Fonts

Reference
page

Summary

Substitute printer
fonts for TrueType fonts when
applicable

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to


replace TrueType fonts
within the document with
printer fonts.

Do not use
printer fonts.

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to


use printer fonts for printing.

Add Euro currency Symbol to


PostScript Fonts.

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to


add the Euro currency symbol to PostScript fonts.

Update Soft
Fonts

Clicking here recognizes


software fonts.

698

Page 181

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Fonts

Setting item

Reference
page

Summary

Send Font As
- TrueType fonts
- Send True
Type fonts as

Outlines
Bitmaps
Type42
Dont Send

This sets the method for


transmitting fonts from an
application.

Send Fonts As
- Threshold to
switch between
downloading
bitmap or outline fonts, measured in pixels
[in pixel size at
the current resolution]

0 to 9,999

This sets the amount of the


bitmap and outline font
switching.

Send Fonts As
- PostScript fonts
- Send PostScript fonts as

In Native Format
Dont Send

Help
Restore Defaults

Device
Options

Setting value

This sets the method for


transmitting PostScript fonts
from an application.

This displays the help file.

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

This sets the amount of


printer memory allocated
when printing documents.

Available printermemory

0 to 200,000

Printer features

Job Offset
Collate
Combination
Stapling
Front Cover
Back cover
Front/Back Cover tray
Smoothing
Toner save

This displays a list of the


printer functions that can be
set for printing and their current settings.

Page 159,
162, 164,
166, 169,
173, 175

This changes the value of the


function selected with [Printer
functions].

Page 159,
162, 164,
166, 169,
173, 175

Finisher
Drawer Base
Memory Configuration

This displays a list of the status of the copier's optional


equipment.

Page 47

Instalbble
options
- Change setting
for

Page 47

This changes the contents of


the expansion equipment
selected with [Expansion
options].

Help

This displays the help file.

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

Printer features
- Change setting
for
Installable
options

Restore Defaults

699

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Setting value

Summary

PostScript output
format

PostScript [optimized
for speed]
PostScript [optimize for
portability-ADSC]
Encapsulated PostScript [EPS]
Archive format

This sets the format for PostScript output from applications.

Page 181

PostScript headers

Download header with


each print job
Assume header is
downloaded and
retained

This sets whether or not to


download the PostScript
header for each job.

Page 182

Clicking here starts downloading of the PostScript


header.

Page 182

PostScript headers
- Send Header
Now

PostScript

Reference
page

Setting item

Printing PostScript error information

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to


print a report when a PostScript error occurs.

Page 183

PostScript time
out values
- Job timeout

0 to 999 seconds

This sets the time in seconds


for a transmitted job to be
judged to have timed out.

Page 184

PostScript time
out values
- Wait timeout

0 to 999 seconds

This sets the time in seconds


for a transmitted job to be
judged to have timed out.

Page 184

Advanced
- PostScript language level

3
2

This sets the PostScript language level used.

Advanced
- Data format

ASCII data
Binary communications
protocol
Tagged binary communications protocol
Pure binary data

This sets the data format


used for transmitting print
data.

Advanced
- Send Ctrl+D
before job

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to


send Ctrl+D before jobs.

Advanced
- Send Ctrl+D
after job

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to


send Ctrl+D after jobs.

Advanced
- Display alert for
applications
incompatible
with driver features

ON
OFF

This sets whether or not to


output a warning when an
attempt is made to use an
application that is not compatible with driver functions
(page layout, watermark).

This displays the help file.

This returns the contents set


here to their default values.

Help
Restore Defaults

700

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-4. Function list


Tab name

Setting item

Select a Watermark

Setting value

None
CONFIDENTIAL
COPY
DRAFT

This displays a list of the


watermarks that can be
selected for printing.

Page 191

Page 191

Clicking here displays the


[Edit watermark] screen. On
this screen, you can change
the contents of the watermark selected with the
[Select a watermark] column.

Page 191

Clicking here displays the


[New watermark] screen. On
this screen, you can change
the contents of a new watermark.

This deletes the watermark


selected with the [Select a
watermark] column.

Page 191

This sets how the watermark


is to be printed on the document.

Page 189

Edit

Watermarks

New

Delete

Print watermark

Help

Reference
page

Summary

On first page only


In background
As outline only

This displays the help file.

701

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts
This section explains, using screen fonts recorded on the [User software CD], and downloading fonts to HDD
when PostScript option installed.

Using the accessory screen fonts


The following screen fonts are recorded on the [User software CD].
PCL font (TrueType font) 80 fonts
PostScript Type 1 font (only when PostScript option installed) 136 fonts
Installing these fonts on the computer provides a WYSIWYG environment in which you can create documents while checking it on the computer screen in a state close to finished state.
z For details on the attached fonts, ([PCL font list]
Page 712).

702

Page 710),([PostScript font list]

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

Installing screen fonts


To use the fonts recorded on the [User software CD], it is necessary to install the fonts on the operating system you are using.The installation procedure depends on the operating system used and on whether or not
the PostScript option is installed.

True Type font installation (Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP)

Put the [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.


z When using the PostScript option, put the PostScript option [User software CD].

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] - [Control Panel].


The [Control panel] window is displayed.

Double click the [Font] icon.


The contents in the [Fonts] folder is displayed.

From the menu bar, select [File] [Install New Font].


The [Add Fonts] screen is displayed.

In [Drive], select the computer's CD-ROM drive. As the folder, double-click any folder on the
[User software CD].
IP422 [User software CD]:
[\English\Screen fonts]
PS-343 [User software CD].
[\English\Screen fonts\PS Screen fonts\TrueType (Core OS) fonts]
Font information is displayed on the [List of Fonts].

Select the font to install in the [List of Fonts].

z Ensure that the [Copy font to font folder] checkbox is On.

Click the [OK] button.


The selected font is installed.
From now on, this installed font can be used.

703

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

PostScript font installation (Windows 95/98/Me/NT)


(Only when PostScript option is installed)
Install Adobe Type Manager (ATM) before installing PostScript fonts.
z For details on installing Adobe Type Manager, [Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM)] (

Page 706).

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Programs] [Adobe] [Abode Type Manager 4.1].
Adobe Type Manager is started.

Click the [Adobe Type Manager] screen [Font] tab.

In [Source], select [Browse Fonts].

In the directory selection section, select the [User software CD] [\English\Screenfonts\PS
ScreenFonts\Type1fonts].
A list of the installable fonts is displayed.

Select the font to install.

Click the [Add] button.


The selected font is installed.

Adobe Type Manager is closed.


From now on, this installed font can be used.

704

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

PostScript fonts Installation (Windows 2000/XP)


(Only when the PostScript option is installed)
z Since Windows 2000/XP incorporates in the operating system itself the same functions provided by Adobe Type
Manager (ATM), ATM is not needed to install PostScript fonts.

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

From the taskbar, select [Start] - [Settings] [Control panel].


The [Control panel] screen is displayed.

Double click the [Fonts] icon.


The contents in the [Fonts] is displayed.

From the menu bar, select [File] [Install New Font].


The [Add Fonts] screen is displayed.

In [Drive], select the computer's CD-ROM drive. As the folder, double-click the
[\English\Screenfonts\PS ScreenFonts\Type1fonts] folder.

Select the font to install in the [List of Fonts].

z Ensure that the [Copy font to font folder] checkbox is On.

Click the [OK] button.


The selected font is installed.
From now on, this installed font can be used.

705

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM)

Put the PostScript option [User software CD] in the computer's CD-ROM drive.

From the task bar [Start] select [Run].


The [Run] dialog box is displayed.

As the name, input [\English\Screenfonts\ATM light\atm41.exe], then click the [OK] button.
The setup program is started and the installation screen is displayed.

Check the contents, then click the [Next ] button.

The [Select Country] screen is displayed.

Select your country, then click the [Next ] button.

The [Software License Agreement] screen is displayed.

706

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

Check the contents, then click the [Yes] button.


The [User Information] screen is displayed.
z To install and use Adobe Type Manager, agreement to the [Software License Agreement] is required.

Input the user information (name and company name), then click the [Next ] button.
A screen for checking the input user information is displayed.

Check the contents, then click the [Yes] button.


The [Select components] screen is displayed.

Check the contents, then click the [Next ] button.

[Select Program Folder] screen is displayed.

10

Click the [Next ] button.


The [Start Copying Files] screen is displayed.

11

Click the [Next ] button.


The installation is started. After the installation is complete, the [Adobe Type Manager] screen is
displayed.

12

Click the [Finish] button.


The [Setup complete] screen is displayed.
z If the [Display Adobe Type Manager Readme file] checkbox is checked and you click the [Finish] button, the ATM
Readme file is displayed.

707

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

13

Select the timing for restarting the computer, then click the [Finish] button.
When [Yes, I want to restart my computer now] is selected, the computer is immediately restarted.
When [No, I will restart my computer later] is selected, the computer is not restarted. Execute necessary operations, close down the computer, then restart it.

When the computer is restarted, the ATM is enabled.

708

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

Downloading fonts
The printer font is downloaded to the hard disk in the print controller.
For details on downloading fonts, refer to the user's manual that came with the fonts.

Select [disk0] as the destination for downloading to the hard disk in the print controller. If fonts are downloaded to [disk1], they cannot be used.
Also, when fonts are downloaded to [disk1] the print controller may stop operating normally.
When the font download is complete, switch the copier main power Off, wait about 10 seconds, and
switch the power back On again.The downloaded fonts cannot be used normally until the copier has
been restarted.B

z When downloading fonts, have spooling switched [Off].


For details on making the spool settings, refer to [Spool settings] (

709

Page 203, 207, 212).

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

PCL font list

710

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

711

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

PostScript font list

712

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

713

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

714

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-5. Fonts

715

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-6. Font number list (Control panel-PCL setup)


Font#

Font

Pitch/Point

0 line printer

16.67/8.5

1 line printer

16.67/8.5

2 line printer

16.67/8.5

3 line printer

16.67/8.5

4 line printer

16.67/8.5

5 line printer

16.67/8.5

6 line printer

16.67/8.5

7 line printer

16.67/8.5

8 Courier Bold Italic

scalable

9 Courier Bold

scalable

10 Courier Italic

scalable

11 Courier

scalable

12 Letter Gothic

scalable

13 Letter Gothic Italic

scalable

14 Letter Gothic Bold

scalable

15 Courier PS

scalable

16 Courier PS Oblique

scalable

17 Courier PS Bold

scalable

18 Courier PS Bold Oblique

scalable

19 CG Times Bold Italic

scalable

20 CG Times Bold

scalable

21 CG Times Italic

scalable

22 CG Times

scalable

23 Albertus Medium

scalable

24 Albertus Extra Bold

scalable

25 Antique Olive

scalable

26 Antique Olive Italic

scalable

27 Antique Olive Bold

scalable

28 Univers Medium

scalable

29 Univers Medium Italic

scalable

30 Univers Bold

scalable

31 Univers Bold Italic

scalable

32 Claredon Condensed

scalable

716

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-6. Font number list (Control panel-PCL setup)


Font#

Font

Pitch/Point

33 Coronet

scalable

34 GaramondAntiqua

scalable

35 Garamond Kursiv

scalable

36 Garamond Halbfett

scalable

37 Garamond Kursiv Halbfett

scalable

38 Marigold

scalable

39 CG Omega

scalable

40 CG Omega Italic

scalable

41 CG Omega Bold

scalable

42 CG Omega Bold Italic

scalable

43 SymbolPS

scalable

44 Times New

scalable

45 Times New Italic

scalable

46 Times New Bold

scalable

47 Times New Bold Italic

scalable

48 Helvetica

scalable

49 Helvetica Oblique

scalable

50 Helvetica Bold

scalable

51 Helvetica Bold Oblique

scalable

52 Univers Medium Condensed

scalable

53 Univers Medium Condensed Italic

scalable

54 Univers Bold Condensed

scalable

55 Univers Bold Condensed Italic

scalable

56 ITC Avant Garde Book

scalable

57 ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique

scalable

58 ITC Avant Garde Demi

scalable

59 ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique

scalable

60 ITC Bookman Light

scalable

61 ITC Bookman Light Italic

scalable

62 ITC Bookman Demi

scalable

63 ITV Bookman Demi Italic

scalable

64 Arial

scalable

65 Arial Italic

scalable

66 Arial Bold

scalable

67 Arial Bold Italic

scalable

68 Helvetica Narrow

scalable

69 Helvetica Narrow Oblique

scalable

70 Helvetica Narrow Bold

scalable

71 Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique

scalable

717

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-6. Font number list (Control panel-PCL setup)


Font#

Font

Pitch/Point

72 New Century Schoolbook Roman

scalable

73 New Century Schoolbook Italic

scalable

74 New Century Schoolbook Bold

scalable

75 New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic scalable


76 Palatino Roman

scalable

77 Palatino Italic

scalable

78 Palatino Bold

scalable

79 Palatino Bold Italic

scalable

80 Courier

scalable

81 Times Roman

scalable

82 Times Italic

scalable

83 Times Bold

scalable

84 Times Bold Italic

scalable

85 ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic

scalable

86 Courier

scalable

87 Symbol

scalable

88 Wingdings

scalable

[SYM] Symbol set [PIT] Pitch:0.44-99.95 [POI] Point size:0.4-99.75


PCL version5.6.2

718

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-7. Symbol sets list (Control panel-PCL setup)


Symbol Set ID

Symbol Set Name


(Printer LCD panel)

Symbol Set Name (WebUtilities)

7J

DESKTOP

Desktop

0S

ISO 11

ISO 11 Swedish

0I

ISO 15

ISO 15 Italian

2S

ISO 17

ISO 17 Spanish

1G

ISO 21

ISO 21 Germany

1E

ISO 4

ISO 4 United Kingdom

0U

ISO 6

ISO 6 ASCII

0D

ISO 60

ISO 60 Danish

1F

ISO 69

ISO 69 French

0N

ISO L1

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1

2N

ISO L2

ISO 8859/2 Latin 2

5N

ISO L5

ISO 8859/9 Latin 5

1U

LEGAL

Legal

8M

MATH-8

Math-8

12J

MC TEXT

MC Text

6J

MS PUBL

Microsoft Publishing

10U

PC-8

PC-8

11U

PC-8 D/N

PC-8 D/N (Danish/Norwegian)

9T

PC8-TK

PC-8 Turkish

12U

PC-850

PC-850

17U

PC-852

PC-852

15U

PI FONT

Pi-Font

5M

PS MATH

PS Math

10J

PS TEXT

PS Text

8U

ROMAN-8

Roman-8

13J

VN INTL

Ventura International

6M

VN MATH

Ventura Math

14J

VN US

Ventura US

9U

WIN 3.0

Windows 3.0 "Latin 1"

19U

WIN L1

Windows 3.1 Latin 1 "ANSI"

9E

WIN L2

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

5T

WIN L5

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

Not Supported:

Not Supported:

19M

Symbol

579L

Wingdings

Not Supported:

719

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-7. Symbol sets list (Control panel-PCL setup)

720

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-8. Factory default


This section gives the factory default for the print controller network settings.
Data transmission speed

Automatic recognition

Password

sysadm

IP address

0.0.0.0

Subnet mask
TCP/IP related settings

Novell NetWare
related

AppleTalk related

255.0.0.0

Default gateway

0.0.0.0

Base port number

10000

DHCP

Enabled

Specified IP address

Enabled

LDP burner

Enabled

Ethernet frame type

Ethernet II

NetWare (IPX/SPX)

Enabled

Print server name

KCA_ serial number

Server password

Not set

Polling interval

1 second

Ethernet frame type

Automatic detection*

Bindery

Enabled

NDS context name

Not set

NDS tree name

Not set

AppleTalk

Enabled

Printer name

KCA_ serial number

Ethernet frame type


Peer-to-peer related

802.2 On 802.3

Peer-to-peer

Enabled

Printer name

KCA_ serial number

Ethernet frame type

Automatic detection*

* If the frame type could not be acquired during starting, [802.2 On 802.3] is selected.

721

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-9. Initializing setting values


This section explains methods for initializing all the parameters set for the network controller.
The network controller parameters can be initialized from the copier's control panel or with a Web utility.

When the network controller is initialized, the printer server name, IP address, and all other information
currently set for the printer network is deleted. However, the network controller serial number and Mac
address information are not deleted.

Initializing from the control panel

Press the [SCAN/PRINT] button on the control panel.

The [Printer basic mode] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

Touch the [SETTING] key on the LCD screen.

The [Main Menu] screen is displayed on the LCD screen.

722

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-9. Initializing setting values

Touch the [5] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The [Network settings] screen is displayed.

Touch the [NEXT] key twice on the LCD screen.

Touch the [12] key on the LCD screen.

723

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-9. Initializing setting values

Touch the [OK] key on the screen.


A screen for confirming execution of [Factory Default] is displayed.

Touch the [1] key on the LCD screen.


z To cancel the [factory default], touch the [2] key on the LCD screen, then touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.


The screen for inputting the password is displayed.

10

Use the alphanumeric keys on the LCD screen to input the password.

z The factory default for the password is [sysadm].


z For details on passwords, refer to [Admin Password](

Page 460).

z For details on character input, refer to [Character input on LCD screen] (

11

Page 456).

Touch the [OK] key on the LCD screen.

724

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-9. Initializing setting values

12
13

Wait until the LCD screen display changes from [Initializing] - [Standby].
Switch off the main power for the copier, wait about 10 seconds, then switch the main
power back on again.
The network controller parameters are returned to their factory default.

After switching Off the Copier main power, if you switch it back on without waiting, the print controller
may not operate normally and errors may be displayed.
In this case, if you switch the Copier main power Off again, wait at least 10 seconds or so, then switch
the main power On again, the system will operate normally.

Initializing with Web utility


For details on the procedure for initializing with the Web utility, refer to the Web utilitys users manual.

725

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-10. Printing the network settings list


You can print the [Network settings list] and check various settings for the network controller.
The network setting list can be printed from the copiers control panel or with instructions from the Web utility.
The factory default are so that they can be output from the copier automatically when the startup of the
network controller is complete.
For the method for printing the network settings list from the copiers control panel, refer to [NIC Config.]
(

Page 396)

For the method for printing the network settings list with the Web utility, refer to the users manual of the
web utility in the user software CD.

726

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-11. Index according to item


Numerics

Combination .................................................. 157, 159


Communications protocol ....................................... 553
confidential transmission ........................................ 274
Config.Data ............................................................ 394
Connecting the computer and the hard disk .......... 366
Connection diagram ................................................. 11
Connection with the network .................................. 449
Conserving toner .................................................... 249
Contrast .................................................................. 172
Control panel ................................................. 379, 674
Copy mode ............................................................ 5, 6
counter values ........................................................ 256
Creating groups ...................................................... 282
Custom Page Default ............................................. 219

100Base-TX ............................................................ 447


10Base-T ................................................................. 447

A
Access rights ............................................... 33, 50, 72
Add Printer ................................................................ 34
Add Printer Wizard ............................... 24, 41, 51, 60
Adding driver ................................ 200, 201, 204, 209
address of the FTP server ....................................... 326
Admin Password ..................................................... 460
Adobe driver .............................................................. 15
Adobe driver installation .............................. 24, 60, 94
Adobe PS .................................................................. 15
Anonymous ............................................................. 327
AppleTalk ....................................................... 448, 501
AppleTalk Setup screen .......................................... 501
Application function ................................................. 352
Application function setting screen .......................... 352
Archive format ......................................................... 181
arp command ................................................. 627, 650
ASCII ....................................................................... 251
Auto reset timer ....................................................... 436

D
Data LED ................................................................ 379
Default Gateway ..................................................... 472
Default Paper ......................................................... 410
default printer ...................................... 21, 56, 65, 78
default setting ......................................................... 410
Delayed Transmission ............................................ 274
Deleting port .................................................. 206, 211
Deleting the printer port .......................................... 203
destination ............................................ 275, 317, 325
destinations already registered ..................... 323, 329
DHCP .......................................... 455, 476, 627, 649
Dial-in ..................................................................... 297
Direction ................................................................. 217
Disable Bindery ...................................................... 499
DNS Server ............................................................ 536
DNS Setup ............................................................. 535
Downloading fonts .................................................. 709
driver name .......................................... 200, 204, 208
driver version ........................................ 200, 204, 208
Dual page ............................................................... 353
Duplex ........................................................... 155, 412
duplex printing ........................................................ 229
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol .................... 476

B
Back cover ..................................................... 169, 241
Banner Page ........................................................... 398
Banner Page Tray ................................................... 400
Base Port Number .......................................... 474, 558
Bi-directional support .............................................. 203
Binary ...................................................................... 251
Bindery context ....................................................... 607
Bindery emulation .......................................... 604, 605
bindery service emulation ....................................... 604
bitmap format preview ............................................. 250
black and white reversed ............................... 177, 244
body ........................................................................ 321
Booklet ........................................................... 159, 233
Booklet-Right ........................................................... 159
BOOTP .................................................................... 627
BOOTP daemon ...................................................... 651
box ........................................................ 298, 304, 310
Box No. list .............................................................. 337
box number ............................................................. 311
Brightness ............................................................... 172
Broadcast ....................................................... 285, 558
broadcast group ...................................................... 285
Browser ................................................................... 543

E
EKC/ECM ...............................................................
EKC/ECM counter ..................................................
EKC/ECM limits ......................................................
EKC/ECM password ..............................................
E-Mail .......................................... 305, 317, 333,
email address ................................................ 318,
E-Mail body list .......................................................
E-Mail registration/edit ...........................................
E-Mail select screen ...............................................
Email Setup screen ................................................
E-Mail subject list ...................................................
Enable AppleTalk ...................................................
Enable AppleTalk screen .......................................
enlarged .................................................................
EPS ............................................................... 181,

C
cable specifications ................................................. 680
Character input ........................................................ 456
Check button ........................................................... 379
Checking settings .................................................... 359
Checking the printer driver .................... 200, 204, 208
Collate ............................................................ 162, 235

727

253
256
256
254
520
529
335
331
317
520
334
502
502
221
250

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-11. Index according to item


E-RDH ..................................................................... 682
E-RDH memory .............................................. 303, 682
error list .......................................................... 375, 428
error report .............................................................. 278
Ethernet ..................................................................... 10
Ethernet Address .................................................... 457
Ethernet connector .................................................. 449
Euro currency symbol ............................................. 181
Executing a test print ................................... 48, 69, 91
Expanding memory ................................................. 682

FTP Setup screen .................................................. 515


FTP Timeout .......................................................... 518
Function list .......................................... 136, 215, 688

G
gateway .................................................................. 472

H
Halftoning ............................................................... 172
Hard disk ................................................................ 683
IEEE1284 ................................................................. 10
image ..................................................................... 172
image rotation ........................................................ 358
Image View ............................................................ 135
Incomplete job list .................................................. 264
initialized ................................................................ 671
Initializing setting values ........................................ 722
input tray ................................................................ 222
Installing fonts ........................................................ 703
Installing the Adobe driver ........................................ 24
Interfaces ................................................................. 10
Internet Explorer ..................................................... 543
Internet printing ...................................................... 609
intranet ................................................................... 609
IP Addr.in NVRAM ................................................. 478
IP Addr.in NVRAM screen ...................................... 478
IP Address ............................................ 455, 468, 649
IP Address screen .................................................. 468
IP based printers .................................................... 547
IP Peer-to-Peer ...................................................... 554
IPP ......................................................................... 609
IPP attribute ........................................................... 610
Ip-p2p ..................................................................... 557
IPX based printers .................................................. 547

F code ..................................................................... 298


Factory Default ............................................... 540, 671
Factory settings ....................................................... 721
Fast Ethernet ........................................................... 447
fax job ...................................................................... 382
fax kit ..................................................... 268, 269, 271
Fax mode .................................................................... 5
Fax reception ................................................. 269, 294
Fax transmission ............................................ 268, 273
file format ................................................................ 345
File Name ................................................................ 344
File path .................................................................. 326
file save ................................................................... 250
File Server ............................................................... 489
Filters ...................................................................... 657
fine mode ................................................................ 274
Fixed box ........................................................ 294, 298
Flag ......................................................................... 562
Flip Horizontal ......................................................... 243
Flip on long edge ............................................ 155, 229
Flip on short edge .......................................... 155, 229
Flip side 2 ................................................................ 356
Flip Vertical ............................................................. 243
Flow for network scanner ............................................ 9
Flow for printing ........................................................... 6
folded documents .................................................... 355
following network components are installed ............ 553
font .......................................................................... 180
Font Inclusion .......................................................... 251
font list ............................................................ 710, 712
Fonts ....................................................................... 702
Format ..................................................................... 251
Format HD ............................................................... 430
Frame Type ............................................................. 497
Frame/fold erasure .................................................. 357
Frames .................................................................... 231
From ........................................................................ 529
Front cover ..................................................... 169, 241
FTP ......................................................................... 515
FTP list .................................................................... 341
FTP Port Number .................................................... 516
FTP Port Number screen ........................................ 516
FTP registration/edit ....................................... 325, 338
FTP select ............................................................... 325
FTP server ............................................ 303, 306, 325

J
jaggedness .................................................... 173,
Job .........................................................................
Job deletion ............................................................
Job list ....................................................................
Job Time Out ................................................. 184,

248
383
383
382
404

K
Key operator mode ................................................. 432
Konica driver ............................................................ 15
Konica driver installation ..................... 17, 34, 51, 73
Konica Network Scanner Driver .................... 362, 363

L
Landscape ..................................................... 166,
language level ........................................................
layout ......................................................................
Layout direction ......................................................
LCD screen ............................................................
LEDs ......................................................................
LEDs showing network controller status ....... 644,

728

238
251
230
231
379
644
675

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-11. Index according to item


network service ......................................................
Network setting ......................................................
network settings list ................................................
NIC Config. .............................................................
NIC Domain Name .................................................
Non image area erase ............................................
non-standard paper size ........................................
non-volatile RAM ....................................................
notice list/password ................................................
Novell Directory Service .........................................
number of copies to print ............................... 139,
number of sheets printed is counted ......................
NWADMIN ..............................................................

left binding ............................................................... 233


left/right reversed ........................................... 179, 243
limiter value .................................................... 253, 256
Local printer ........................................... 3, 25, 53, 62
Local printer attached to this computer ..................... 75
Login ....................................................................... 326
LPD ......................................................................... 577
lpd ........................................................................... 628
LPD Banner ............................................................. 480
LPD/LPR ........................................................ 448, 577
LPD/LPR printer .................................... 581, 588, 594
LPD/LPR printer port ............................. 581, 588, 594
LPD/LPR printing .................................................... 480
LPR ......................................................................... 577
LPR Port ......................................................... 589, 596
LPT .......................................................................... 202
LPT port .................................................................. 202

580
449
462
396
538
358
219
478
603
604
216
256
606

O
Offset ............................................................. 164, 236
OHP ....................................................................... 220
on combined pages ................................................ 231
Operation environment ............................................. 10
Options ................................................................... 682
order ....................................................................... 223
order in which pages can be assigned ................... 231
Orientation ..................................................... 140, 414
Output tray .................................................... 149, 224
Overlay ................................................................... 186
Override Paper ....................................................... 418

M
Macintosh ................................................................ 448
magnification ratio .......................................... 221, 347
Main page ............................................................... 548
Managing the print count ......................................... 253
MAP ...................................................... 543, 627, 645
MAP setup ............................................................... 547
Margins .......................................................... 151, 225
Max Hops for ........................................................... 557
Max Hops for IP Search .......................................... 547
Max.Message Size .................................................. 527
Media Type .................................................... 143, 220
Memory ................................................................... 682
Memory mode ................................................ 343, 355
Menu Configuration ................................................. 385
Message Body ........................................................ 533
Microsoft TCP/IP printing ........................................ 580
Minute (s) to go ....................................................... 383
Mirror image ............................................................ 243
Mixed Original ......................................................... 354
mode is switched ......................................................... 5
multiple pages on one sheet ................................... 230

P
Page (s) left ............................................................ 383
Page notation language ........................................... 16
Pages per sheet/Layout ......................................... 157
Paper size ..................................................... 141, 218
Paper Source ................................................ 147, 222
Paper type .............................................................. 143
Parallel interface ...................................................... 10
Password ........................... 193, 253, 327, 460, 487
Password print ....................................................... 193
PC-Fax ................................................................... 268
PC-Fax transmission/reception flow ........................... 7
PCL .......................................................................... 15
PCL Demo Page .................................................... 390
PCL Font List ................................................ 391, 710
PCONSOLE ........................................................... 606
PDL Select ............................................................. 408
Peer-to-Peer .................................................. 447, 550
phonebook ........................................... 270, 275, 280
Plain paper ............................................................. 220
platen glass ............................................................ 303
port .................................................................... 42, 53
Port addition/deletion ........................... 203, 207, 212
port connecting ....................................................... 200
Port No. .................................................................. 327
port number ................................................... 474, 523
Port settings ........................................................... 202
Portrait ........................................................... 166, 238
ports .................................................................. 20, 27
PostScript error ...................................................... 262

N
name of the profile .................................................. 326
NDS ................................................................ 604, 606
NDS Tree ................................................................ 493
negative image ............................................... 177, 244
NetBIOS Name ....................................................... 509
NetBIOS Name screen ............................................ 509
Netscape Navigator ................................................. 543
NetWare ......................................................... 448, 482
NetWare 3.x ............................................................ 603
NetWare 4.x ............................................................ 604
network .................................................................... 447
network controller information ................................. 559
Network printer ....................................... 3, 25, 54, 63
Network printer server ............................................... 43
network protocol ...................................................... 547

729

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-11. Index according to item


registration number ....................................... 318,
Registration/edit Menu screen ...............................
re-sends .................................................................
Reset ......................................................................
Reset button ...........................................................
Resolution ............................................ 176, 274,
reverse ...................................................................
Reverse Address Resolution Protocol ...................
Reverse image .......................................................
right binding ............................................................
ROM Version ..........................................................

PostScript error information .................................... 183


PostScript files ........................................................ 250
PostScript font ......................................................... 181
PostScript format ..................................................... 250
Postscript header .................................................... 182
PostScript Job ......................................................... 250
PostScript level ....................................................... 251
PostScript output format .......................................... 181
PostScript PS-343 option product specifications .... 681
PostScript timeout ................................................... 184
PostScript Type 1 font ............................................. 702
Preparing a new phonebook ................................... 290
pre-registered boxes ............................................... 315
primary file server .................................................... 603
primary print server ................................................. 511
Print as a mirror image ............................................ 179
print direction ........................................................... 217
print job ................................................................... 382
Print on Startup ....................................................... 462
print order ................................................................ 223
print quality .............................................................. 172
print queue .............................................................. 603
Print screen ............................................................. 214
printed laid out ......................................................... 230
Printer and Faxes ...................................................... 73
printer daemon ........................................................ 577
Printer EKC/ECM .................................................... 253
Printer mode basic screen ............................. 308, 381
Printer Name .................................................... 20, 504
Printer port assignment .................................. 206, 211
printer server ........................................................... 603
Printing from an application .................. 32, 49, 71, 93
Printing on ............................................................... 229
Printing overlaying ................................................... 186
Printing rear of the paper ........................................ 155
Problems with optional products ............................. 684
product specifications .............................................. 677
protocol ................................................. 251, 447, 577
PS Demo Page ....................................................... 392
PS files .................................................................... 250
PS Font List ............................................................. 393
PSBanner ................................................................ 657

331
330
205
671
379
346
223
653
357
233
457

S
Saving phonebooks ................................................ 289
Scaling ................................................................... 145
Scan Data Auto Del. ............................................... 406
Scan Error List ....................................................... 428
Scan to box ................................................... 304, 310
Scan to E-Mail ............................................... 305, 317
Scan to FTP .................................................. 306, 325
scanned data into a computer ................................ 362
Scanner driver screen ............................................ 370
Scanner setting basic ............................................. 343
Scanner/printer mode ................................................. 5
Scanning mode ...................................................... 343
secondary print server ............................................ 513
security level ..................................................... 50, 72
segment ................................................................. 558
Select transmission method ................................... 330
Selecting the destination ........................................ 308
Sender ID ............................................................... 274
Sending to file server ............................................. 303
Sending with E-Mail ............................................... 303
Serial Number ........................................................ 457
Server Name .......................................................... 485
Server Name screen .............................................. 485
Server Password screen ........................................ 487
set the network connection .................................... 452
Setting options ............... 22, 29, 40, 47, 58, 67, 80
Setting the fax unit ................................................. 271
share the printer ................................................ 57, 66
Shared Printers ........................................................ 43
Smoothing ..................................................... 173, 248
SMTP Port Number ................................................ 523
SMTP server .......................................................... 303
SMTP Server Name ............................................... 521
SMTP Timeout ....................................................... 525
SNMP ..................................................................... 625
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ....................... iv
Sort ......................................................................... 162
special mode .......................................................... 233
Spool ............................................................. 207, 212
Spool MS-DOS print jobs ....................................... 202
Spool settings ......................................................... 203
spread open document .......................................... 353
Staple ............................................................ 166, 238
Sub Address ........................................................... 274

Q
Queue Scan Rate .................................................... 495
Queue Scan Rate screen ........................................ 495

R
RADF ...................................................................... 303
rarp .......................................................................... 653
rasterizing .................................................................... 6
Real mode ............................................................... 343
rear .......................................................................... 229
Reconnect ............................................................... 202
reduced ................................................................... 221
Registering recipient information ............................. 280
registration name .................................................... 319

730

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-11. Index according to item


sub power ................................................................ 382
Subject ........................................................... 320, 531
Subnet Mask ........................................................... 470
substitute driver .................................................. 39, 46
super fine mode ...................................................... 274

T
TCP/IP ................................................... 464, 553, 625
TCP/IP settings .............................................. 552, 579
test print .................................................................... 31
Text/Photo Enhance ................................................ 345
Time you want to transmit ....................................... 274
Timeout ................................................................... 201
Timeout time .................................................. 205, 210
Toner save .............................................................. 175
top/bottom reversed ................................................ 243
Transmission retry ................................................... 201
transmitted as a fax ................................................. 268
tray ............................................... 147, 149, 222, 224
tray which to output ................................................. 224
trouble ..................................................................... 674
TrueType font ................................................. 180, 702
TWAIN scanner driver ............................................. 362

U
Unit Info ................................................................... 457
UNIX ............................................................... 448, 625
Unix print service ............................................ 587, 594
UNIX-TCP/IP Programs .......................................... 655
Update NIC ............................................................. 458
upper limit on the number of sheets printed ............ 256
upper limit on the print count ................................... 253
URL ......................................................................... 326
Usage of this Manual .............................................. xxv
User box ......................................................... 294, 298
User ID ........................................................... 193, 254
UTP cable ............................................................... 449

V
version ................................................... 200, 204, 208
virtual port ............................................. 202, 206, 211
Virtual Printer Commands ....................................... 669

W
Wait timeout ............................................................
Watermark ...................................................... 189,
Web utility ....................................................... 543,
WINS .......................................................................

184
245
548
508

Z
Zone Name ............................................................. 506

731

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-12. Purpose-oriented index


C

Setting the resolution ..................................... 176


Smoothing ....................................................... 173
Toner save ...................................................... 175

Connection between the computer and printer


Windows 95/98/Me ..........................................200
Windows NT 4.0...............................................204
Windows 2000/XP............................................208

Installing
Adobe Type Manager (ATM)........................... 706
Driver installation for Windows 95/98/Me.......... 17
Driver installation for Windows NT 4.0 .............. 33
Driver installation for Windows 2000................. 50
Driver installation for Windows XP .................... 72
Driver installation for Macintosh ........................ 94
Fonts ............................................................... 702
Installing the network scanner driver............... 363
Uninstalling the printer driver .......................... 100

Control panel operation


Control panel Names .......................................379
Inputting text ....................................................342
Job list screen ..................................................382
LCD screen operation methods .......................381
Printer Settings ................................................384
Controller settings
Banner Page ....................................................398
Banner Page Tray ............................................400
Job Time Out ...................................................404
PDL Select .......................................................408
Scan Data Auto Delete ....................................406

K
Key Operation mode
Setting with Key Operator Mode
Auto reset timer............................................... 436
Main menu display .......................................... 442
Moving to power save ..................................... 440
PRINT W/O key count..................................... 437
Reset data after job......................................... 443
Scan image rotation ........................................ 441
Scan Quality.................................................... 438
SCAN W/O key count...................................... 439
Switching the key operator mode.................... 432

D
Destination
Selecting the destination
Importing scanned data into a computer..........362
Sending to FTP server (Scan to FTP)..............325
Sending with email (Scan to E-mail) ................317
Storing to a box (Scan to box) .........................310
Driver
AdobePS ............................................................15
Network scanner driver ....................................363
PCL ....................................................................15

L
List
Configuring Data ............................................. 394
NIC Configuration ........................................... 396
PC-Fax transmission error reports .................. 278
PCL Font List .................................................. 391
PS Font List .................................................... 393
Scan Error List ................................................ 428

F
Fax function
Receiving Faxes
Fax reception settings ......................................294
Sending Faxes
PC-Fax transmission error reports ...................278
Registering destination ....................................270
Sending faxes ..................................................273
Using a phonebook ..........................................292

N
Network functions
AppleTalk Setup.............................................. 501
Base Port Number .......................................... 474
Character input on LCD screen....................... 456
Default Gateway ............................................. 472
DNS Setup ...................................................... 535
Email Setup..................................................... 520
FTP Setup ....................................................... 515
Internet printing ............................................... 609
IP Address ...................................................... 468
IP Address in NVRAM..................................... 478
LPD Banner .................................................... 480
NetWare Setup ............................................... 482
NIC .................................................................. 457
Print on Startup ............................................... 462
Printing with AppleTalk.................................... 638
Printing with IP Peer-to-Peer........................... 550
Printing with IPX Peer-to-Peer ........................ 570

Font
Downloading fonts ...........................................709
Installing Adobe Type Manager (ATM) ............706
Installing fonts ..................................................703
PCL font list......................................................710
PostScript font list ............................................712
PS Demo Page
(only when PostScript option installed)..392
Setting the font.................................................180

I
Image settings (Windows)
Halftoning .........................................................172
Printing with black and white reversed.............177
Printing with left/right reversed.........................179

732

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-12. Purpose-oriented index


Printing one copy at a time of all pages
(Collate) ................................................ 235
Stapling (Staple) ............................................. 238
Printing multiple pages (Windows)
Attaching a front cover/back cover
(Front Cover/Back Cover) ..................... 169
Folding paper in two to make booklets
(Combination) ....................................... 159
Outputting sorted into separate sets of copies
(Offset) .................................................. 164
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
(Pages per sheet/Layout) ..................... 157
Printing on both the front and rear of the paper
(Duplex) ................................................ 155
Printing one copy at a time of all pages
(Collate/Sort)......................................... 162
Stapling (Staple) ............................................. 166
Setting basic print function (Windows)
Printing enlarged/reduced (Scaling)................ 145
Selecting the input tray (Paper Source) .......... 147
Selecting the output tray (Output Tray) ........... 149
Selecting the type of paper
(Media Type/Paper Type) ..................... 143
Setting the margin (Margins)........................... 151
Setting the number of copies to print
(Copies). ............................................... 139
Setting the print direction (Orientation) ........... 140
Setting the print paper size (Paper size) ......... 141
Setting basic print function (Macintosh)
Printing enlarged/reduced
(Magnification ratio) .............................. 221
Selecting the input tray (Paper source)........... 222
Selecting the output tray (Output tray) ............ 224
Selecting the print order (Reverse print order) 223
Selecting the type of paper (Media type) ........ 220
Setting the margin (Margins)........................... 225
Setting the number of copies to print
(Copies) ................................................ 216
Setting the print direction (Direction)............... 217
Setting the print paper size (Paper) ................ 218
Special printing (Windows)
Printing overlaying another document
(Overlay) ............................................... 186
Printing with a password (Password Print)...... 193
Printing watermarks (Watermark) ................... 189
Special printing (Macintosh)
Conserving toner............................................. 249
Printing watermarks ........................................ 245
Printing with black and white reversed............ 244
Printing with top/bottom or left/right reversed.. 243
Smoothing characters and curved lines .......... 248

Printing with LPD/LPR .....................................576


Printing with NetWare ......................................602
Setting from the control panel ..........................452
Subnet Mask ....................................................470
TCP/IP Setup ...................................................464
WINS Setup .....................................................508

O
Options
Hard disk ..........................................................683
Memory ............................................................682
Setting Options
Windows 95/98/Me ......................................22, 29
Windows NT 4.0...........................................40, 47
Windows 2000 .............................................58, 67
Windows XP.................................................80, 89

P
Postscript setting (Windows)
Addition of Euro currency symbol ....................181
PostScript error information printing ................183
Postscript header .............................................182
PostScript output format ..................................181
PostScript timeout values ................................184
Postscript setting (Macintosh)
File save...........................................................250
Printer functions
Setting printer functions
Setting print default .........................................410
Windows 95/98/Me ..........................................120
Windows NT 4.0...............................................123
Windows 2000 .................................................127
Windows XP.....................................................131
Macintosh.........................................................214
Printing
Checking printing
Windows 95/98/Me ............................................31
Windows NT 4.0.................................................48
Windows 2000 ...................................................69
Windows XP.......................................................91
Macintosh...........................................................99
Managing print count
Printer EKC/ECM .............................................254
Printing multiple pages (Macintosh)
Attaching a front cover/back cover
(Front Cover/Back Cover) ......................241
Folding paper in two to make booklets
(Special mode).......................................233
Outputting sorted into separate sets of copies
(Offset)...................................................236
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
(Document pages/print pages/layout
direction) ................................................230
Printing on both the front and rear of the paper
(Duplex printing) ....................................229

S
Scanning
Application function settings ........................... 352
Scanning documents ...................................... 344
Using the network scanner driver.................... 363

733

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

29-12. Purpose-oriented index


Setting values
Factory default .................................................721
Initializing network controller setting ................540
Initializing setting values ..................................722
Specifications
Fax functions....................................................678
Network functions ............................................679
PostScript PS-343 option product ....................681
Printer functions ...............................................677
Scanner functions ............................................678

T
Text
Inputting text ....................................................342

U
Utilities
MAP .................................................................543

734

VII Appendix Chapter 29 Appendix

Konica Business Technologies, Inc.


500 Day Hill Road Windsor, CT 06095
Telephone: (860)683-2222
OP-IP-422-01

2002.1
IP422_US_v101